FAPT Ladder For PC-Operator Manual

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
FAPT Ladder for PC
Operators Manual
B-66131EN/05
Japan 1995
Warnings and notices for

this publication
GFLE-003
Warning
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various
matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done,
or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this
manual should be regarded as impossible.
Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have
been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or
variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with
installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in
all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to
holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with
respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of
the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall
apply.
The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation
CIMPLICITY
Genius
The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

Alarm Master
CIMSTAR
Field Control
Genet
Helpmate
LogicMaster
Modelmaster
PowerMotion
ProLoop
PROMACRO
Series Five
Series 90
Series One
Series Six
Series Three
VuMaster
Workmaster
Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd.

Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
I.
BASICS
1.
OVERVIEW
2.
INSTALLATION
2.1
(NORMAL
PC9801 operating
Installation
Procedure
4.
BASICOPERATION
5.
..........................................
l-11
l-15
..q
.......................
...........................................
Menu Configuration
.....................................
Common System Operations
Model Setting
l-19
l-21
l-22
l-22
.....................................................
5.1 .l
Title data editing
5.1.2
Ladder diagram editing
5.1.3
5.1.4
...............................
Symbol and comment editing
........................................
Message editing
5.1.5
I0 module editing
5.1.6
System parameter editing
l-25
........................................
l-26
...................................
l-60
l-68
l-70
.......................................
l-73
.................................
l-85
....................................................
5.2
Printout
5.3
Compilation
5.3.2
l-17
................................................
Editing
5.3.1
1 - 94
.................................................
l-95
.............................................
Operation
Password
set function
5.3.3
Changing
5.3.4
It is possible to choose output data
5.3.6
5.4
5.5
Net comment)
to ROM format file
l-103
.............
l-105
................................
The list of source program
........................................
DOS command
Decompilation
l-109
..............................................
5.4.1
Operation
............................................
5.4.2
Outputting
to split files
5.4.3
Converting
a step sequence
5.4.4
Merge
Link
1 - 103
.........................
the Order of Subprograms
(Symbol/Comment.
l-99
.............
(PMCRAlRA3/RB3/RB4RB5/RB6/RC3!RC4/NB!NB2)
5.3.5
l-17
.....................
....................................................
OPERATION
5.1
environment
1- 7
l-10
...........................
....................................................
ACTIVATION
4.3
1- 6
._f .............
...............
environment
IBM PC/AT operating
3.
4.2
1-5
...................................................
..........................................
Environment
Operating
2.1.2
4.1
l-1
......................................................
2.1.1
2.2
OPERATIONS)
l-110
l-110
l-112
...................................
program according
..............................................
......................................................
to the model
.......
1-113
1-113
l-116
5.6 InputiOutput. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II.
1-124
Transfer
5.6.3
Transfer
to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL
5.6.4
Transfer
to and from PMC-N!NA
(FANUC Series 0)
131
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-140
. . .
1-142
.................
1-147
. . . . .
1-149
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-150
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-152
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-153
Transfer
5.6.7
Memory card interface
5.6.8
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS
5.6.9
FLOPPY CASSETTE
(FANUC SYSTEM
F-MODEL
to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB!QC

in the personal computer
ADAPTER
+ 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)
Conversion
of a source program to a mnemonic
5.7.2
Conversion
of a mnemonic
5.7.3
Mnemonic
5.7.4
Sample mnemonic
file format
5.7.6
The note if the step sequence
5.7.7
User batch file execution
OPERATIONS
. . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-157
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-166
files (single-format)
Sample mnemonic
(NOTES
file
file to a source program
5.7.5
D Mate)
and memory card
format)
5.7.1
files (all-format)
function
is selected
when setting a model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-170
1-171
ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCAT
Function for Transferring
Data between
1.l.l
Command
1.1.2
Communications
1.1.3
Protocol
1.1.4
BUSY control
1.1.5
Data start and end codes
1.1.6
Data conversion
1.1.7
Transmission
1.1.8
Error detection
the P-G and PC
..................
2-l
..................
2-l
2-l
...............................
input during startup
2-2
...................................
settings
2-4
...............................................
2-4
...........................................
2-5
...................................
(return codes)
...............................
2-5
and receive data
...............................
2-5
and messages
...............................
2-6
Error detection
and handling
Convert the PMC Type of Sequence
by system parameter
1.2.2
Convert with signal address converter

Using data in a sequence
Standard Symbol Data
1.4
Changing
2-8
..........................
Program
Converting
1.3
2-7
.................................
1.2.1
1.2.3
l-
1-134
for PMC-QA
Editing
1-128
. . . . .
5.6.6
1.1.9
. .
A,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
input/Output
Mnemonic
AB.C.!E)
(FANUC Series 15MODEL
56.5
1. COMMON
1.2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2
APPLICATIONS
1.1
1-122
ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)
-MODELB)
5.7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1
to and from PMC-L/M
l-119
2-8
........................
editing
2-9
..........................
program for another program
............
2-11
.........................................
Printer Output Format
Changing
1.4.2
Setting the top margin
1.4.3
Setting the spacing between
the paper selection
name
..........................
the LADDER
Setting the line spacing
1.4.6
Settingthe left margin
net
...................
.......................
...................................
....................................
2-14
2-14
....................................
1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper

1.4.5
2-12
...................................
1.4.1
2-11
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-16
Setting the title of printout
.................................
1.4.8
Setting the cross-reference
list output format guidance
1.4.9
list output information
1.4.10
Specifying
1.4.11
1.
1.2
1.3
1.4
3.
list output format
list readiwrite
list linefeed
1.4.13
Specifying
the cross-reference
list page break
1.4.14
Setting the output format guidance
...................
...........................
...............................
1.4.15
Setting the output information
1.4.16
Setting the output format
1.4.17
Setting the read/write coil guidance
1.4.18
Setting line feed
STEP SEQUENCE
information
..................................
...........................
3.1
3.2
2 - 21
2 - 22
2-22
2-22
2 - 23
3-l
.......................................
.........................
with the Step Sequence Method

...................................
A Program Configuration Screen
.............................
The Configration of a Sequence Program
DataFlow
........................................................
...............................................
Creating a Step Sequence
3.2.2
2-21
2-23
.......................................
Programming
3.2.1
2-21
2-23
........................................
......................................................
Basic Operation
2 - 20
....
FUNCTIONS
WhatisaStepSequence?
EDITING
2 - 19
2 - 20
.................
.....................
the cross-reference
....
................
coil guidance
Specifying
Setting form feed
information
...................................................
SETTING A MODEL ................................................
2.1 Operation ....................................................
1.5
2.
OVERVIEW
1.1
the cross-reference
1.4.12
1.4.19
III.THE
2-19
1.4.7
.......................................
.....................
of the step sequence
...........................
Creating a step sequence program
Creating a subprogram
3-l
3- 1
3- 1
3- 2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-6
3- 6
3- 9
3- 9
3 - 10
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
1 DATA TRANSFER
CABLES
APPENDIX
2 FUNCTION
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
APPENDIX
4 MODULAR
FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-L/M
APPENDIX
5 BOOT SYSTEM
6 MEMORY
APPENDIX
7 CAUTIONS
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
APPENDIX
9 SOFTWARE
VERSION
APPENDIX
lOMANAGING
A SOURCE
APPENDIX
11 SYSTEM
APPENDIX
12 INQUIRY FORM
WITH RAM
............
(PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3
OPERATING
PROCEDURE
CARD COMPATIBILITY
MESSAGE
TABLE
............
(FOR THE FS20)
.........
NB, AND QC)
DATA (CHGMES)
...............
.........................................
A5 - 1
A6 - 1
1
A8 - 1
A9 - 1
AlO-
..........................
FILE %%?oFLSET.CNF..
A4 - 1
A7-
.............................
................................
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
ONLY)
(FOR THE PMC-RAl!RA3,
FOR USING THE O/S
A2 - 1
A3 - 1
......................................
PROGRAMMING
APPENDIX
Al - 1
..................................
.............
Al 1 - 1
A12-
I.
BASICS
(NORMAL OPERATIONS)
1. OVERVIEW
1. OVERVIEW
This manual describes
offline
programming
products
the software
system
are designed
products
for FANUC
listed below which are included
PMC
sequence
generation.
Name
Specification
FAPT LADDER PMC-L/M/P
A08B-9200-J500#JP
FAPT LADDER PMC-N
A08B-9200-J501
FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC
A08B-9200-J502#JP
For the NEC PC9801
#JP
Series and compatible

machines
(Japanese
version)
FAPT LADDER PMC-UM/P
A08B-9201 -JSOO#EN
For IBM PC/AT and
FAPT LADDER PMC-N
A08B-9201-J501#EN
compatible
FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC
A08B-9201-J502#EN
(English language version)
This manual explains

are specific
software
Remarks
language
BM PC/AT
These
to run on standard personal computers.
Personal
computer
JEC PC9801
program
in the FAPT LADDER
procedures
to the system
designed
how to create PMC sequence
FANUC PMC-MODEL
required
computers.
above that
For PMC operations
and
refer to the manuals listed below.
K/UM!P
Manual (LADDER
language)
B-551 93E
Programming
FANUC PMC-MODEL
and operate the software
for use with personal
programs,
Programming
FANUC PMC-MODEL
to install, activate,
machines
Manual (LADDER language)
B-61013E
PA1 :PA3:RAl RA2!RA3/RBRB2!RB3iRB4!RBSRBG;RC!RC3RC4!NBNB2
Programming
Manual (LADDER language)
B-61 863E
Inquiry form
If you have any questions
after reading this operators
use the inquiry form attached
at Appendix
12 to consult
l-l
manual and the manuals

us the questions.
listed above,
1. OVERVIEW
The following
abbreviations
are used in this manual for PMC models.
Abbreviations
PMC Models
PMC-UM!P
* PMC-L
FANUC PMC-MODEL
* PMC-M
FANUC PMC-MODEL
* PMC-P
FANUC PMC-MODEL
FANUC PMC-MODEL
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RAl
Pfk-N
PMC-R Series
* PMC-RAl
* PMC-RA2
_ *
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RA2
* PMC-RA3
.-
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RA3
PMC-RB
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB
PMCRB2
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB2
* PMC-RB3
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB3
PMC-RB4
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB4
PMC-RB5
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB5
* PMC-RB6
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB6
PMC-RC
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RC
* PMGRC3
FANUC PMC-MODEL
RC3
* PMCRC4
FANUC PM&MODEL
RC4
PMC-PA1
FANUC PMC-MODEL
PA1
PMC-PA3
FANUC PMC-MODEL
PA3
PMC-QA
FANUC PMC-MODEL
QA
PMC-QC
FANUC PMC-MODEL
QC
PMC-NA
FANUC PMC-MODEL
NA
PMC-NB
FANUC PMC-MODEL
NB
PMC-NB2
FANUC PMC-MODEL
NB2
1-2
1. OVERVIEW
The major functions
of the software are listed below.
(1) Sequence program input. display, and editing

(2) Transmission to and from PMC (RAM), and PMC verification
(3) ROM (EPROM,
(4) Sequence
ROM cassette,
and ROM modules)
write, read, and verification
program print-out
. . . . . . . . . . .,................................
>
(-NC
Machine
RS232C
Tool
DVDO
PMC
RS232C
FLOPPY
CASSETTE
/Handy File
Input/Edit
sequence
program
Personal computer
Floppy disk
Memory
card
Memory
c=e interface
NEC PC9801
IBM PC/AT
card
Drawing
1-3
1. OVERVIEW
Operation
flow for FAPT LADDER activation
Prepare personal computer.
MS-DOS,
Reference
chapter/section
and FAPT LADDER
Install MS-DOS
4
Create directory for FAPT LADDER
Section 2.2
1
Install FAPT LADDER
+
Install device drivers
@et CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXECBAT)
Section 2.1
J.
Reset personal computer
Section 5.6
Activate FAPT LADDER
Chapter 3
Set model (PMC)
Section 4.3
Operations includinq editing
Chapter 5
J/
End?
Yes
JI
Terminate FAPT LADDER
l-4
2. INSTALLATION
2.
INSTALLATION
FAPT LADDER
software
used, the contents

be run directly
is stored on the floppy
disks listed
below.
Before
the system
can be
of these system floppy disks must be written to a hard disk; the software
from the floppy disks.
familiar with the hardware
and software
DOS command
and files such as CONFIG.SYS
operation
cannot
To install the system on a hard disk, the user needs to be

of his or her personal
computer,
particularly
with basic MS-
and AUTOEXEC.BAT.
The names of the floppy disks are listed below.

FAPT LADDER PMC-L;M:P
system floppy disk
Vols.1 and 2
A08B-9200-J500
#JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201 -J500 #EN (IBM PC/AT)
FAPT LADDER PMC-Lmodule
floppy disk
FAPT LADDER PMC-M module floppy disk
FAPT LADDER PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk
A08B-9200-J600
#JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201-J600
#EN (IBM PCAT)
A08B-9200-J601
#JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201-J601
#EN (IBM PC/AT)
A08B-9200-J602
#JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201-J602
#EN (IBM PCAT)
A08B-9200-J501
#JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201-J501
#EN (IBM PCAT)
FAPT LADDER PMCRAlIRA2IRA3:RBiRB2/RB3/RB4/RC
A08B-9200-J502
#JP (PC9801)
/RC3/RC4/PAl
A08B-9201 -J502 #EN (IBM PC/AT)
FAPT LADDER PMC-NNAQA
system floppy disk
Vols.1, 2, and 3
!PAYQCNB
system floppy disk
Vols. 1, 2, and 3
FAPT LADDER PMC-RAl IRA2iRA3;PAl
iPA
module
A08B-9200-J603
#JP (PC9801)
floppy disk
A08B-9201 -J603 #EN (IBM PCAT)
FAPT LADDER PMC-RB1RB2RB3.RB4RCRC3.1RC4
A08B-9200-J604
#JP (PC9801)
module floppy disk
A08B-9201-J604
#EN (IBM PCAT)
FAPT LADDER PMC-QC module floppy disk
A08B-9200-J605#JP
(PC9801)
A08B-9201 -J605#EN
(IBM PCAT)
A08B-9200-J606#JP
(PC9801)
A08B-9201-J606#EN
(IBM PC AT)
FAPT LADDER PMC-NB module floppy disk
l-5
2. INSTALLATION
PMC model
Combination
Combination
PMC model
PMC-L
0.8
PMC-RAl
0,
PMC-M
@, @
PMC-RA2
@, @
PMC-M (with MMC)
0.
PMC-RA3
@. QJ
@I
QJ
PMC-P
PMC-RB
@, @
PMC-N
PMC-RB2
@, @
PMC-PA1
@, @
PMC-RB3
@, @
PMC-PA3
0,
PMC-RC
0,
ZJ
PMC-QA
PMC-RC3
0,
PMC-QC
43, @
PMC-RC4
8,
?MC-NA
6J
MC-NB
0,
2.1 Operating Environment

To use the software,
the requirements
installing
check these requirements.
the software,
indicated
in the table below
must
NEC PC9801
be satisfied.
Before
IBM PC/AT
Main memory
Free area of 500K bytes or more is required
Hard disk
About 3M bytes is required
OS
MS-DOS
Printer
NEC PR20lH
for installing
Version 3.1 or later
(Note 1) (Note 2).
the system (Note 3).

PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later
EPSON VP1 000
Epson VP1000 (Note 4)

EMS
A LIM type EMS (expanded

required depending
to be created.
memory specification)
memory
board may be
on the PMC model and the size of a sequence
program
For details, see 2.1.1.
Others
The EGA graphic interface
is
required.
(Note
1)
If the standard
memory
size
of the machine
is insufficient,
memory
expansion
is
required.
(Note 2)
Even if the machine

when an installed
has 640K-byte
driver.
memory,
for example,
space in main memory can be checked
l-6
the memory
uses a large memory

with the MS-DOS
may not be large enough

space.
command
The size of free

CHKDSK.
2. INSTALLATION
(Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required.

(Note 4) To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification
For details, see Section
2.1.1
PC9801 operating
is required.
1.2 in Part II.
environment
(1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT

When starting MS-DOS,
RSDRV.SYS
PRINT.SYS
Add the lines indicated

RSDRV.SYS
the user needs to install the following
below to
and PRINT.SYS
device drivers:
CONFIG.SYS.
are assumed to be under the directory
named
gSDEV on drive A.
DEVICE=A:$(DEVyRSDRV.SYS
DEVICE=A:yDEV'1CPRINT,SYS
(Note)
When
you are using
operators
a memory
card
adapter,
set CONFIG.SYS
referring
to the
manual for the memory card adapter.
(2) Using the expanded memory
The expanded
memory
specification
work area for a sequence

be used.
program.
(An EMS memory
(EMSXMS)
memory
EMSXMS
memory
can be used with the system

allows a larger sequence
size of 256K bytes or more allows
as a
program
to
24000 or more steps to be
edited.)
If EMSXMS
memory
is not used, a sequence
program
of up to about 21840
steps can be
handled when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.
Ladder diagram editing cannot output drawings
be allocated
in main memory
if a free area sufficient
due to the space taken up by resident
for 16000 steps cannot

device
drivers.
In this
case, EMS memory is required.
FANUC has confirmed
that the setting described
below ensures normal operation.
MS-DOS Version 3.38 (for the PC-9801 Series)

Machine with a 80386:80386SX
Specify
the statement
CPU
below as the first DEVICE
device driver is assumed to be under the directory
(Note)
statement
of the CONFIG.SYS
to the manufactures
manual.
l-7
Each
named DEV on drive A.
When an EMS board and EMS device driver are used, change
according
file.
the CONFIGSYS
file
2. INSTALLATION
Expanded
memory
(EMS)
Extended
memory
(XMS)
EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more

(recommended)
* Better
(Kate 1)
to include EMS of 256 kbyte
or more
Note
1)
The quantity
Note 2)
of the EMS and XMS
memory
Please
Symbol
data and Net comment.
specially
for Symbol data or Net comment
At the system
(Note 2)
effects
prepare
can handle
enough
EMS
or XMS
to handle
memory
of large number.
with EMS less than 256 kbytes,
FAPT LADDER
on the performance
the maximum
may be restricted.
number
Please prepare
of steps which
256 kbytes
or more
EMS if possible.
About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:
Although
FAPT LADDER
according
1)
runs with no EMS nor XMS,
enough
to the source program to handle will be necessary
EMS memory
for Ladder
for better performance.
sequence program
FAPT LADDER uses EMS memory for Ladder sequence

When
no EMS memory
conventional
the convenGonal
is found,
program if available.
memory
is used,
and the size of
memory may restrict the number of steps able to be edited.
Ladder sequence
program occupies
the size of the ladder sequence
2)
size of EMS and/or XMS memory
256 kbyte of EMS,
regardless
of the type of PMC, or
program to edit.
EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data
FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol & Comment
When neither
drive,
of them are available,
and processing
FAPT LADDER
data if available.
will make temporary
large number of Symbol & Comment
file on the hard
data may be slower.
About 200 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data.
3)
EMS and XMS memory for Net comment
For Net comment,
FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory,
as same as Symbol & Comment
FAPT LADDER
comment
are used for every 1,000 Net comments.
language input FEP
for PC9801
editing screen.
For Japanese
required.
file
data.
About 200 to 300 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory
(3) Using a Japanese
or temporary
language
For information
allows
comments
in Japanese
to be entered
on the symbol
and
(See Section 51.3.)

input,
a front-end
about
processor
the installation
manual.
1-8
(FEP) for Japanese
and operation
language
input
is
of an FEP, see the relevant
2. INSTALLATION
The following
Japanese
Supplier
language input FEPs can be used:
Driver name
NECAlKl.
NEC
Memory size required
DRV
Remarks
Al step-by-step
About 130K bytes
NECAIK2. DRV
conversion
Al multiple-block
Step-by-step
conversion
Multiple-block
Just Systems
Single-block
NECDIC. DRV
About 40K bytes
ATOKGA. SYS
About 100K bytes
ATOKG
ATOK
conversion
conversion
conversion
ATOKGB. SYS
ATOK7A.
SYS
About 115K bytes
ATOK7B.
SYS
When the EMS is used

Main : 50K bytes
EMS : 64K bytes
Note the following
(a) When
points on Japanese
a Japanese
the Japanese
FAPT
language
language input:
input FEP is activated
language input FEP displays
LADDER
screen
(in the Japanese
language
data on a section of the screen.
may temporarily
be in disarray.
screen returns to normal when Japanese
language
input mode),
As a result, the
However,
the FAPT
LADDER
input is completed
(Japanese
language
input mode is terminated).
(W When
a comment
is entered using only Japanese,
up to 14 characters
can be entered.
(c) A comment entered in Japanese can be displayed on the editing screen or printed out, but
cannot
be written
message
blanks.
60
is output
indicating
Note, however,
A Japanese
that memory
memory
into a ROM cassette
language
available
usable
or transferred
this restriction
that sequence
and all Japanese
program operation
input FEP is installed

to FAPT LADDER
for FAPT
LADDER
to the PMC.
At compile
characters
are converted
is 500K
bytes
to
is not affected.
as a resident driver in the system.

is reduced
time, a
accordingly.
or more
Check
This means
that the size of
to allow
FAPT
LADDER
execution.
Editing alone can be performed
allocate
without
a free area of 500K bytes.
CONFIG.SYS.
adjustments
a main memory
installing
PRINT.SYS
Note that when
and RSDRV.SYS
FILES or BUFFERS
size of 1K bytes is used per file (buffer)
in order to
is specified
specified.
in
Make
as required.
09 A Japanese language input FEP can also be installed with ADDDRV and DELDRV by using
a subprocess
after calling COMMAND.COM
An example is provided
below.
l-9
in user batch execution.
2. INSTALLATION
First. change
instaed,
the contents
of FLMNE.BAT
under
the directory
where
FAPT LADDER
is
as follows:
FLMNE. BAT
r
!COMMAND
Inaddition, create a file with the name FEP.DEF with the definitions
below assumes
use of ATOK7.
For detailed
information,
below.
see the manual
The example
of the relevant
FEP.
FEP.DEF
DEVICE=A:YDEV+ATOK7A.SYS/D=A:+ATOK7L.DIC
DEVICE=A:YDEV)CATOK7B.SYS
Select MNEEDT
execution).
(mnemonic
The following
editing)
from the main menu,
>
and select
F3 (user batch file
message appears:
Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'.
Add parameter(s)?
[A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]
Enter N to return to MS-DOS.
Execute
the following
commands
to install and remove the
FEP:
ADDDRV FEP.DEF
DELDRV
(To install the FEP)
1 (To remove the FEP)
The user can return to FAPT LADDER by pressing
2.1.2
IBM PC/AT operating
(1) CONFIGSYS,
Fi
environment
AUTOEXEC.BAT
The system uses ANSI-based
escape
sequences.
Therefore,
using CONFIG.SYS.
Add the line indicated
ANSI.SYS
below to CONFIG.SYS.
is assumed to be under directory
\DEV on drive A.
DEVICE=A:\DEV\ANSI.SYS
l-10
ANSI.SYS
needs to be installed
2. INSTALLATION
(2) Using
EMS
The expanded
memory
area for a sequence

used.
specification
program.
(EMS) memory
The EMS memory
can be used with the system

allows
a larger
sequence
as a work
program
to be
(An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 steps to be edited.)
If EMS memory
is not used, a sequence
program
of up to about 21840 steps can be handled
when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.)

cannot
be started
if a free area sufficient
allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident
for 16000 steps cannot

device
drivers.
be
In this case,
EMS memory is required.

FANUC has confirmed
MS-DOS
that the setting described
below ensures
normal operation.
Version 4.0
Specify the statements
below as the first DEVICE statements
device driver is assumed to be under directory
of the CONFIG.SYS
file.
Each
\DEV on drive A.
DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMAEM.SYS
DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMA2EMS.SYS
FRAME=COOO
2.2 Installation Procedure

An installation
batch file is used to install the programs
on the system
and module
floppy
disks.
(See (3))
Note that there are two different
installation
procedures.
They are selected
according
to the type
and edition of the system.
Installation
of ordinary files (see item (1) for the procedure.)
The programs
on the following
system
and module floppy disks are distributed
in ordinary
file format.
PMC-L/M/P
system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500)
PMC-N system floppy disk (A08B-920019201 -JSOl)
PMC-RB!RC
All module floppy disks
Installation
system floppy disk (A08B-9200/9201
of compressed
The programs
editions
-J502) editions
06.1 and earlier
07.1 and earlier
files (see item (2) for the procedure.)
on the following
system
and floppy disks are distributed
in compressed
file
format.
Note 1)
PMC-L/M/P
PMC-RBRC
The installation
system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500)

system floppy disk (AO8B-9200/9201-J502)
procedure
Before starting installation,

README.DOC,
of the programs
editions
06.2 and earlier

08.0 and earlier
on each floppy disk is subject
refer to a README.DOC
use the ordinary file format installation
1-11
editions
file (if there is one).

procedure
(1).
to change.
If there is no
2. INSTALLATION
Note 2)
The compressed
named LHA.
file is a self-extracting
LHA is freeware
file produced
created by Mr. Haruyasu
(1) Installation procedure for ordinary files on system
The following
system
procedure
using an archive
uses an example
in which
floppy disk in drive B:, and installed
floppy
utility
Yoshizaki.
disks
ordinary
in the directory
program
files are read from each PMC-N

Y FLADDER
created
on the hard
disk drive (C:).
[Operation]
Insert the system floppy disk VOLl
Enter the following
commands
to execute
B:Y> CD INSTALL
B:YINSTALL>
INSTALL B:Y
When the following
in a drive.
an installation
batch file.
C:+FLADDER
message appears, confirm it, and press any key.
SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to C:\ FLADDER

(HARD DISK)
SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\
When stop "CTRL+C"
Press any key to continue
If it is necessary
to discontinue
installation,
press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution
of the
batch file.
VOLI
is installed
on the hard disk.
When the following
message
appears,
insert the system floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and
press any key.

When stop "CTRLtC"
VOL2 is installed
on the hard disk.
When the following
message
appears,
insert the system
press any key.

When stop "CTRLtC"
VOL3 is installed
on the hard disk.
1-12
floppy disk VOL3 in a drive, and
2. INSTALLATION
message appears.
The following
(2) Installation procedure for compressed files on system floppy disks

The following
procedure
uses an example
in which
RB.RC system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed
ordinary
files are read from each PMC-
in the directory
Y FLADDER
created on the
hard disk drive (A:).
[Procedure ]
Insert the system floppy disk VOLl
Enter the following
commands
in a drive.
to execute
an installation
B:Y> CD INSTALL
B:YINSTALL> INSTALL 9: A:YFLADDERY
Note 1)
When specifying
directory
Note 2)
the files to be installed,
batch file.
enter only their drive name; do not specify
(that is, do not enter 4h).
When specifying
When the following
the directory
message
in which the system is to be installed,
appears, confirm
suffix it with Y .
it. and press any key.
SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to A:\ FLADDER

(HARD DISK)
When stop "CTRL+C"
If it is necessary
to discontinue
installation,
press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution
of the
batch file.
VOLl
is installed on the hard disk.
When the following
message
appears,
insert the system
press any key.

When stop "CTRLtC"
VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.
1-13
floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and
2. INSTALLATION
When the following
message
appears.
insert the system
floppy disk VOL3 in a drive,
and
press any key.
SET [SYSTEM FD Vo1.3) on DRIVE B:\

When stop "CTRL+C"
@I VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.
@I The following
message appears.
(End/
(3) Installation batch files
The following table lists the installation batch files and their directories.
Directory
File name
LMPINSTSAT
Ic INSTALL
PMC-L module floppy disk
LINST.BAT
$J
PMC-M module floppy disk
MINST.BAT
PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk
MMINSTBAT
gc
INSTALL.BAT
+JINSTALL
PMC-L/M/P
@J PMC-NINAQA
system floppy disk
system floppy disk
PMCRA~/RA~JAA~RB:RB~;RBYRB~/RC~RC~!RC~/PA
1IPA3IQCINB system floppy disk
INSTALL.BAT
qCINSTALL
(3
PMC-RAl
RA12lNST.BAT
Y INSTALL
RBRCINST.BAT
Y INSTALL
?) PMC-QC module floppy disk
QCINST.BAT
Y INSTALL
I@ PMC-NB module floppy disk
NBINST.BAT
gCINSTALL
!RA2IRAS/PAl
IPA3 module floppy disk
EMC-RB!RB2/RB3;RB4IRCIRC3iRC4
floppy disk
(Note)
Systems
for different
restrictions
9 for details.
module
PMC models can be installed
may be placed depending
on the edition
For systems that cannot be installed
in separate directories.
1 -
in the same directory.
14
of the software.
However,
See Appendix
in the same directory,
install them
3. ACTIVATION
3.
ACTIVATION
(1) Activation
method
[Operation]
FAPT LADDER with the following
Activate
commands:
B:\>A:
A:\xD \FLADDER
A:
\FLADDER>
FLADDER
The initial screen displaying
(Note
1)
the version
of the system
and copyright
is displayed
and the
message below appears.
When a key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed,

Select
a screen
displayed
by selecting
the function
the main menu below appears.
key corresponding
to the desired
menu
item
in which
the
at the bottom of the main menu screen.
Fi KEY : SETUP
F8 KEY : MNEMONICEDIT
F9 KEY : UT[LlTt
FlO KEY : END
Select a menu item with the corresponding
(Note)
Before
starting
up FAPT
system
file exists to the current
started
up with
function
LADDER,
change
key.
the drive
drive and current
path designation,
LADDER may malfunction.
1-15
or by specifying
and directory
directory.
If FAPT LADDER
the current
directory,
is
FAPT
3. ACTIVATION
Reference:
When an FL.BAT has been created in the directory

FAPT LADDER
key.
can be activated
by just typing
An example of a batch file is provided
for which
path control
FL and pressing
is set,
the [RETURN]
below.
FL.BAT
ECHO OFF
A:
(Moves to the drive where the system files are installed.)
cD \FLADDER
(Moves to the directory
where the system files are installed.)
FLADDER
(2) Termination method
[Operation]
0
Select [END] from the main menu, or press the < ESC > key to return to the initial screen.
Then the following
message appears:
END? (Y:END, 0THER:RESllME MENU)
Enter Y to return to the MS-DOS
command
l-16
mode.
Enter N to return to the main menu.
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.
BASIC OPERATION
4.1 Menu Configuration

The configuration
of the menu screens displayed
by the system are shown below.
MS-DOS
$- 4
initial screen
f
Main menu-
Fl
Edit
Title data
Ladder diagram
Symbol and comment
Message
I/O module
System parameter
Execution
l-Setting
Print
Compression
qz[TEXEC
(PMC-N/NA/RC/RC3!QC4;QC/NB)
(PMC-N, NA)
LPASCAL
-PMC
writer, FA writer
-PMC
-Handy
-Memory
1) The
format
of the
source
LADDER for the P Series.
Read
Write
Verification
Blank check
Download
Upload
Comparison
-E
(Note
(PMC-R seriesKXiNB)
file/Floppy
cassette
adapter
card
program
of this
system
is
different
Thts system uses the mnemonic
from
that
edit function
of
FAPT
(F8) to edit a
file having the format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.
(Note
2) An object file has the ROM format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.
reads a sequence
program created by the P Series In the ROM file format.
of the floppy disk must be converted.
1-17
This system
The format
Diagram
of relationships
P-G -
among the functions
of the system
PC9801 - IBM-PC/AT
-
FAPT
LADDER
FAPT LADDER
Edit
- . . . . .. . . . . . .
i Source
i
:s
; format
: program i
: .. . . .. . . .. . . .
::
Communication by FEZ-2324
(Refer to Appendix 1 for cables)
Setup
qzq+J4
U-inch
ASC format
ffOPPY
FLOAD98
IFLOADAT
CNC . .. . . . .
; ROM
;
; format
: program
:4
+q+-+
I
: . . . . .. . . . . .. i
3.5inch
Memorv
Binary format
ffOPPY
FAPT
PASCAL . .. . ... .. . .. .
: PASCAL ;
: load
: module
II
:-
i
. .. . . .. . . .. . . .
FLPGMS
-+I+
35inch
k-1
I
I
fg-pii?-~-
Q I+
1
Q-l_),
ff
Binary format
ffOPPY
3.5inch
OPPY
ASC format
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.2 Common System Operations

The operations
(1) Function
described
below are basic operations
applicable
keys
When the menu items shown
below
are displayed
desired menu item by pressing the corresponding

,
.:,:.:.
j.,
.j.,
;z:,i,:lE :.:_.
::..:::::;
D,T,i,j,I:(
../ .::.?::is
to all screens.
j;
:... ..:.
y:)):.,
pR,$&
.., :,.:
j.
::::..::
function
;::i,:
)j
3 :;C*MP,i..: 4 j i.&&...y s :;.:;& i :y:;

:.: ::...:
.j,.
.,,
.:,:
:::
..
in reverse
;;:
fj&:::q ,
PI
WI
IF41
F31
the user can select
the
key.
;::.;&p~:., * .;&JE+
:.
::
:.>::;:;;g(,
(F,]WI
,,
WI
video,
F61
()
WI
,,
+j
IF101
(2) Escape key

The escape key <ESC>
escape key terminates
has the same effect as selecting
[END]
with the function
the current screen then returns the display to the previous
key.
The
screen in the
menu hierarchy.
(3) Cursor keys
The cursor keys <
>,
<
>,
< +
>, and < +
> are used to move the cursor
to
select input items.

When two or more cursors
can be moved by pressing
(4) Scroll
can be used on a single screen,

the <SHIFT>
the second
key together with the < +
or subsequent
cursor
> or -z -+ > key.
keys
The scroll
previous
keys
<ROLL
UP>
and
<ROLL
DOWN >
scroll
the screen
up (to display
one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectively
the
(for
the PC9801).
The scroll keys <PAGE
page, respectively
(5) [INS]
UP>
display
the next page and the previous
key
This key switches
(9) [HELP]
DOWN > and <PAGE
(for the IBM PC/AT).
between
the overwrite
mode c 0 > and insert mode -z I >.
key
When the < HELP > key is pressed,
help information
1-19
may be output for the specified
item.
4. BASIC OPERATION
(7) Status
line
A status line is displayed
Main
t-
at the top of the screen.
PMC-RB2
menu
Item name
currently selected
<O>[A::FLADDER
Model currently
selected
Current
directory
name
Edit mode (overwritefinsert)
(Note)
The
indications
on the key tops
manual. depending
(8) Pop-up
may slightly
on the personal computer
vary
from
the descriptions
of this
used.
menu
When the following
pop-up menu appears,
the three methods described
the desired
can be selected
process
using any of
below.
The file already exists.

Fl
Update
F2
Quit
F3
Append
1) Cursor movement
To select an item, press the cursor key < ? > or c 1 >, such that the item to be selected
is displayed
in reverse video.
Then, pressing
key is indicated
at the
the <RETURN>
key selects that item.
2) Function key
A function
corresponding
3)
Command
function
left
of each
item.
To
select
an item,
press
the
key.
name
An uppercase
letter in (usually,
above case, pressing

Append command,
the initial of) an item name is the command
the letter key -z U >, <Cl>,
respectively.
l-20
or <A>
name.
In the
can select the Update. Quit, or
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.3 Model Setting

In this case,
the user needs
another menu item.
to select
the PMC model
This setting, once executed,
by selecting
is preserved
[SETUP]
before
selectrng
(i.e. setup need not be repeated).
[Operation]
Select [SETUP].
The setup menu is displayed.
(The screen is of PMC-R08.0
version)
PUC-MI
PIIC-RA?
PUC-RA3
PUG-RB
pcuc;;;
PUC-RB4
PIIC-RB4
PMC-RC
*PWC-RC3
PVC-AC4
PVC-RC4
PUC-PAI
PUC-PA3
PVC-PC
PVC-NB
(STEP
Sip:
(STEP
SW
Select the PMC model using the arrow keys.

Press the <RETURN
displayed
Setup
> key.
Then the following
message
appears
in the status line changes.

completed.
Select [END].
The display returns to the setup menu screen.
Select [END].
The display returns to the main menu screen.
(Note)
When PMC-NA is used, select PMC-N (l/O) on the above screen.
l-21
and the model name
5. OPERATION
5.
OPERATION
5.1 Editing
The source file of a sequence
program is edited.
(1) Start
[Operation]
0
Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated
Mm. WC
>
below.
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\~~~~~~~~~~
Fl KEY: EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT
F3 KEY : COMPILE
F4 KEY : OECO?kPlLE
Fj KEY : LINK
F6 KEY : I/O
Fi KEY : SETUP
FB KEY : MNEMONICEDIT
F9 KEY : UTILITY
F10 KEY : END
The following
source file name input screen is displayed:
l-22
.:
j ;
>&:j
5. OPERATION
6!
Enter the name of a source program to be edited.

No more than 36 characters
can be entered to specify a program name.
An MS-DOS file name must be entered
(i)
(extension
(.xXx)
must be excluded).
When a new file is created
Specify the OUTPUT
output
program
(ii) When an existing
file is edited
directly
field and OUTPUT
(ii) When an existing
file is modified
I=7
PROGRAM
in a separate
L-2
file
Specify the name of the existing
file to be edited in the
INPUT PROGRAM
Specify the name of the file
NAME field.
PROGRAM
NAME field.
To specify a file in another directory,
Example)
are stored
in which to store the program in the OUTPUT
NAME
NAME field.
and its contents
To specify a file that exists in the current directory

name.
NAME only.
Specify the same program name in the INPUT PROGRAM
I/O
program
input
nrnnram
, yvy
<
2
PROGRAM
A : iFLADDER
t
Current directory
displayed
at the status line, enter the file
enter the relative path and the file name.
-IT
DATA -
SAMPLE1
i--
In this case, the following
SAMPLE2
two lines specify the same file.
A:FLADDERDATASAMPLEl
DATAsAMPLE
l-23
5. OPERATION
@ The following
editing menu screen appears:

EDiT
ix-x
QiNA:wADI;iR\
FI kEY : TITLE
I?? RY
: LWDEK DI%R+l
F3 m
: SMKIL 6 CONEIIT
F4 KFI : ,WSAGE
F5 KEY : I,;0
KIDLLE!
FE hEY : SYSTM P.!J&WTER
FlO kEY : E!lu
($3 Select data to be edited with the corresponding

$3 The editing
displayed
screen
for the selected
when [TITLE]
function
data appears.
key.
For example,
is selected.
EDIT( TITLL)
: fPf.z-fc \\/ ,slb~:at.
:\:: :: f
51 EDITIOSSO
6) PROCRM Ill~~\hlV6
X0
7) MT\ OF I'RO(;ffilWiG
8) PRG-XI IHICSEDBY
9) RUM hRITTL5BY
iR
(2) Termination
[Operation]
Q
Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.
G3 The following
the screen
message appears:
l-24
10 mu
below
is
5. OPERATION
(3
Press the desired function
(i) When UPDATE
key.
is selected,
the editing
operation
is terminated
after the results
of
editing are written to a file.

(ii) When QUIT
is selected,
the editing
operation
is terminated
without
writing
the results
of editing to a file.
(iii) When RESUME
When UPDATE
(i)
is selected,
the editing is continued.
or QUIT is selected,
To continue
the display returns to the editing menu screen.
editing, select the appropriate
(ii) To terminate
editing, select [END].
function
key.
The display returns to the main menu.
Title data editing
5.1.1
Title data represents
the titles of sequence
programs
generated
by a machine tool builder.
(1) Start
[Operation]
0
Select [TITLE]
The following
on the editing menu screen.
title editing screen appears:
EMT ( TITLE)
MI-is
6hfA:'ZtNXI%'\
: IXtLCi'41C-HNEL
RC & FltNI
(2) Input
[Operation]
0
Select an input item (displayed
in reverse video) with the <
l-25
1 > and <
1 > keys.
5. OPERATION
Enter data.
The maximum
number of characters
usable for each title data item is listed below.
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME

MACHINE TOOL NAME
32 characters
:
:
32 characters
CNC b NC NAME
32 characters
PMC PROGRAM NO
4 characters
EDITION NO
2 characters
PROGRAM DRAWING NO
32 characters
DATE OF PROGRAMMING
16 characters
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY
32 characters
ROM WRITTEN BY
32 characters
REMARKS
32 characters
(3) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END] on press the c ESC > key to return to the editing menu screen.
The following
message appears.
Fl
Update
F2
Quit
F3
Edit
key.
The system returns to the editing menu.
5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing

In ladder diagram
editing,
the user can perform
sequence
program
search operations.
(1) Start
[Operation]
@
Select [LADDER]
(LADDER
DIAGRAM)
from the editing menu.
1-26
input,
addition,
deletion,
and
5. OPERATION
The following
ladder diagram editing screen appears:
StBil
:sp
PO001
l-AD=xooo.
0 SY=S.:rFE
HI-
(a) When
the [View]
z+F-
command
see (5) Connecting
09
The line shows

displayed
3-a
4+3l
Q-TEST
%kztn
DAT,A NO I
+
c--,-..
is used, a different
Sequence
Program
0002/6552 011030/6553S _t 1ocuBmI
line is shown.
(For the [View]
command,
in Section 3.1.1 of the supplement.)
the name of the file which
is being edited,
number
on the screen, and the number of program stepsmaximum
of the net which
is
number of steps that
can be edited.
(c) The
W) The
line shows a sub-program
number (P address) or label number
lines show a symbol and comment
(L address).
added to the data at the address
selected
by the
cursor.
@ AD = X000.0
Address on which the cursor is placed
Symbol
SY = SAMPLE
000216552
Number
of current
symbols!Maximum
number
of
symbols
@
CO = TEST DATA NO.1

0003Of65535
Comment
Number
Maximum
comment
1-27
of characters
number
specified
of characters
in the comment/
permitted
in the
5. OPERATION
(2) Function
and selection
key indications
The ladder diagram editing functions
correspond
to the function
keys as indicated
below.
-@ [coman_d]
Under condition CD),holding down [SHIFT]

lets you select the following items.
......:.:,:.
:.:,:.:
...\:.:.:
:.:,:,:i..............I. ..,
::.>,:.:
:.,:.:c.::~:~;:i:.:jl
... ....:.:.:,:,~.:.:.:,:.:.:,::.:
:;::,::
.,:::::
........::.:...:.
.:g:.:;er
.:.,_
::~:::~i,~.~:1:I:I.~:
1:1:1:::1:~.:81:~~~.~:~~:~::.
;.:,I:!y.v.w.,l:... :::::.i:.:...:.:.:.:,~:.:.:.:.:.:.
, ~~~~~~~ 2 ;,$;!&k&; 3 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~
4 ~~~~~~~:;~~~~~~~
5 ~~~~~~~ 6 :~:~~~~~~~
, ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
8 ~:~~:~~~~~~~~~,
9 ~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~~
, Oii,i~::i:;~~~I~:::::ii
>::.:_:...:.:
.....:.::.
___,..,.).:.:_:.:..l
,.,.
.... ,>:
... ........._....
............y.._7..
,\.,
:.:.:.:.:s..
,.I.:,
.,.:..:.:.:.:_..::
): .:,~):.:.:,..,
.,:,:.:Q..:.)
.. .i::.,.,.,.,.
.,.,,,_
.,., .~)~);:_:_:.):.::.:.::.~
,.,.
..:.:
.,.,.i,.,.,__.
:..:.:
[Delnet]
[Search]
... ... ,.
I,
...
: ,./..
5 ;;,;;w&&
6 ;,&&i;
6 ,.,
..
..,.. .,. ,.
. ..:::..:.:...::..: ....:.,_,).
$):: ::,.,
::... ,,.,,:
:7 :i$&.~.
8 ;. .,~&~:~~.Y:
g _.,:_,::l:;,~.;i:i
10,::,;&.;;;:;I..
:.:
.,.: .C,.:
,.,.,:
.,..::
:
...
CB [Copy1 1 Wove1
i$$&;:;.;
....x. .
2 ;:l~a;~&;:
3 : .karch
..I4
,i_down
.t;p,.,
:,A
7.;,
. .. ...
3.
:.,,::,:: .Y.
.. .
., :. .,<. y
,,, .. .. * :::;t+r
1 Lj:;::.tii:.:.::..?
[to-org)
:. 3 :~..~&~ch : 4 :&own
is displayed
c-up
tO-fil
in the [File] command
7.
to&J.
mode only.
8.
.. g .Y .: --<;.I,,.
.:.
..I
:: :,.
... .
,:
.:
: i., 10
.:,
(Thus can be selected.)
@I [File]
Opens a window
processing
I
I
0xec
in which the name of an input program
can be specified.
Select desired
from a POP-UP menu.
[ sy Edit]
2
cancel 3
1-28
10
5. OPERATION
While the function
(Note)
keys of @ are displayed
Q can be executed.
For example,
has the same effect

command
of 8
program
For sequence
programmer
entering
as selecting
<A > and [COMAND]
F4 [Adress]
on the .a
in this way, enter the upper-case
in the corresponding
(3) Sequence
in ladder diagram editing,
command
a command
on the @ screen
screen.
letter (not necessarily
name shown on the 8
of
To select
initial letter)
screen.
input
program
input,
select
menu is displayed.
[LADDER]
from
When no sequence
the editing
program
menu.
The
has been entered,
function
key
the screen
displays only the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.
At this stage, program input can be started.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the ladder diagram.
Examples of basic instruction
program
input and function
instruction
program
input are shown
below.
(a) Example
of basic instruction program input

x0.1
D30.2
F14.2
Y52.7
3
[Operation ]
Move the cursor to the start position,
The [ -I
ILLEGAL
I-
then press [
] symbol appears on the screen.
appears at the lower-right
user that horizontal
ladder diagram
-I
I-
The message
corner of the screen.

line creation
1.
HORIZONTAL
This message
is not completed.
LINE
warns the
Enter an address
and bit data.
Enter X0.1 on the keyboard

the contact,
Enter contact
and press the < RETURN > key.
The address is set at
and the cursor moves right.
As in @ and 8,
Press [ e
enter contact A of 030.2.
B of F14.2.
] and enter address
address is set on contact
F14.2. then press the <RETURN>
key.
The
B and the cursor moves right.
Without moving the cursor, press [
A horizontal
to the right is drawn automatically
line segment extending
symbol appears near the right vertical rail.
l-29
1.
and a relay coil
5. OPERATION
Enter address Y52.7. then press the <RETURN

The cursor automatically
> key.
moves to the input start position on the next line.
Next, enter an OR condition.

Press [ +
] and enter address X2.4, then press the <RETURN
> key.
The address is set at contact 6 and the cursor moves right.
Press [
To enter
[
] to enter a horizontal
a horizontal
A vertical
line extending
of function
For function
instruction
number and pressing
press
the
horizontal
line
as many times as the number
key
entered.
the right vertical rail.
is required
program
for OR.
Press
] to enter
key [functnj.
Next, enter a SUB number,
key.
can also be entered by entering

the [functn]
the function
instruction
name or SUB
key.
a certain
table that lists function
instruction
instructions
name or SUB number,
and corresponding
a function
SUB numbers
can be
on the screen.
The table can be displayed
just by pressing
Then the function
table is automatically
instruction
Press the [functn]
the [functn]
key without
entering
any data.
displayed.
key to return to the ladder diagram
screen from the function
instruction
table.
H
.
1 MOVE
ACT
(2)
(1)
0000
0000
(3)
0000
LL
Control condition
parameters
a function
of the function
MOVE
0000
SUB 8
0000
0000
0000
-c-(l)
--(,a
-(3)
-(4)
l-30
Output address
Input data address
High-order
When entering
(4)
0000
Low-order
-It--
input
input, press the function
If the user does not remember
displayed
will be entered
upward
instruction
instruction
and
upward.
then press the <RETURN>
instruction
line.
a number
that such a line never exceeds
vertical line extending
A function
enter
1. The line segment
Note, however,
(b) Example
line,
4-bit
4-bit
logical multiplication
logical multiplication
instruction
instruction
with this function,

vertically
data
data
enter the
as shown below.
5. OPERATION
[Operation]
@
Enter a control condition.

Press [ -i
key.
t-
1. Next, enter an address
The cursor moves right.
Enter a function
instruction.
Press the [functn]

The function
&!
and bit data, then press the <RETURN>
key.
instruction
Enter the oarameters
Next, enter SUB number
remaining
(c) Restrictions
of the function
instruction.
4-bit logical
> key.
three parameters
and notes
> key.
diagram shown above appears.
First, enter the high-order

press the <RETURN
8, then press the <RETURN
multiplication
The cursor
data of the first parameter,
automatically
moves downwards.
then
Enter the
one by one.
on ladder
creation
[Restrictions]
@
Restrictions
related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding
to the portion
between
the RD
and WRT instructions)

a)
When
the
ladder
corresponding
1 net
mnemonic
exceeds
program),
256
steps
the following
(as
counted
as
steps
in the
message appears:
A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded.

If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.
Restrictions
related to a ladder diagram display per screen
If an attempt
described
a)
(a-l)
is made to display
more than 70 ladder net lines per screen,
the error
below occurs.
Symptom
When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following
message appears.
The NET being created is too large.

If 70 lines
are exceeded,
the
following
message
appears,
and
no net
is
displayed.
A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.
(a-2)
When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two or more nets, the following
message appears.
If 70 lines are exceeded
when
totaled
over two or more
message appears for a net that is the current

and the display of the current
nets,
the following
net when 70 lines are exceeded,
net is discontinued.
The NET is larger than the editing buffer.

In this case, specify
function
b)
the net to be displayed.
rrsing the ladder diagram
search
all lines of the net are included
in the
(such as net number search).
How to obtain the number of lines per screen

Even if part of a net is displayed
on a screen,
l-31
5. OPERATION
total for that screen.
In addition,
a space line between
The number of lines in each net to be displayed

(b-l)
nets is counted
is determined
as a valid line.
as follows:
Basic instructions
One line is comprised
(b-2)
b-1-
1 line
L-I
*lines
Function
instructions
The number
or parameters,
Examples
of lines in a function
whichever
of calculation
instruction
is:
The number of control
conditions
is greater, plus 1
follow.
When the number of control conditions
RST
of one basic instruction.
When the number of control conditions
< number of parameters
Number of control conditions = 2

Number of parameters = 4
Number of lines = number of
parameters + 1 = 5 lines
> number of parameters
Number of
Number of
Number of
conditions
RlOO
1-32
control conditions = 3
parameters = 1
lines = number of control
+ 1 = 4 lines
5. OPERATION
(b-3)
Data table section of function instructions

The data table section of the COD, CODB,
follows:
or DISP instruction
is calculated
When the data table is one or two bytes

Number of lines
0000
0000
0000
0000
= number of data tables16 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)
0000
0000
0000
0000
Number of lines in the data table

section = 11/6
= 1 with remainder 5
= 2 lines
0000
0000
0000
I
When the data table is four bytes

Number of lines
SUB 27
CODB
= number of data tables/4 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)
0005
0007
0300
D320
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
l-33
Number of lines in the data table

section = 514
= 1 with remainder 1
= 2 lines
as
5. OPERATION
(b-4)
Example of calculating
For the ladder shown
obtained as follows:
the number of lines per screen

below, the number of fines in the screen
- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and B.

- Number of lines in net A
Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines
(1116)
(3+1)
- The number of lines in net B is 2.
rT
display
-I-+
section
is
8 lines
ACT
Net A
t-
SUB 49
DISP
0011
0003
Screen display section

D300
. . .. f . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........
I.
000
003
006
009
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Net B
....................................................................
: . . . . . . ..
........
Net C
c)
Examples of symptoms
Example of symptom
-
(a-l)
The ladder diagram can be edited only when the total number
parameter
of the DISP instruction
(SUB 49) is less than 396.
the total number of steps is 396, the net consists

If a net that consists
editing, the following
of a total of 396 steps
of message
data steps
This is because
or more
is created
during
mnemonic
message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.
The data table is too large.
1-34
when
of 70 lines.
5. OPERATION
Example of symptom
-
(a-2)
If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function

that of a basic
instruction,
the following
instruction
message
on the same screen as
is displayed,
and the attempt
is
rejected.
For example,
cannot
if the basic instruction
be entered,
calculation
(because
are described
net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction
the total number
of lines exceeds
70).
(SUB 8)
The results
of
below.
1
68-line net
Display screen
.
t+r
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .
!
i
i
;
Number of
instruction
number of
(4) + 1 =
MOVE
lines =
parameters
5
..! 68 + 5 = 73 lines
:. .. ... ..
< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled,
the MOVE instruction
can be entered.
together
basic-instruction
A basic instruction
net cannot
be entered
with another
net, if
the total number of lines is greater than 70.
For example,
if a 68-line
basic-instruction
net is followed
by another
basic-instruction
net,
the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.
I++
Display screen
,..................................................._.___.....,_...........................
I . . . . . . . ]::!j
68-line net
.I...l
< Measure >

If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled.
When the CODB instruction

same screen,
steps
the latter basic instruction
(SUB 27) and DISP instruction
can be entered.
(SUB 49) are edited on the
if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message
for the DISP
instruction
(SUB
l-35
49)
the following
message
appears,
data
and the
5. OPERATION
attempt is rejected.
This symptom
also occurs in a combination
of two DISP instructions
and a combination
of
CODB and COD instructions.

For example,
if the number of tables for the CODB instruction
steps for the DISP instruction
is 200, the total number
can be only 66 at maximum.
The calculation
results
of
are
shown below.
FIST
-II-
4 bytes
200 data tables
ACT
-II000
002
Display screen
. . . . . .. . . .
00000000
00000000
Number of CODB
_ instruction lines = 55
00000000
00000000
. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
198
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
I[ I_
Function instruction
section = 4 parameters
+ 1
Data table section
= 20014 = 50
. ..
Calculation of DISP
instruction data items
that can be entered
Function
sections
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
.. .
instruction
= 3 parameters
+ 1
Number of remaining
= 70 - 55 - 4
lines
= 11 lines
Data tables
= 11%=66
< Measure >

Moving
the DISP instruction
to the top of the display
screen
makes it possible
to set the
total number of steps to 396.
Restriction
on the maximum
The maximum
Without
number of steps
number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows:

EMS : 21840 steps
With EMS
Note, however,
: 24000 steps
that the maximum
allowable
number of steps can decrease,
depending
on how memory is used.

If a ladder being edited exceeds
disabled and the following
MNEMONIC
BUFFER
message
the maximum
is displayed:
OVER
l-36
allowable
number
of steps, editing
is
5. OPERATION
[Notes]
CD An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the
ladder program is incomplete
(for example, without
addresses)
or invalid.
A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.
Up to eight contacts
However,
format.
this restriction
symbol
cannot
to delete this symbol.
sections
program
program created in mnemonic
over several lines with a continuation
continuation
deletion)
(4) Replacing
does not apply to a sequence
When a sequence
displayed
This
and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen.
of a sequence
be deleted
created
in mnemonic
format exceeds
this limit, it is
symbol.
with
-----
1.
Use
[Delnet]
(net
(See Item (6) in this section.)
program
Lines in an already created sequence
program can be replaced
in the same way as described
in Item (3) above.

then enter new data.
Move the cursor to a program section to be changed,
(5) Sequence
program
Press the [comand]

indicated
soft key of the function
key programmer
menu and use the function
keys
below.
To terminate
:I,i&&t
....
addition
the programmer
menu, press the < ESC > key.
.......................
.................
.:.......................................
:zi~~~~~~::
.. ~::::&I&:1 >ji&if:$::
:.
:..:
,y,::
... . .
:,
. .....
,:
.::::I
.)
.................
$~$z$,$@:i;i
...
.:::.y
................
: :..:.q.::::.
:;.
. ,,::::
:,: : :.:.:.: .. ....
....
...
........
.....~:.:::.:+~:.~~x~
$&&$
~~~;fjiii.~~~! $zzyrdit:::;,
::.:.::::::::::::::
................. ..y..
....... .........
.:,.:
:: ,.:,:: ... .::..: .: .... .:::::.:.:.
...
::.:.
.:::.:
[Insert]
As described
(a) Example:
below, there are four types of sequence
when a relay contact
program addition in a ladder diagram.
is added on a line
Addition on a line
Move the cursor to the position
to add item(s),
Item (3) above.
l-37
then enter item(s)
in the way described
in
5. OPERATION
When a vertical line affects addition
[Operation]
Press
shown above.
4_
] to delete
the vertical
] to create a vertical
line
to the
left
extending
upward.
This
disappears.
Press [
then press [
). A horizontal
line extending
upward to the right of the cursor,
line and vertical line are created.
Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact

Press [ -j
j-
is to be added.
] to add a contact.
(b) When a line is added vertically
-To
To add a line vertically.
be added
an area is required
lower part of the ladder diagram
for the addition.
To create
must be shifted down by one line.
cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed
such an area, the
To do this, move the
in dashed lines, then press the [insnet]
key.
Each time the [insnet]
key is pressed,
line down to create an area for addition.

After line addition,
any remaining
the lower part of the ladder diagram
is shifted one
Make an addition in this area.
area (as in the case where two lines are added in an area
large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.
[Operation]
@
Move the cursor to any point in the ladder dragram enclosed
in dashed lines.
G? Press [insnet].
The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.
l-38
5. OPERATION
When the [insnet]
key is pressed without entering
When the [insnet]
key is pressed
after entering
a numeric
a numeric
value, one line is inserted.

value, the number
of lines
specified is inserted.
Move the cursor to the desired position

and press the <RETURN
Press the [ L
(c) Line insertion
> key.
and press [
-_(
l-j.
Then set address data
The the cursor moves right.
] soft key to create an OR circuit.
in a single-net
sequence
program
Blank lines are inserted one by one.
[Operation)
0
Enter the number
of lines to be inserted,
then
press the [insfin]
key.
The entered
number of lines is inserted.

(When the [inslin]
If the [inslin]
key is pressed without entering
key is pressed
figure. a blank line is inserted
(d) Element
insertion
when the cursor
a number, just one line is added.)
is positioned
as shown in the right-hand
in a single-net
sequence
as shown
in the left-hand
figure.
program
Elements are added one by one.
[Operation]
0
Enter the number of elements

number of elements
If the character
[inselm]
<A>
to be inserted,
is prefixed
key is pressed. elements
(If the [inselm]
then press the [inselm]
key is pressed
to the number
of elements
The entered
to be inserted
and the
are inserted after the cursor.
without
entering
the number of elements
just one element is inserted.)
_~&$+
key.
is inserted.
4
Cursor
1-39
,I
<c..mm
II
n.. :.>:.....:.>:...
(.
I I
I
to be inserted,
5. OPERATION
If the (inselm]
figure,
key is pressed
an element
when
is inserted
the cursor
as shown
is placed
as shown
in the right-hand
in the left-hand
figure.
The
element
is
when the cursor
is
inserted before the cursor.
If the character
<A>
is entered
and the [inselm]
placed as Shown in the left-hand

hand figure.
(6) Deletion
-_
an element
is inserted
as shown
in the right-
The element is inserted after the cursor.

-_ -
in asequence
(a) A program
figure,
key is pressed
program
can be partially
deleted
by positioning
the cursor at the location
to be deleted
&td pressing one of the below three soft keys
1 :
Deletes a horizontal
[4
I:
Deletes a vertical
1 2
] :
Deletes a vertical line extending
e__--
(b) Use the [Delnet]
line, relay contact,
line extending
key to delete a program
relay coil, etc.
upward to the left of the cursor.

upward to the right of the cursor.
net (section
from an RD instruction
to a WRT
instruction).
(c) Multiple
nets can be deleted one by one.
[Delnet]
[Operation]
Deletion
Move the cursor to the net to be deleted,
deleted is displayed
Deleting multiple
then press the [Delnet]
key.
in red.
nets
Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down]
key, then display
numeric
value
The net to be
the nets to be deleted
is entered.
the cursor
moves
value.
Execution
: Press the [exec]
Cancellation
: Press the [cancel]
In red.
key.
key.
l-40
If the [c-down]
as many
times
key, or [search]
key is pressed
as the entered
after a
numeric
5. OPERATION
When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand,

delete,
enter
operation,
(7) Searching
the number
steps G and 8
in a sequence
A sequence
of nets to delete.
move the cursor to the first net to
then press the [Delnet]
key.
With this
can be omitted.
program
program can be searched
using the following
soft keys:
(Search1
When this key is pressed,
the start of the sequence
program
is displayed
on the screen
and the cursor is moved to the start of the program.

(b) [bottom]
When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence
program is displayed
on the screen and
the cursor is moved to the end of the program.
(c) [srchl
Search
operation
current location
using
this key searches
the program
for aspecified
for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
is found, it is displayed
on the screen.
address
from the
When an address
An address to search for can be specified
in one of
two ways.
0
Address specification
usina the cursor
Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]
key.
This operation
searches
the program
for the specified
address
from the current
location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

If the specified
displayed
address
is found,
on the screen.
If the search operation

To terminate
searching,
the section
of the program
The cursor is automatically
fails to find the specified

press the c ESC > key.
l-41
positioned
containg
the address
at the found address.
address, the cursor does not move.
is
5.
OPERATION
Gll.6
-Y49.1
When the same address as this address

is to be searched for. move the cursor to
this position, then press the (srch] key.
D32.0
II
F54.1 ,.
x0.4
II
II
GE.1
x0.5
021.2
Address soecification
bv address inout
Enter the address to find with the keyboard,

This operation
When the same address is found,

the cursor moves to this location.
then press the [srch]
searches the program for the specified
key.
address from the current
location
of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.

When the specified
is displayed
address is found, the section of the program containing
on the screen.
The
cursor
is automatically
positioned
the address
at the
found
address.
If the search operation
04
fails to find the specified
address, an error indication
appears.
(w-srch] (WRT coil search)

This key is used to search the program
current location
for a relay coil with a specified
address
of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
is found. it is displayed
on the screen.
from the
When a relay coil
If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the
closest to the cursor is displayed

The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified
Address soecification
Move the cursor
in one of two ways.
usino the cursor
to the relay coil with the address
to search
for, then press the [w-
srch] key.
This operation
searches
the program
current location of the cursor

When
it is displayed
If the search
indication
operation
address
from the
on the screen to the end of the program.
a relay coil with the specified
containing
for relay coils with the specified
address
is found,
the section
on the screen and the cursor is positioned
of the program
at the relay coil.
fails to find a relay coil with the specified
address,
an error
appears.
Enter the address
bv address inout
of relay coils to search
for with the keyboard,
then press the (w-
srch] key.
This operation
searches
the program
for relay coils with the specified
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
l-42
address from the
5. OPERATION
When
a relay coil with the specified
containing
it is displayed
If the search
indication
(e) [n-srch]
operation
(net-number
advanced
(f)
is found,
the section
on the screen and the cursor is positioned
of the program
at the relay coil.
fails to find a relay coil with the specified
address,
an error
appears.
This key displays

the screen.
address
search)
those ladders that have a specified
If the [n-srch]
key is pressed
net number,
without
entering
starting
from the top of
a number,
the display
is
by one net.
[s-srch ] (function-instruction
search)
This key searches
instructions.
Searching
then pressing
the [s-srch]
instruction
for function
name or number,
while the cursor is on a function

that function
instruction
(g) Search operation
instruction,
are searched
function
is performed
key.
instructions
using the cursor keys (<
>, -z +
Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key.
Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key.
Enter a function
then press a cursor key.

Example:
Enter
Sl,
key is pressed
with the same number as
The function
press
>)
The address is searched
The NET No. is searched
name, or enter S followed
then
If the [s-srch]
a function
for.
instruction
by entering
instruction
a cursor
by a function
is searched
The
key.
for.
for.
instruction
number,
for.
function
instruction
END1
is
searched for,
(h) Searching
When
the
in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH)
source
program
is FORMAT-B/C,
type
global
searching
in all main/sub-
programs is enabled.
Refer to APPENDIX
1)
6 Managing
a Source Program
for source program type.
The range of search

All programs,
which include a currently
The subprogram
is searched
displayed
for in the ascending
a)
From the current cursor position
b)
From next numbered
c)
From LEVEL1 to subprogram
d)
From top to cursor position
subprogram,
to last numbered
opening
subprogram.
one.
of which P address is small next to a).

in subprogram
l-43
for.
order of P address.
to bottom of currently
subprogram
are searched
of a).
5. OPERATION
G-SRCH
mode continues
unless pushing
the < ESC > key or the [cancel]
key.
A
1st net of LEVEL1
__1.
8
I@
@
@
m
cursor
displaying on
the screen
one of
subprograms
Whole
program
0
@
Final net of the maximum
numbered
subprogram
v
Th
(Searching
Searching
in the order of @ -@I)
result
When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position.
In case of finding
in another
program
the program
which
is currently
displayed
will be
closed.
Then,
the program
which
contains
the object,
will be opened
to display
the object
position with the cursor.

At this
time,
modifications
whether
to save
or quit
modifications
is inquired,
in case
there
are
in the program to be closed.
When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed
by one.
l-44
in order of 1) one
5. OPERATION
3)
Operation
The global search is operated with the following
function
key.
(comand]
8
[comand]
Select the [G-srch]
with pushing
the [SHIFT]
[G-SRCH]
(Shortcut
command
Execution
mode
by the operation
are searched
unless quitting
of 0 + 9.
G-SRCH
mode.
of search
Refer to (c)
program,
[search],(d)
[w-srchjY(e)
[s-srch]
in (7)Searching
in a sequence
for how to specify the target of global search.
c) End of G-SRCH
G-SRCH
different
in state of 8
to the mode of G-SRCH
After that, all programs
b)
will be displayed)
is <G > + [COMMAND])
a) Beginning of G-SRCH
It switches
(the following
mode
mode is ended by pushing
< ESC > or [CANCEL]
key. The end method is
individually.
- <ESC>
Only G-SRCH
mode is ended. The program
on the opening
now
is the state as it is.

=
- [CANCEL]
It returns
SRCH
to the program
which
was opened
mode. The program on the opening
Whether will save or quit modifications

modifications
Copying
sections
A multiple-net
of a sequence
sequence
net can be copied
at beginning
the G-
now closes.
is inquired,
in the program which IS currently
in case there are
displayed.
program
program can be copied net by net.
Specify the net to be copied.
in the same file that IS being edited or Into another
remains as it was.
l-45
file.
The selected
The
net
5. OPERATiON
File which is beinq edited
Specified
[COPY1
file
Range to be copied
[until]
Fig. 51.2
(6)
[COPY]
.,:/..:...\:::..:
..:...;.
.
...,
$$:::;$$,j:$;~:
$ ++t
:,
..Z_
. . ...).
$S;+b ;;
:I;,
.:.:.::,:.:..:.:.:.:,:.;,,
;:&J&&,l
:: ::..:.:-
,. .:::::::::
..:.:.:...:.:.:.::....:.:.:.:.L:.,.
:.:.:.:.:.:.:,.:y(.:.~.:::
:.:.:ii
.:,:,y . . . . . :.>;.x
,:.y
.......:.:Q:.:.:~:.:.~.:.:
1:.
~~i~~~~~~,~~~
~:~~pI~~, j@$j$$
$+.:.
.:.:.:.:i.::,.::::::::
.,:.:..:::::
.~:::.:.:.~.:::.:.;::.._,._. :.:
[Operation]
Copying a net
Place the cursor on the net to be copied
displayed
and press the [Copy]
key.
The selected
net is
in yellow.
Copying two or more nets

To select the nets to be copied,
copied,
then move the cursor
first move the cursor
to the net at the other end of the range
pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up],

are displayed
in yellow.
Alternatively,
enter a numeric
moves according
to the first net of the range to be
value
to the specified
[c-down],
and press
or [search]
the [c-up]
key.
or [c-down]
to be copied
The selected
key.
by
nets
The cursor
value.
Setting the net or nets to be copied

Press the [until]
Specifying
key.
the copy destination
using the [to] key
(Copying
the net or nets in the same
file)
Move the cursor
to the copy destination
l-46
in the same file and press
the (to] key.
The
5. OPERATION
selected
cursor.
net or nets are copied

To copy the selected
immediatelv
above the CODY destination
specified
net or nets two or more times, enter the number
they are to be copied before pressing
c3 Specifying the copy destination
by the
of times
the [to] key.
using the [to-fill
key
(Copying
the net or nets into another
file)
1) Press the [to-fit] key. The following message is displayed.

-
c,
If no program is specified, LATMP is created.

~:~~.:.:.:.:.:c.:.:.:.::~~~~:~:~:~:~~~::ii:
i:~l::::::~~:l::t:l:::ill:~:~~:~:~:~:~
:.?:(..
.:.:::::::.,.,.
:::.:.:..:...:...:.:.:.))::
::::::ix::::
.:::
:::::::
.:......$.,, .;:
:......:,:,
...,,:.
.:::;.:~
.,...:.,,,...,:.
................,.::
: ::.:,:
..... .y.:.:.:~l:~.~:..:.~.:
:
(LATMP file: Provisional work file used in editing)
j))
Enter
2)
the-name
<RETURN
of the file
which
the
net(s)
is to be copied
and
press
the
> key.
Select desired processing
3)
into
from the following
POP-UP menu:
/I
If the selected
4)
destination
Select desired processing
file is present,
the following
POP-UP
menu
is displayed.
from the menu.
The file already exists.

~1 Update
Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the

previous data of the file.
Cancels output to the selected file.
Appends the copy to the selected file.
F2 Quit
Append
F3
@ If the nets to be copied are known beforehand,

copied, enter the number of nets to be copied,
place the cursor
on the first net to be
then press the [Copy]
key.
Steps @, ai,
and @ can be skipped.

(Note)
Incorrect
(9) Moving
sections
A multiple-net
copied.
nets cannot be copied.

of a sequence
sequence
The selected
program
can be moved
net by net.
net or nets can be moved to another
edited or output to another file.

The only difference
program
The selected
between copying
Specify
the net or nets to be
place in the same file that is being
net or nets are deleted.
and moving is that the selected
net or nets are deleted in
moving.
-tIWlet
Delnet
Insert
Adress
Search
cancel
search
c-down
c-up
cancel
search
c-down
C-UP
WY
Move
to-fil
+org
[Move]
until
to
l-47
File
syEdit
5. OPERATION
[Operation]
Substituting
(Note)
[Move]
incorrect
(10) Combining
for [Copy],
follow steps 0
to $3 for copying.
nets cannot be moved.
a sequence
program
A source program can be combined
to another source program that is being edited.
The source program to be combined
can be displayed
and edited separately,
then combined
to
the original source program that is being edited.

Original screen
View screen
r
File being edited
[}-9
(original file)
Edit
Section to be edited
I F-01
Fig. 51.2
The model specified

to be entered
Combining
for (VIEW)
even
instruction
will
in compilation.)
be detected
combined
Program
must agree with the PMC model of the file
the file to be combined
if the two models
will be detected
range or function
a Sequence
system
However,
screen.
is found, a warning message
In this case, no errors
operation,
(7)
for the FAPT LADDER
on the original
(TO) or entered
disagreement
Edited file to be
Combine
do not agree
can be specified
with
each
(If a
is displayed.)
even if the file to be combined
contains
format that does not agree with the specified

When
other.
for
ignoring
extreme care is needed.
l-48
the
warning
message
model.
an address
(The error
to continue
the
5. OPERATION
1)
Function keys
[Comand ]
inmet
~ BPiiiei:
:!..
..
...,.:,.
Se&&. j r &,fjjf ;:;:: ;,.:&qove..
::.
: :Adiers
:.
I_lnreti.
ORIGINAL
= display
= display
View
when the file is opened

when the file is opened
ORICISAL
EDIT .~LAN!Eii:
VlCW
:LA: PYC-fiC3
; x000.0
+z;
A: YFLADDERFTEST.
SliB71
ISP
.. ..
syEdii
for the first time

using the [File] command
PMC Model on which editing
&
is carried out on the View 1 screen
= Initial
displa)
at opening
the file
= Display
opened
by [Filel
comand
-Model of PMC edited
in View screen
Kmmm
NET
00001-00002
STEi
YOOO. 0
I PO@@I
I
sY=sAwlE
Fig. 51.2
(8)
Screen
Displayed
when a File is Opened
l-49
0002/6552
by the (File] Command
5. OPERATION
2) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program
Specify an insertion point (The

data is inserted immediately
above the cursor.)
I
[ Press thl:LE]
key 1
Specify ; view file
c POP-UP menu >

4 (View)
(To)
Shows the ladder

diagram of the file to be
combined (View screen)
Combines the file with

the Ladder program on
the original screen
1. Check the displayed

data of the file to be
combined
2. Edit the data of the
file to be combined
and combine it
1. The file is
immediately
combined. The
data of the file is
not displayed.
Edit the Ladder program

on the view screen
(Normal editing)
Press the c ESC > key to terminate
editing
< POP-UP menu s

+
(Save)
$ (Edit)
Returns to the ladder
diagram screen (The
view screen is
continued.)
Saves the Ladder

program shown on the
view screen
* 1: The name of the provisional

Fig. 51.2
(9)
work file is LATMP.
Operation
Flowchart
for Combining
1 - 50
a Sequence
Program
5. OPERATION
3)
Examples
Example 1. Combining
a sequence
program file
[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion
point on the original screen.
Select [File].
Enter the name of the file to be combined
From the following
> key.
menu, select Fl (To).
The file is inserted
immediately
above
the net specified
in step
0.
(Original
screen)
a modified sequence
program
[Operation]
Select [File].
Enter the name of the file to be combining
From the following
Edit the Ladder

<ESC>
conventional
> key.
menu, select F2 (View).
program
key.
(Ladder
on the view
editing
way.)
l-51
can
screen.
be
To terminate
performed
and
editing,
terminated
press
the
in
the
5. OPERATION
@I From the following
menu, select Fl (Save).
Temp (Outputs the data to the LATMPm
Return to the screen of step-@and
file.)
check -the name of the file output
in step @.
Then, select Fl (To).

Y
.- @I -The-file
is
inserted
immediately
above
the net specified
in step
(Original
0.
screen)
a specified
section of a sequence
program
[Operation]
Select [File].
Enter the name of the file to be combined
and press the <RETURN>
key.
From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).
Select
[Copy]
or [Move]
on the view
screen
and specify
a desired
range
with
(until].
From the
following
function
menu,
select
[to-org].
(Specify
insertion
into
the
original screen.)
[until]
to
cancel
From the following
search
c-down
c-up
to-fil
to-org
menu, select Fl (Exec).
jj
The data is inserted
immediately
screen)
1-52
above
the net specified
in step 0.
(Original
5. OPERATION
(11) Editing
a symbol
and comment
from the ladder
On the ladder diagram editing screen,
diagram
editing
a symbol and comment
screen
added at the specified
address
can be edited.
[Comand]
[syEdit]
::,Y;~y~r::~:~
~~:;~::;::::
i:.,:,:j
.:
::
:ig:::iexee+:: aiijans~l, j3
..I.
,.,.,
.?.
.A.
..
.,.,.
,:
..
..
..
[Operation]
Specifying
an address
To edit a symbol and comment
in a ladder diagram,
address and press the (syEdit]
place the cursor on the corresponding
key.
Editing the symbol and comment

The cursor moves to the symbol editing section
the symbol and press the <RETURN
Terminating
Terminates
editing after modifying
key :
Terminates
editing without
(12) Abbreviated
input
Each function
strings
The cursor moves to the comment
Edit
field.
editing
(exec] key
[cancel]
> key.
in the bottom right part of the screen.
with the [cornand]
key can be directly
below,
modifying
the data.
key
selected
then press the [comand]
the data.
with the [comand]

function
key.
Those
key.
Enter one of the character
portions
that are enclosed
in
brackets can be omitted.

I
(nsert)
(elnet)
(earth)
(OPY)
(ove)
(ile)
The function
(Note)
The
(SY)E
NW
keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.
keys
extending
[k
or L ] and
[J
orJ
] are used
to create
or delete
upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram.
line is for creation

to a function
and the dashed vertical
line IS for deletion.
line
The solid vertical
The menu item applying
key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.
l-53
a vertical
5. OPERATION
(13) ZOOM
When the source program type is FORMAT-B,

edit another
subprogram,
which
is called
it is realized
by the CALU
with easy operation
CALLU
instruction
to refer and
from the program
now on the opening.

For the source program type, refer to APPENDIX
6 Management
a source program.
1) Start up of zoom
a)
Moved the cursor to the parameter

<RET>
b)
The program
now on opening
hides
by the parameter
and push the
from the editing
in mentioning
screen.
Then
the subprogram
above appears on the screen.
Start up under editing

When ZOOM is attempted
be inquired.
while editing the program,
the preservation
of
modifications
will
Select either.
II
Close the current program.

Fl
Save 8 zoom
F2
Cancel
3)
instruction
key.
which is specified
2)
of the CALUCALLU
End of ZOOM
When the end operation
with the =zESC > key is attempted
by ZOOM,
to the state when
it will return
return to the program configuration
ZOOM
in the program
is started.
Moreover,
editing
screen
it is possible
to
screen all at once.
End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
a)
Save(update)
Quit
Renamesave
Edit
Main
Fl:Save(update)
& quit
& quit
& quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content
of current
program screen is preserved.
b)
F2:Quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM
program screen is cancelled.
l-54
was started, after the content
of current
5. OPERATION
c)
F3:Rename,
save & quit
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content
program screen is preserved
(14) List of subprograms
called from currently
refer to the., chapter
LADDER (personal computer)

Only the operation
1)
subprogram
name.
in use
The list of subprograms
For the function.
into specified
of current
displayed
is described
a step sequence (14) List"of "FAPT
12. Creating
supplementary
program is displayed.
operators
manual B-66131/04-6.
here.
Operation
The command
List
is operated with the following
function
key.
[comand]
1
8 [comand]
..........
: ..........
............................................
........
...... ,.,:.:
1$$$i&$;;$ 2 :~,~i5t~ 3 $$$&$:$j;j4 .$&&&r$r_i
j ;;&&&;i
I
1
Select the [List] with pushing
..,.
.::,.
.:,.
. :..:.....;
./.
i~~~~~~~~~i:aii
.A..
:!:::~::.~$~:,.,~~~~
2
,(...... .:.>y.
..: :::,.,
~,
.,
.,y,.:.
. . . . . .I
:.:::,.
..
..
.::,::.:..
..
..:.
the [SHIFT]
,..
..
(the following will be displayed)
fZy...
..:.:.;:.:.
(Shortcut
command
is < L >
......
: : : ..........
::.IQi
.\.
.:.::;
.L...
in state of 8
:.,..
i..::.:.:.:..
:..,.
4 :il~,id,iri;i3:,~:~
5 $$,e)!$::i; 6 :i:
:iil.::~;:i~~~~~~jxi
7 iil~;~~~~:
... 3 Qqiiaiiiij:iii~~~~~~
::.:: :.
..
.........,,.,:
........
.........
:.... ....ix,? .y,:+:)(
..:.
j.
I :,,,:
Iy::.Ii:: ;.,,:;<;;;:<.y
6 $$;$$.tt$$7 ~&~~~
8 ~~>:,.$&$;~~$
g $;&gijllia@:ii, o:~~:~~:.:~:~~~,d~~
.....: .................... .. .......... : ......,: ......
...... : ..:.......
_,............,.~.~i.,~~
~, :...,
..,.
:. ....:.:.,.:
~~~i~~~~riiiilli
g ~~;i::~iis::::iiii
Or;.;$,Lift j,:
III:I:I:i:i:
).
.::,:.:::.y::/~
.
:. :,:,:
:::j
....
..I
::l)j
+ [COMMAND])
(15) To edit Net comment
It is able to write
comment,
the comments
between
and each of them occupies
ladder
nets.
These
two steps in sequence
comments
are called
program.
1) To enter Net comment

a)
you want to write a net comment.
And then press <Shift > + [netcmt].
R1OO1.O
R1000.2
Y2000.4
n
R1OO1.O
+*I
R1000.2
Y23.4
A
l-55
Net
5. OPERATION
b)
Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,
and the area for comment
enclosed
by
( and ) is inserted.
Then the cursor changes
into character-size
cursor,
and type comment
sentence
onto
the area.
The area for Net comment
expands
display mode) automatically
according
can expands
R1OO1.O
up to a hundred
and shrinks
by two lines
to the comment
Every Net comment
lines.
R1000.2
Y2000.4
n
R120.3
=Li
character
( Net comment
(* All characters
R1OO1.O
(four lines at four lines
sentences.
is written in here.
you can enter are available.
cursor
9
)
R1000.2
Y23.4
+H2)
To determine
a)
To determine
comment
b)
or cancel the editing Net comment
To cancel
cancelled
Note)
the editing
is fixed,
Net comment,
and the Net comment
the editing
Net comment,
press
[ end ] or < ESC>.
Then
the editing
editing mode is finished.
press
[cancel].
The new Net comment
will be
and erased.
The number of characters

ASCII character
in a Net comment
as one byte,
one Japanese
is limited to 4095 bytes: counting
one
kana as one byte, one kanji character
as two bytes.
Line feed is also available
on Net comment.
Line feed is helpful
to save memory
for Net comment.
3)
To modify Net comment
a) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press
<Shift > + [netcmt]
or < RET > .
and the Net comment
will be ready to modify its contents.
The Net comment
editing
mode becomes
b) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into Net comment,
( Net comment
is written in here.
( All characters
1-56
)
I:::
active,
press [inslin].
5. OPERATION
[inslin]
will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one line,
and make a blank line
at the cursor position.

( Net comment
..
( y:
:. .
( All characters
l
)
is written in here.
)
l
;
(
c) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin].
( Net comment
is written in here.
(* Net comment
will expand or shrink automatically.
( All characters
:.:.:.:
.iz
3
3
(*
[dellin)
will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one
line.
d)
( Net comment
is written in here.
( &I characters
To exit from Net comment
editing mode,
e) To cancel the modifications

the
modifications
and the
press [ end ] or < ESC >.
you have just made,

Net
comment
will
press [cancel].
be
restored
[cancel]
as
will abandon
it was
before
the
modifications.
4) To delete Net comment
There are two ways to delete Net comment.
Use [Delnet]
as same as deleting
[command]
+ [Delnet]
Entering
Net comment
normal ladder nets.
--) specify area to delete -+ [exec]
editing
cursor on the Net comment
mode
by c Shift > + [netcmt]
or
<RET > with
the
which you want to delete, and then press [delete].
5) Lost Net comment
A Net comment
consists
Net
pointer,
comment
themselves.
comment,
copying
user.
These
of the information
of position
and Net
comment
elements
are usually
two
but the partner
program which is called
data
is comment
which
combined
one
might be lost by illegal file operations
the ladder file .#LA
When a Net comment
string
in sequence
or modifying
the Net comment
pointer loses its Net comment
to one
sentences
to make
or something,
a Net
such as
data file NETCMT.OOO
string data, the Net comment
by
is
called Lost Net comment.

Lost Net comment
displayed
in purple
is displayed
or dimly
as blank Net comment

on monochrome
1 - 57
enclosed
display.
Lost
by I( and )
Net
comment
which is
can
be
5. OPERATION
normalized
comment,
by editing
operation.
such as deletion,
Lost Net comment
copying
can be edited
as a normal
Net
and so on.
(16) To edit New page
It is able to specify
the position
the position is called New page,
to feed page at printing
ladder diagram.
and each of them occupies
This specification
two steps in sequence
of
program.
1) To enter New page

a)
Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page.

I paw
And then press -z Shift > +
I.
R1OO1.O
R1000.2
Y2000.4
A
R1000.2
Y23.4
R120.3
xl-+
R1OO1.O
A
w
+Hf
b)
Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,
R1OO1.O
and the mark of New page is inserted.
R1000.2
Y2000.4
n
v
R120.3
x-+
<New
R1OO1.O
page>
R1000.2
Y23.4
+HI
2)
Other operation
to edit New page
New page can be handled as same as other ordinary

copying
[ Copy 1, moving
[ Move 1, and deleting
[Delnet]
New page.
(17) Terminating
editing
of a sequence
program
[Operation ]
@
Press the (ESC
> key on the following
editing screen.
l-58
ladder nets.
The operations
such as
ladder nets are also effective
on
5. OPERATION
The following
1Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
editing end menu(pop-up
Save(update)
Quit
Renamesave
Edit
Main
1:Save(update)
a)
menu) appears.
& quit
& quit
81quit
After current content of the editing is preserved,
the editing screen will be ended.
F2:Quit
After current content of the editing is cancelled,
F3:Renamesave
After current
the editing screen will be ended.
& quit
content
of the editing
is preserved
into specified
subprogram
name, the
editing screen will be ended.
d)
F4:Edit
The c ESC > key operation
e)
is canceled
and it returns to the editing screen of former.
F5:Main
With the operation
was started.
a).b)
it returns
or c),
But with this operation,
it returns
to the program
to a program
screen
where
configuration
ZOOM
screen at all
once from the nested state.
Either the above-mentioned
is selected
and it returns
to the program configuration
screen,
the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.
When error net exists

When the error net exists,
ERROR
NET
NO.
is displayed
and the end menu is not
displayed. Cope this case by the following.

a)
After the error net is corrected

operation
b)
When
the end
will be done.
pressed
CANCEL),
or deleted and the state of the error is released,
<ESC>
key in the state of 0
after
CAN
is typed
(meaning
of
editing
by
the menu of 6, will be displayed.
When Save is ordered, it will be preserved
When
Quit
cancelling
is ordered,
it will
be able
the content of the editing.
l-59
after removing
to return
the error net.
to the state
before
5. OPERATION
5.1.3
Symbol and comment editing
The definition of terms
definition and uses
Terms
display
Symbol
(Extended)
Name assigned uniquely to each relay/

coil, to be used in place of PMC address
Relay comment
Text assigned to relays/coils

them.
(New)
INPUT
x0.0
++++I--
to explain
;w
COMMEiT
Coil comment
(Extended and
Renamed, old
name: Comment)
Text assigned to coils to explain them.
Net comment
Text assigned between ladder nets to

explain them.
CO&NT
YO.0
HERE IS
COIL
--I
COMMENT
$n_
t- COMMENT
Tables for Symbol & Comment specifications
In FAPT LADDER, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays,
notes to a sequence
Symbol/Comment
1)
and can add
program.
for l/O signals and internal relays
Ver. 8.1 or earlier
Data kind
Available
characters
Symbol
Relay comment
Comment
ASCII characters
(lowercase alphabetic
characters not allowed)
Not supported
ASCII characters
Japanese kanal
kanji characters
(Note 1)
6 bytes
Not supported
30 bytes
Maximum
number
6552 entries
Not supported
Duplicated
definition
Not allowed
Display on
t-CRT MDI
Yes
l-60
64 kbytes - 1 byte
I (65535 bytes)
5. OPERATION
2)
Ver. 8.4 or later
Data kind
Symbol
Relay comment
Comment
ASCII characters
(lowercase
alphabetic
characters not
allowed)
ASCII characters
Japanese kanal
kanji characters
(Note 2)
ASCII characters
kana/
kanji characters
Maximum
character
16 bytes
16 bytes
30 bytes
Maximum
number
20,000 entries
(Note 3)
20,000 entries
(Note 3)
20, 000 entries
Duplicated
definition
Not allowed
Allowed
Allowed
Display on
CRT/MD1
Yes, if it is 6 bytes or
shorter.
(Note 4)
No
Yes, if the symbol assigned

to the same address is 6
(Note 4)
bytes or shorter.
Available
characters
Note
1)
CRTiMDl
can not display Japanese
(Japanese
Note 2)
Note 3)
Japanese
characters
characters
characters,
Japanese
(Note 1)
(Note 3)
replaced to blank.
can be handled with only PC98 series)

in relay comment
Free area size of hard drive,
are replaced to blank when printing.
EMS and XMS on personal
computer
may restrict
them.
Note 4)
When
the total size of all coil comments
comments
Comment
are displayed
for ladder sequence
exceeds
64 kbytes,
no symbols
and
on CRTIMDI.
program
* Ver.8.4 or later
Data kind
Available
Net comment
characters
ASCII characters
Japanese kana/kanji
Line feed
characters
(Note 1)
Steps to occupy
2 steps/Net
Maximum
64 charactersiline
4095 characters/Net
charactersiline
comment
comment
Maximum
lines
100 lines/Net
Maximum
number
About 20,000 Net comments
Display on CRT/MD1
Note 1)
Note 2)
Note 3)
Japanese
characters
The limitation
Number
(Note2)
(Note3)
No
are replaced
to blank when printing.
which is reached first becomes
of characters
comments.
comment
(Note2)
in each Net comment
the limitation
effects
for the Net comment.
on maximum
number
of Net
Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer
further restrict them.
l-61
may
5. OPERATION
Before using extended
symbol comment
Note the followings
in case of using extended
symbofcomment.
1) These functions are available to the undermentioned
2)
PMC-RB4!RB4(
PMCRC4/RC4(STEP)
PMC-RBSiRB6
PMC-NB2
Source
PMC setting.
STEP)
programs
for above-mentioned
PMC,
created
with
ver.8.1
or
need
earlier,
conversion.
The operation
a)
b)
cl
4
is the followings.
Prepare source programs
Adapt PMC setting to a source program.

Convert it into ALL-format
mnemonic
Reconvert
data into a source program with another program name.
the mnemonic
The conversion
3)
and start the ver.8.4.
is completed
There is no operation
data.
by above-mentioned
procedure.
new source program.
in case of creating
Moving the cursor
<
+-
>,
<
<Shift>
7,
<t
7,
<
Moves the cursor to another field to be edited.
5_ 7
+ <c>,<+>
Moves the cursor to another
position within the field to
be edited.
Entering a comment
When a front-end
Japanese.
compiled
characters
in Japanese
processor
When a comment
(a ROM-format
are replaced
To sstart the front-end
for Japanese
containing
file is created),
word input is used, a comment
kana characters
can be entered
or m-type alphanumeric
all the kana characters
and m-type
characters
with spaces.
processor
for Japanese
word input, press
< CTRL
> and < XFER
of the front-end
processor
for Japanese
word input,
see the corresponding
manual.
To exit from the front-end
<I
is
alphanumeric
the keys.
For the operation
in
processor
for Japanese
keys.
1-62
word Input. press the
< CTRL
and
5. OPERATION
(1) Start
[Operation]
@
Select [SYMBOL]
The following
(symbol and comment)
symbol and comment
3l
~UDKESS SFWL
! UllOl
XUOOO. 0
x0000. 1
)ilJOUlJ. 2
5oouu.3
_.~
0001
lm2
IJUO3
editing screen appears:
COWEST
SIY-:.
W-B
WI-C
m-i
CUWEST
CLMEXT
COWXT
CUWST
I?ZPUT
INPUT
lXCT
ICPUT
SLWLE
WCLE
SLWLE
SUWLE
So. 1
ho. 1
Xo. 1
hc. 1
I
I
!
111 t ; MD I ( F4 or SBIFT - F1
4 <- ->
key wen
1,s~ I SIllA
1
ZSEARCR 3 MEA
4 f&B
(2) Entering
) key hhen you add Address

YOU mve cursor
5.
GDELETE
data.
by a character.
8CUPY
7 ,.
SPASTE
10 EiB
a new symbol and comment
A new symbol and comment
can be added at an address
to which
no symbol
or comment
assigned.
[Operation]
Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment
editing screen.
An input window opens on the screen.
t
Address field
t
Comment
t
Symbol field
Enter an address in the address field.
The symbol field is shown in reverse video.
Enter a symbol.
The comment
1I
field is shown in reverse video.
Enter a comment.
1-63
field
is
5. OPERATION
@
.- The entered address, symbol, and comment are cleared from the window and entered into
the file.
When no symbols
and comments
are entered,
the system
is automatically
set to receive
new
data.
(3) Editing
a symbol
and comment
A symbol and comment assigned

-_
.[Operation].
to an address can be edited.
- I
If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT]
Move the cursor by pressing the < c >, <+>,
To move the cursor within a field, while pressing
to exit from that state.
< T >, or c 1 > key and edit the data.
the e Shift > key press the < cz-
key.
(4) Moving
a comment
A comment
assigned
to an address can be moved to another address.
[Operation]
Place the cursor on the comment
to be moved.
Select [DELETE].
The following
message appears on the screen.
1Comment
data copied to paste buffer 1
Place the cursor at the place the comment
is to be moved.
Select [PASTE).
(5) Copying
a comment
A comment
assigned
to an address can be copied into another address.
[Operation]
0
Place the cursor on the comment
Select [COPY].
The following
to be copied.
l-64
or e -+>
5. OPERATION
1Comment
data copied to paste buffer 1
Place the cursor at the place the comment
Select [PASTE].
is to be copied.
(6) Searching for a symbol or address
[Operation]
@
Select [SEARCH]
The following
on the symbol and comment
editing screen.
input window appears on the screen.
SEARCH
Enter the symbol or address to be searched
The system
searches
for the symbol
for and the data number.
or address
and the data number
in that order.
The
cursor is moved to the searched data.
(7) Deleting
a symbol
(a) Deleting
and/or
comment
both a symbol
and a comment
[Operation]
0
Place the cursor on the NO field.
C3 Select [DELETE].
(b) Deleting
either
Both the symbol and the comment
are deleted.
a symbol or a comment
[Operation]
0
Place the cursor on the SYMBOL
Select [DELETE].
(c) Deleting
or COMMENT
Only the selected
two or more symbols
field.
symbol or comment
and comments
is deleted.
simultaneously
[Operation]
0
Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted.
(2
Select
[AREA].
The
entire
line
is displayed
Running!
Appoint extent
1-65
in reverse
video,
and
the
following
5. OPERATION
Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.
Select [DELETE].
(8) Terminating
the symbol
All the data displayed
and comment
in reverse video is deleted.
editing
[Operation]
0
On the edit screen, select [END] or press the <ESC>
The following
key.
message appears on the screen:

Update (Saves the edited data.)
Qutt (Cancels the edited data.)
!i
1 Edit (Returns to editing.)

J
Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.
(9) Editing
screen
(the case of model
*Symbol entry number

CRT/MD1 can display / Total
setting
I+
is PMC-RBWRB4
(STEP)/RCWRC4
Coil comment size (byte)

CRT/MD1 can display / Total
I
EDIT ( SYMBOL 6
<O>[A:%FLvDATA%RB4
PMC-RB4
COMMENT )
(STEP))
SYYMBOL 000001/000003
COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090
y
(Notel)
COIL COMMENT
ADDRESS SYMBOL
RELAY COMMENT
NO.
I
I
I
I
IV
00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA
00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB
cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc
00003*X00000.2 CCCCC
1
'*' means a symbol data which
can be displayed on CRT/MDI.
Note 1)
T is the indicator.
Symbol/comment
are displayed
with turning
at this point in ladder
diagram editing screen.
(10) Searching
Search
by a part of strings
function
is active
for specified
field,
LINE NO.IADDRESSiSYMBOLGELAY
or COIL
COMMENT.
Especially
you can find relay!coil
comment,
strings.
l-66
which
is too long,
by specifing
a part of data
5. OPERATION
1)
Press [SEARCH]
Furthermore,
.:;:
the display of function-key
.-.;
:,,:
.:.,
:;. _....
..
&.<]:;
-.
2:.
:..
2)
and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search.
2 ,:,.ADRs ..; 3 .SYMB$4
. ..
.. ...
. . ..
;: f$@f.j.
..;....
.,.
:\\y
changes
.:.
..
5 ;: .:C,o$
.,.,.,.
as the undermentioned.
. ::.:
..:.
.,: 6 I .:,,,::;j::i::jj)j::
, $pj.:i:::,
8
:.
..
.. :
,. ,,.
.+..
::...
.,.,.
Input strings and specify the data kind for searching
.,\
.,
by function-key.
A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].
3)
If search is success,
cursol moves to the found place.
l-67
_I...
.....
. ...
..
9 ::y
.:y
.:.:.:<
, o ....;;:, ..: : .,
:. .,..::.:;::..{:...
... ,,
5. OPERATION
5.1.4 Message editing

An arbitrary
message
can be displayed
(SUB 41), which
instruction
described
on the CRT!MDI
is one of the function
screen
of the CNC,
using
Such a message
instructions.
the DISPB
is created
as
model to another,
as
below.
Types and quantity of characters that can be used
5.1.4.1
The types of characters
usable
in message
data vary from one CNC/PMC
listed below.
I
CNC/PMC
Characters
JIS levels 1
Full-size
Half-size
Alphanumeric
and 2
hiragana
katakana
characters
PMC-RB/RB2/RB3/RB4!RB5/
F16
that can be entered
RBG.RCIRC3IRC4
F18
PMC-RAl
F15B
PMC-N:NA/NB
ra,
PMC-PAlIPA3
(A
IRA2RA3
: Some characters
The half-size
cannot be displayed.
kana and alphanumeric
keys on the keyboard.
Similarly
using the Japanese-language
They cannot be checked
characters
to symbols
can be entered
and comments,
input FEP (front-end
by FAPT LADDER.)
using the kana and alphanumeric
Japanese-language
processor).
text can be edited
The number of characters
is limited
as follows:
1)
When only full-size
Japanese-language
2)
When only half-size
kana characters
3)
When only alphanumeric
5.1.4.2
The
62 characters
are used
127 characters
are used
256 characters
are used
Edit procedure
edit method
language
characters
characters
(excluding
the procedure
that can
half-size
common
be used
varies
characters)
to all models
between
the CNCIPMC
can be used and other models.
(only alphanumeric
RC as an example.
(1) Startup
[Operation]
$9 Select [MESSAG]
(message)
model
from the edit menu
l-68
characters
in which
Japanese
This section
describes
are entered),
using the PMC-
5. OPERATION
The following
(Fig. 51.4)
message data edit screen appears.
1 002 ,401:.!
! 003 .AOO.2
; 004 ,400. ,
Fig. 51.4
Message
Data Edit Screen
(2) input
[Operation]
0
Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.
C~J Key in the desired message data.
(3) Modification
[Operation]
@
Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.
The character
Place the cursor at the location where modification
Key in the desired characters
Press the <RETURN>
(4) Search
cursor moves on to the message
and blinks there.

is required.
to modify the message data.
key.
[TOP] [BOTTOM]
[Operation]
0
On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].
QJ The cursor moves to the start or end message
1-69
address.
using the cursor keys.
5.
(5) END
(Operation]
@
On the edit screen,
press [END] or < ESC > .
The following
Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.
message
appears.
5.1.5 I/O module editing

The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described
below.
(1) Startup
[Operation]
0
Select [MODULE]
The following
(I0 module) from the edit menu.
Ii0 module edit screen appears.
!ADDRESSCROI'P
BASE SLOT
X0000
SOOOl
X000?
: x0003
s0004
X0005
, X0006
x0007
\OOOE
X0009
x0010
so011
X001?
\0013
so014
SO015
it
WAVE
Fig. 51.5
ADDRESSCROUPBASE SLOT
ID16C
ID16C
l!iEAXCH
?Ihpt"l3 HELP 1
(a)
(Fig. 5.15)
606LETE7DELAi.L
8
I0 Module
l-70
WE
soooo
~0001
YOOOZ
PO003
\0004
YOOO5
YOOO6
YOOOi
YOOOB
YOOOD
YOOIO
YOOII
YOOI?
10013
\0011
10015
Edit Screen
5,
10 END
OPERATION
5. OPERATION
x0000
'WOOi
\ooc2
\0003
\000:
0
0
00
::
YOOQl
\oooo
::
If
1:
1
\ 0002
0003
yoo~
01
:I
YOOO4
F0005
FOO06
YOOCi
YOOOS
10009
YOOlO
10011
YOOl?
YOO13
YOOi4
YOOl5
%
sooo~
coo10
~0011
\OO!?
xooi3
\OOl?
.\OOlI
1WKH ?IXPoT 3BELP 4PKCB 5!4XLUlGDELETE

iDEL%L8DKC-i 9.
Fig. 51.5
(b)
(2) Channel
(i)
IOmB,
Ii0 Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one channel
switching
(only for models
in which more than one channel
can be set)
can be set)
To switch to the next channel:
[Operation]
0
Select (NXT.CH].
(ii) To switch to the previous channel:
[Operation]
ci!
Select [PRV.CH].
(3) Setting
[Operation]
Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.
Key in the module address in the following
format:
GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME
(Note
1) The module name that can be specified

or I0 unit.
Selecting
[HELP]
names that can be displayed
(Note
2)
The I,0 unit MODEL-B
may vary depending
or pressing
the <HELP>
on the model of the PMC
key can display
the module
in the NAME field.
is allocated
as follows:
GROUP
Specify a group number in the configuration.
BASE
Must be fixed at 0.
SLOT
Specify
the unit number
power ONjOFF information
l-71
of the PO Unit-B.
Alternatively.
## is to be allocated.
set to 0 if
5. OPERATION
(4) Deletion
(i)
[DELETE]
[DELALL)
[DEL.CH]
To delete one module:
[Operation J
@
Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be deleted.
Select [DELETE].
(ii) To delete all modules:
[Operation]
0
Select [ DELALL].
(iii) To delete the modules
of one channel
(for models
in which
set):
[Operation 1
@
Select a channel
Select (DEL.CH].
for deletion.
(5) Search [SEARCH]
[Operation]
@
Press [SEARCH]
after an address is specified.
Place the cursor at the specified
address.
(6) END [END]
[Operation]
On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.
The following
message appears.
/I
Select one of the above items. and return to the edit menu.
l-72
more than one channel
can be
5. OPERATION
(7) Termination
[END]
[Operation]
0
Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.
@ The following
5.1.6
message appears.
Fl
Update
F2
Quit
F-3
Edit
System parameter
key.
The system returns to the editing screen.
editing
(1) Start
[Operation]
0
Select [SYSPRM]
(SYSTEM
PARAMETER)
G3 The system parameter editing screen appears.

The screen shown below is the system
parameter
editing
screen
for PMC-FIB.
For each
PMC model, see item (4) below.
(2) Input
[Operation]
(J,) Select an input item (displayed
in reverse video) with the <
Enter data
For information
about Input items, see Item (4) below
1-73
1 7 and <
1 > keys
5. OPERATION
(3) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END] or press < ESC > on the editing screen.
@ The following
message appears:
II
Select a function
(4) System
parameter
key from the above.

editing
The screen display returns to the editing menu.
screen and input items for each PMC model
(a) PMC-L/M
[Editing screen]
0
PMC-L
OBYTE
j) BCD ?-DIGITAREA
F'!KTYPE = L
R-AREA
l-74
S:i,%;O:
s)
81
11
0- !Xo
)
( 0- 400
5. OPERATION
TIMER USED AREA (area used for timers1

When timers
are set with the TMR
function
instruction
on the CRT/MDI,
setting
and
display in BCD is possible.

This parameter
decimal format.
specifies
the size (in bytes) of an area that can be set and displayed
This area is allocated
This area must be specified
from the start (D300) of nonvolatile
in the TMR
instruction
parameter
in
memory.
of timer control
data
address to enable decimal display.

A timer control data address requires
five bytes.
Therefore,
this parameter
must be set
as follows:
COUNTER
USED AREA (area used for counters)
When the preset values

CRT/MDI,
This parameter
display.
of counters
are set with the CTR function
instruction
on the
setting and display in BCD is possible.

specifies
the size (in bytes) of an area to use for decimal
This area must be specified
after the TIMER USED AREA in nonvolatile

in the CTR instruction
setting
and
memory.
parameter
of counter
control
data
Therefore,
this parameter
must be
the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses
that can
address to allow decimal display.

A counter
control data address requires
five bytes.
set as follows:
(Number of counters
for decimal display)
BCD 4-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq/disolav

This parameter
specifies
be set and displayed

after the COUNTER
on the screen
x 5 bytes
in four-diait
(CRTIMDI)
USED AREA in nonvolatile
Two bytes are required
for four-digit
BCD)
in 4-digit BCD.
memory.
BCD display.
Therefore,
this parameter
must be
set as follows:
(Number of addresses
for 4-digit BCD display)
x 2 bytes
BCD 2-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq and disolavinq

This parameter
specifies
be set and displayed
BCDl
the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses
on the screen
(CRTIMDI)
after the BCD 4-DIGIT AREA in nonvolatile

One byte is required
in two-diait
for two-digit
l-76
BCD.
memory.
BCD display.
as follows:
in two-digit
that can
Therefore,
this parameter
must be set
5. OPERATION
LADDER EXEC (ladder execution

This parameter
levels.
This
time)
sets an incremental
setting
processing
reduces
ladder
scan
that increased
ladder
execution
time for the first and second
time,
thus
achieving
high-speed
ladder
ladder
execution.
Note, however,
reduces ladder processing

Initial value
100
time on the first and second
levels
time on the third level.
Setting range
100 to 200
CYCLE TIME
This parameter specifies
Initial value
0 : 16 ms
Note, however,
a sequence
Setting
program execution
0: 16ms/l
that this parameter
cannot
period of 16 or 8 ms.
:8ms
be set with
PMC-L
and PMC-M
(MMC);
PMC-L is always set to 16 ms, and PMC-M (MMC) is always set to 8 ms.
IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division

This
parameter
specifies
whether
method)
to use the ladder division
method
or non-division
method.
Note that when
the non-division
method
is specified,
the third-level
ladder
is not
executed.
IInitial value
0 : Division method
Setting
0 : NO (division
method)
1 : YES (non-division
(b) PMC-P
[Editing screen]
l-77
method)
5. OPERATION
[input item]
@I PMC PARAM.
This
parameter
nonvolatile
SIZE (0 address size]

specifies
memory
Initial value
2048
the size
(in bytes)
of nonvolatile
Setting range
0 to 2048
relay (R address)
can be used.
input item when using an internal relay.
(I/O LINK)/OA
[Editing screen]
@
PMC-N/N
(I/O LINK)
P!iZ TYPE = K (I/O
LI!Xx)
PMCQA
EDIT
iSWEll
in the common
(0 address) and internal relay (R address) area.
In the initial state, no internal
(c) PMC-N/N
memory
PAitIWMER~
4050 series
10::;
0:
PUC TYPE j PA
l-78
O:BICARF.l:BCD
\
100 - 150s
1 0.W. 1:YES
Be sure to specify
this
5.
OPERATION
[Input item]
COUNTER
DATA TYPE
This parameter
function
specifies
instruction
initial value
whether
0 : BINARY
This parameter
This
of a counter
value
used with the CTR
is to be binary or BCD.
Setting
LADDER EXEC (ladder execution
levels.
the format
specifies
0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD
time)
an incremental
setting
reduces
100
Setting range
processing
ladder
scan
time for the first and second ladder

thus
time,
achieving
high-speed
ladder
execution.
Initial value
The table below indicates
100 to 150
ladder execution
time status during an execution
period of 8
ms.
Setting
100%
150%
First and second level processing
1 ~~~~
5ms
7.5ms
Note, however,
that increased
reduces the following
ladder execution
processing
PMC screen display time

CPASCAL
Ladder processing
processing
execution
time on the third level
time)
the ratio of C/PASCAL
execution
time
to ladder
program
time.
In contrast
first
specifies
levels
time
PASCAL EXEC (PASCAL execution

parameter
times:
This
time
and
to LADDER
second
EXEC, this parameter
levels,
and
increases
reduces
processing
ladder processing
time
for
PASCAL
time on the
and
similar
processing.
Initial value
I Setting range
0 to 100
PASCAL EXEC RATIO (ratio of PASCAL processino

The initial setting
display.
gives the same priority
This parameter allocates
C/PASCAL
Ladder processing
processing
time to PMC screen processin@
to C/PASCAL
processing
processing
and PMC screen
time to the following:
time
Under this setting, PASCAL can run periodically
l-79
even during PMC screen display.
5. OPERATION
Initial value
1Setting
50
When 0% is specified,
range
C/PASCAL
Note that if a much greater
0 to 99
is executed
after PMC screen display.
value is specified
PMC screen display is too short, resulting
in this parameter,
the time allocated
to
in a delayed display.
PASCAL ORIGIN
This parameter
specifies
the start address .of the task control block (TCB) of a PASCAL
program.
Initial value
000000
Setting range
When there is no PASCAL program,
Address
specify
in the PASCAL area
OOOOOOH.
PASCAL DATA ORIGIN

This parameter
specifies
the start address
(physical
address)
of the data area for a
PASCAL program.
Initial value
When
when an optional
SYNCHRONIZED
This parameter
Initial value
@I PMUOS
Setting range
OOOOOOH is set in the
sb800000H
000000
0 : NO
Initial value
specifies
01
DATA
in the PASCAL area
ORIGIN
RAM is used) is assumed
whether
Setting
EDITION fmanaaement
This parameter
PASCAL
LEVEL 3 (third-level
specifies
Address
%FF4000H
svnchronization)
buffer to be used in level 3.
0 : NO / 1 : YES
software
edition)
software
Edition of the management
l-80
(or
as the address.
to allow the synchronous
the edition of the management
Setting
parameter,
used with PMC-N.
software
currently
used
5. OPERATION
The table below indicates
ladder execution
time status during an execution
period of 8
ms.
Setting
First and second level processing
100%
5ms
150%
7.5ms
Note, however,
that increased
reduces the following
ladder execution
processing
Language program processing
Ladder processing
levels
time
IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division

parameter
times:
This
time
specifies
whether
method)
to use the ladder
division
method
or non-division
method.
Note
that when
the non-division
method
is specified,
the third-level
ladder
is not
executed.
Initial value
0 : Division method
Setting
LANGUAGE
program
specifies
and
PMC
the percentage
Language program processing
Processing
time of third-level
While the PMC screen is displayed,
value
LANGUAGE
50
display
have
processing
the
same
priority,
time
Ladder program
a language program can be executed
1Setting range
cyclically.
0 to 99
specifies
the start address
of the link control
statement
data of a
program.
Initial value
this
times:
ORIGIN
parameter
language
screen
of the following
llnitial
method)
EXEC RATIO
language
parameter
This
method)
1 : YES (non-division
As the
0 : NO (division
000000
Setting range
Address in the language

area
When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.
1-83
program storage
5. OPERATION
OPERATOR
PANEL (connectinq
This parameter
When
specifies
YES is specified
an FO machine
whether
in this
a machine
parameter,
operators
panel is actually
operators
panel, and an addresses
Initial value
0
.-
0 : NO
specify
panel
is used with the FSO.
the DtDO
addresses
where
an address for key images transferred
for LED images transferred
Setting
the start address
to the operators
0 : NO i 1 : YES
the
from the
panel.
(PMC address)
of the external
Dl where
the operators
panel is actually connected.
Setting range
ii)
operators
oanel)
KEY DI ADDRESS
Specify
,,
connected,
operators
X0 to Xl 27, Xl 000 to Xl 019
KEY DO ADDRESS
Specify
the start address
(PMC address)
of the external
DO where the operators
panel is actually connected.
Setting range
iii)
KEY BIT IMAGE

Specify
the
YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014
ADDRESS
start
address
(PMC
address)
of key
images
referenced
by
user
of LED
images
referenced
by user
programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal
iv)
relay area is set.
LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS

Specify
the
start
address
(PMC
address)
programs.
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.
l-84
5.
5.2
Printout
A sequence
program
beforehand.
Install PRINT.SYS
For printout,
FAPT LADDER
can be printed
When PC9801
out.
according
is used,
PRINT.SYS
must be installed
to Section 2.1 .l.

left margin,
line spacing
and
To use an Epson VP1 000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification
is required.
For
cross reference.
OPERATION
Compatible
allows the user to set the top margin,
For details on setting, see Section
1.4 of Part II.
printers
This software is usable with the printers listed below.
NEC PC9801
IBM PC/AT
EPSON VP1000
NEC PR201H
EPSON VP1000 (Note)
(Note)
details, see Section
(1) General
1.4 of Part II.
for printout
flow of operation
Select a source program

End
[ EXEC]
<Fl >
Make # LS file
-[ EXEC]
<Fl>
v
Specify output item
Fig. 5.2 (a)
Operation
l-85
Flow and Screens
5. OPERATION
The step sequence
diagram printing can be selected at PMC-RB4(STEP)
:iliiiiliiiiiiiiiiii~~~pR~N~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
C:FRC4-STEP
TITLE
SYSTEM
PARAMETER
SYMBOL
& COMENT
:
:
:
f
@#I/YES1
[!WYESl
WYESI
mT;l;;
[OPTION]
[OPTIONI
WYESI
[Em/YES1
[OPTION]
[CWYESI
[OPTION]
#tU/YESl
1 RC4(STEP).
LADDER
DIAGRAM
Added ->
~~...-I
,um
I/O UODULE
MESSAGE
:
:
:
:
:
:
CROSSREFERENCE
LIST
BIT ADDRESS
MAP
Fig. 5.2 (d)
Printing menu
C:YRC4-STEP
.fil::l:i
FIO ( ESC 1 : END
Fig. 5.2 (e)
11
Optional setting menu for step sequence
diagram printing
1) PRINT UNIT
2)
Select either only a specified
sub-program
When selecting
MODULE,
specify the printing sub-program
SUB-PROGRAM
NUMBER
Select either not printing / printing
or all sub-programs.
sub-program
program.
l-87
name to MODULE
number which belongs
NAME.
to a step sequence
5. OPERATION
(4) Output
item setting
Items to be output to a drawing

specified
at a time.
are specified
as described
below.
Some set items may not be displayed,
More than one item can be
depending
on the model of the
PMC.
Specifying
Whether
whether to output each data item

to output each data item can be specified
by placing
the cursor
item on the output item select menu with the 7 or 1 key, then pressing
on the desired
the <RETURN>
key.
Specifying
options
For data having

<RETURN
entering
optional
> key.
items,
The screen
the necessary
place
the cursor
for specifying
value on that screen,
on the desired
the corresponding
option,
option
then
press the
will appear.
After
press the < RETURN > key.
Detail of each data time

1)
Title printing
The data of the title is printed.
2)
Parameter
printing
The data of the system parameters

3)
Symbol printing
The symbol comment
i)
data is printed.
Option (symbol printing)

*
The output
specified
4)
is printed.
range
of symbol
comments
as the print end line number,
to be printed
printing
continues
is specified.
If 0
is
up to the last line.
Ladder diagram printing

A ladder diagram is printed.
i)
Option (ladder diagram printing)

*
The
output
unit,
net
range,
page
break,
and
cross-reference
of a ladder
diagram to be printed are specified.

*
If a diagram is output
as a list file, the unit of printout
must be specified
as a
module.
*
If 0
is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified,
continues
.
printing
up to the last net.
If a page break is specified,
a page break is made in the ladder
diagram
at
every new file or subprogram.

*
If a cross-reference
cross-reference.
5)
is specified,
the ladder
diagram
(Fig. 5.2 (c))
I0 module printing
The I/O module data is printed.
6)
Message
printing
The message data is printed.

i)
Option (message printing)

*
The range of messages
to be printed is specified.
l-88
is accompanied
with
5. OPERATION
Print format specification

Either
Japanese-language
(Japanese-language
input
mode
screen)
or code
format (code input mode screen) is selected.

7)
Cross-reference
list printing
A cross-reference
i)
list is printed.
Option (cross-reference
*
(Fig. 5.2 (d))
list printing)
When a cross-reference
and the output
specified,
duplicate
counter).
following
list is printed,
range of addresses
a message
is displayed
use of a function
instruction
The range of output
is specified.
for duplicate
is made for duplicate

If a duplicate
writing
that uses a number
addresses
Cross-Reference
write check
of a write
coil
is
and
(such as a timer and
can be specified
according
to the
List Address
Specification
I
Example of
mode
Address to be output
keying in
ALL
ALL
All addresses
Initial letter of an address
All addresses
Bit address
R1.O
Specified
bit addresses
Byte address
x10
Specified
byte addresses
(including
bit addresses)
Address range
writing,
table.
Table 5.2
a check
I F10.0.F12.7
I All addresses
X2.3.END
All addresses
having a specified
initial letter
only
in a specified
range
after a specified
address
(Note 1)
(Note
1) When an address specification
is made, addresses
F, G, R, A, C, K, D. T, variable
subsequent
8)
addresses
address,
P.
are output
in the sequence:
In this example,
therefore,
X. Y,
Y and all
are output.
List file printing

Data from a list file is printed.
Fig. 5.2(f)
Example of Printout of a Ladder

Diagram with Cross Reference
Fig. 52(g)
Data
l-89
Example of Printout with a

Multiple
coil Write Check Indication
5. OPERATION
Example of printout of step sequence
diagram
(1) Printout example by F2[SETUP]

c graphical
(print menu)
mode printout >
<ASCII
.
Initial step
Transition
Label
s210
PlOl
S211
P151
P152
t
0
S212
;* Sl
: Pl
..
+ PlOO
Initial step
Transition
c-L1
s210
: PlOl
Label
P150
-h
0
mode printout >
t
0
e
Divergence of selective
P160
sequence
+-Divergence of
simultaneous
I
S215 0
S217
sequence
P161
1 P165
+Convergence
of
P162
simultaneous
sequence
c+ P160
+ P150
Divergence
of selective
sequence
+Divergence of
.
simultaneous
S217
sequence
: P165
-Convergence
of
simultaneous
sequence
S211
: P151
S215
: P161
.
+ P152
+ P162
.
S212
: P153
S216
: P163
+ P154
+ 164
cConvergence
~
S216
P163
Step
P164
fConvergence
of selective
sequence
Block step
F; SlOOO
: P2000
Step
of selective
sequence
Block step
Jump
+ P102
Jump
(2) Printout example
by SUB-PROGRAM
->Ll
NUMBER
<Not print sub program number >
[NONES]
<Print
&IS1
sub program number >
4-
Sub program number
PlOO
c-L1
q s210
jG+G-j-
P160
P160
l-90
5. OPERATION
(5) Specification
of output forms
Specify the paper size and the type of printer forms.
[Operation ]
0
Select [SETUP]
The forms selection
on the output item selection
screen appears (Fig. 5.2(h)).
Current
<
P!P\PER
SIZE / LADDERPRIST
10 INCH/
* 10 PiCH/
15 INCH/
15 IKCH/
Fig. 5.2(h)
screen.
output form is indicated

>orc
@I After selecting
ASCII
GRAPHIC
ASCII
GRAPHIC
Forms Selection
with *.
Screen
To change the output format, move the cursor by
>andenter<RETURN>.
forms, select [END) to return to the output item selection
screen.
(6) Start of printing
[Operation]
Select [PRINT]
Printing
on the output item selection
is started: during printing,
screen.
the indication
PRINTING
IN PROGRESS
blinks on the
screen.
When
printing
printing
halfway
specification
(7)
ends,
the indication
through,
select
PRINTING
[BREAK]:
IN PROGRESS
the screen
screen.)
Termination
[Operation]
l-92
display
disappears.
returns
(To stop
to the input program
5. OPERATION
Select
[END]
on the input
program
specification
screen
or the output
item
selection
screen.
The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
(8) [LIST]
command
(F2 KEY)
It is the same function
as 53.1
The List of source program.
refer to above paragraph.
Note)
If the step sequence
function
a diagram according
to a specified
supported.
displayed
The [LIST] command

function
a ladder
subprograms.
subprograms
statement
(file with extension
a control statement
.#LS) is not
is not included
in the
is selected when setting a model
function
diagram
is
edited,
net
When a ladder diagram

in ascending
numbers
is printed,
order of subprogram
starting
sequential
from
numbers
1 are
assigned
are assigned
to
to all
numbers.
Cross Reference
A cross reference
can only include
third level, or by ladder subprograms.

step sequence
subprogram,
there is no reference
3)
control
for creating
for printing
Net Numbers
When
2)
when setting a model, the function
key menu and cannot be executed.
(9) The note if the step sequence

1)
is selected
referenced
If ladder subprogram
and if address
Diagram
diagram cannot be printed.
l-93
by the ladder,
first, second,
PO001 is referenced
PO001 is specified
information.
Printing the Step Sequence

The step sequence
information
or
only by a
to print the cross reference,
5. OPERATION
5.3 Compilation
During
compilation,
executable
an edited
by the PMC.
source
Uncompiled
program
programs
writer or FA writer) or RAM for the PMC.

be performed
in one of two modes:
$$g
Condensed
With
series,
PMC-CC,
PMC-NB,
format
file (object
to the ROM writers

PMC-NB.
compilation
file)
(PMC
can
mode.
Transferred
andPMC
a source
When a ladder with the same number
condensed
be transferred
With PMC-R series, PMC-QC,
normal mode and condensed
size of the created
cannot
into a ROM
to the ROM writers
mode
PMC-R
mode.
is translated
program
can be compiled
of steps is compiled
ROM format file is smaller than that created in
mode has the advantages
A larger C language
normal mode.
listed below.
area can be allocated.
Normal mode
Condensed
mode
Ladder
ROM format file
C
language
Time required
for compilation
Time required for transfer from the personal
is reduced.
A ROM module with a smaller capacity
computer
may be used.
l-94
in condensed
in condensed
to the PMC is reduced.
mode, the
As a result,
5. OPERATION
On the other hand, condensed
Memory
map changes
mode has the restrictions
(area expansion)
are likely
described
below.
to occur
when
instructions,
comments,
and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated
condensed
mode is transferred
to the PMC and edited with the built-in
this case, the user needs to pay attention
to possible
overlap
between
symbols,
by compilation
in
editing function.
In
the ladder area and
C language area.
ROM format file
1
language
A ROM format file generated

a ROM format file generated
by compilation
by compilation
Overlap (A C language program

map change is required.)
in condensed
mode cannot
in normal mode.
5.3.1 Operation
(1) Start
[Operation]
a
Select [COMPILJ (compile) from the main menu.
The compile screen appears (Fig. 5.3).
Compile
~~~J@.-p>y<y?$y@gQ
\.i\.\
SourceProgramname
\.._,.,\
A:YFLYiIATAYTEST
ROW formatfile name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST.tEl

Series
Edilion
&chine toolname
!
Programeno.
VC L PUC name
~---
Fig. 5.3 (a)
Compile Screen
l-95
be compared
with
5. OPERATION
Flow of Operation
General
for compiling
Main menu
!$yg
Make#LS
fie
Main menu
Fig. 5.3 (b)
Compiling
General Operation
and Screens
(2) Compiling
.- (a) Normal mode
When
PMCPAljPA3
condense
is used,
selecting
[EXEC]
causes
programs
to compiled
in the
mode.
[Operation]
@
Specify
a source
program
name and ROM format
name must conform to the MS-DOS
The ROM format
file
specifications.
Select (EXEC].
Note)
file name.
For PMC-PAlIPA3.
Compilation
is performed
compilation
When the compiler
terminates
abnormally,
(b) Condensed
Compilation
mode is done by [EXEC].
in the normal mode.
compiler
terminates
in condensed
normally,
memory
an error message
map information
is output.
When the
is output.
mode
in condensed
mode can only be performed
with PMC-R series!PMC-QCPMC-
NB.
[Operation]
0
Specify
a source
name must conform
Select [CONDNS]
Compilation
program
name
and ROM format
to the MS-DOS
is performed
speciftcations.
in condensed
l-96
mode.
file name.
The ROM format
file
5. OPERATION
When the compiler
terminates
compiler terminates
abnormally,
(3) Output of compiling
1)
map information
an error message
is output.
When the
is output.
are output to the screen displayed
text files, irrespective
occur, it is convenient
memory
result
The results of compilation

following
normally,
of whether
an error or warning
to print out pr check
function
[ERROR](F3 key) and to the

If many errors
the error fife with the text editor.
is selected
when setting a model, and if the following
source program is edited, the error and warning
Error file name
TEST.ERR(depending
Output directory
A: Y FLY DATA%
Compiler
by
has been issued.
messages
are output to the following
sample
file.
on the source program)
RCBGTEP
SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAWFCY
source program name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST

ROM
format file name : A:YFLYDATAfTEST.
#EX
Series
Edition
NC& PMCname
Machine tool name

Program no.
2)
In other case than 1) above, the error and warning
messages
are output
file.
Error file name
FLMNE.ERR(fixed
Output directory
in which the FAPT LADDER
name)
(4) Termination
[Operation]
Select [END).
C?9 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
l-97
system is stored
to the following
5. OPERATION
(5) Specification
of the input program name
(a) Specification
of the input program name
It is possible
to specify
the extension
(Please refer to 1.1.2 compilation

* #LS
* #CN
of its input
function
program
name as following
3 types.
about #LS.)
* No extension
Specify the file WITH its extension

It is possible
to select the file name with its extension
for the #LS-file
and the source
program file.
Example for the #LS-file.

TESTDATA.#LS
File name Example for the source program file.

TESTDATA.#CN
File name -
Specify the file WITHOUT
its extension
In case of there are some same file names (without

the source file, target file is selected
The order of priority for the target file specification

1
2
In case
its extension)
for the #LS-file
and
by system.
is shown below.
The #LS-file
The source program file
of inputting
the source
program
file,
please
select
the file
name
with
its
extension.
(b) Changing
the file name after using the making # LS file
In case of after using the making # LS file function

is changed
(6) [LIST]
the input program name
to the LS-file name with its extension.
Command
(F4 KEY)
It is possible to use following
functions
1) The list of source program

2)
with #LS-file,
by [LIST].
indications
Making .#ls-file
The .#ls-file
name which is made by [LIST]
function.
name.
Refer to next page about the details of above mentioned.
l-98
is set into the space for source program
5. OPERATION
Note) If the step sequence

function
specified
[LIST] command,
function
is selected
by the control statement,file
when
setting
a model,
with extension
used to create a control statement,
.#LS,
is not included
the link compile

is not used.
The
in the function
key
menu and cannot be executed.

(7) Indications of compilation result
c Specified source program name

+-Compilation
result PASS 1
-Source
program name
(MAIN.#LS)
MAIN.#LS
#####
PASS1
###I#
B:rb FLADDERY RC3ab MAIN

B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ I-STEP
B: Y FLADDERS' MODULE+ SUBPl
B:a( FLADDERY MODULEY SUBPZ
B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ END-STEP
tcompilation
result PASS 2
####t PASS2 #####
B:Y FLADDERY RC3Y MAIN
B:M FLADDERY RC3Y l-STEP
B: + FLADDERY MODULE+ SUBPl
Error
end 20
(00111 Net
) B: Y FLADDERY MODULEM SUBPZ
Error end 31
(00001 Net
)
B:Y FLADDERY RC3M END-STEP
compile completed error count=00002
warning count =OOOOO
PASS 1:
PASS 2:
5.3.2
Relative net
number in
each
program
Convert to object
Syntax check
Password set function

(PMGRAl/RA3/RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2)
This function
is supported
only in the FS16/18/21 -B.
It enables a password to be added during compilation.

The password
CRT:MDI.
password
can be used to prohibit
To discompile
ladder
a ladder program
programs
guarded
from being
with a password,
displayed
or edited
it is necessary
on the
to enter the
correctly.
(a) Password types

There are two password types.
Each password consists
of up to 8 alphanumeric
Type
characters.
Use
Password (R)
Password to allow display on the FSlG-B
Password (R/W)
Password
to allow display and editing on the FSlG-B
l-99
5. OPERATION
(b) How to specify use of a password

To use a password,
set as follows:
Open the initial set file (%%%FLSET.CNF),
FAPT
LADDER Initial
Text
Editor
using a commercially
Setting
available
editor.
File
:
;
:
lS:
editor
=;
rpl_dha
ladkey
=$;
1;
password=O;
0:No password
1:Password (R/W) and
2:Password (R/W)
3:Password (RI
:
:
j-1
:
(R)
*tJ;
Specify
whether
to use
a password
and
the type
of a password
(when
used)
after
password = .
Value
(cl
Password
No password
Both password
Password
type RW is used.
Password
type R is used.
type
is used.
types R and RW are used.
Password setting (compile)
When password = 0
Gotoo.
When password = 1. 2, or 3:
After
compilation
[EXEC]
or [CONDNS]
is selected,
you
will
be prompted
to specify
whether to use a password.
IDo
you
enter
password?
To set a password.
If it is unnecessary
press
(Y/N)
cl
If password = 1 or 3, go to 0.
If password = 2, go to @.
to set a password,
press
N
cl
l-100
Go to @.
5. OPERATION
The password
Enter
(R) set screen appears.
password
(R)
Enter a password.
.
A password that can be used is a combination
Uppercase
and lowercase
letter is entered, it is assumed

*
It is impossible
Some character
of 8 or less letters and.;or numerals.
letters are not distinguished
from each other.
(If a lowercase
to be uppercase.)
to use space, kana. kanji, and special characters
(such as l
, #, and @).
strings are unusable.
If one such character
string is entered
In such a case, use another character

*
An entered password
If the <RETURN>
an error message
is displayed.
string.
is not displayed
key is pressed
as a password,
on the screen.
before any valid password
-,
password is not specified.
is specified,
use of a
When <ESC>
is pressed, an attempt to specify a password

-+
The password configuration

Verification
screen appears.
(R)
You will be prompted
is discontinued.
GotoO.
to enter the same password
as entered
before,
to ensure that your
password was entered correctly.

*
When
the password
entered
this time
matches
one that was entered
before,
it is
accepted.
.
When they do not match, the message

You are allowed to retry entering
When <ESC>
Password
mismatch
twice.
is pressed, an attempt to specify a password
If password = 3 is specified.
The password
Enter
is displayed.
is discontinued.
Go tom.
Go to@.
(R#V) set screen appears.
password
Enter a password
(R/W)
(R/W).
A password that can be used is a combination
Uppercase
and lowercase
letters
letter is entered, it is assumed

.
It is impossible
Some character
of 8 or less letters
are not distinguished
from each
and!or numerals.
other.
(If a lowercase
to be uppercase.)
to use space. kana. kanji. and special characters
(such as *, #, and @).
strings are unusable.
If one such character
string is entered
In such a case, use another
character
1-
as a password,
string.
101
an error message
is displayed.
5. OPERATION
An entered password
If the <RETURN>
password
is not displayed
on the screen.
key is pressed
before any valid password
is not specified.
The password
confirmation
Verification
is rejected.
Go too.
screen appears.
(R/W)
You will be prompted

password
use of a
Go to@.
When c ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password

+
is specified,
to enter the same password
as entered
before, to ensure
that your
was entered correctly.
When
the password
entered
this time
When they do not match, the message
matches
one that was entered
before,
it is
accepted.
.You are allowed to retry entering

-
Password
mismatch
twice.
When -z ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password

-+
is displayed.
Compilation
(d) Password
is rejected.
Go to@.
begins.
entry (discompile)
To discompile
a password-protected
Set password
IBoth password
ROM format file, it is necessary
type
to enter a password.
I Password
types (R) and (R.W)
type to be entered
Password
type (R/w)
Password type (R/W)
Password
type (RMI)
Password type (R)
Password
type (R)
After discompilation
[EXEC]
is selected,
the following
entry screen appears
Note) If an RMI password has been set
-1
Enter password (R)
password
up, password
(R.W) is
displayed.
When the valid password

If the newly entered
is entered,
password
discompilation
is incorrect,
begins.
an error message
is displayed,
discontinues.
(You are allowed to retry entering
When <ESC>
twice.)
is pressed, the request to start discompilation
l-102
is rejected.
and processing
5. OPERATION
5.3.3
Changing
When a program is compiled.

single ROM file.
The
numbers.
programmer
the source program,
order
function
in which
subprograms
of the PMC-RB4
5.3.4
are arranged
are displayed
or PMC-RC4
been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled,
intosubprograms, is converted
subdivided
Within the ROM file, subprograms
in ascending
on the edit
may be changed
compiled,
to a
order of subprogram
screen
of the
built-in
after the source program
has
and downloaded.
It is possible to choose output data

(Symbol/Comment,
Net comment) to ROM format file
Compile
Sourceprogram name
ROM format file name
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX
Output to ROM
formatfile
SYMBOL
ii COkHENT
NETCOMENT
Compile
YES
PO1NTERSONLY
[F61
tF71
PMC-RB4
::::..::.
<O>[A:YFLYDATAFRB4;
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4
: A:fFLYDATAYRB4.
XEX
Sourceprogramname
ROM formatfile name
_..:.:..::.~
<O>[A:YFLYDATAfRB41
PMC-RB4
Compile normalend
~..:...:::::j:::...::~.
I::
:
compilecompleted error count = 000000 warningcount = 000000
EXEC
MAP
3 ERROR
Fig. 53.4
F, SYMBOL
7 NETCMT
(b) Compile end
l-103
8 CONDNS
DOS
10
END
5. OPERATION
(i)
F6 [SYMBOL]
Select whether output or not output the symbol 8 comment
HoweverJhe
symbols
which
and the coil comments
can not be displayed
assigned
data to ROM format file.
on CRTiMDl
(7bytes
or more symbols)
to them never output to ROM format file.
1) YES: (Default setting)

The symbols
comments
which can be displayed
assigned
on CRT/MDl(Gbytes
or less symbols)
and the coil
to them are output to ROM format file.
They can be displayed
on CRT/MDI.
2) "NO" :
No symbofcomment
is converted
Any symbol and comment
to ROM format file.
is not displayed
on CRTIMDI.
(ii) F7 [NETCMT]
If Net comment
is used in ladder program,
you can choose
whether
Net comment
pointer
(Note2) is output to ROM format file or not.
1)
POINTERS
ONLY
: (Default setting)
To edit the ladder program
by CNC built-in
editor
and decompile
the data by FAPT
LADDER, select this setting.

However,
ladder
size gets larger
because
Net comment
pointer
is output
to ROM
format file.
2) "NO" :
Any Net comment
pointer
is not output to ROM format file. In this case, ladder size in
the ROM format file is saved.

However,
Note
1)
decompile
the ROM format file makes its net comment
This item is in effect for Source-format

source-program,this
Note
2)
Net comment
programs.
data information
At the compilation
lost.
of FORMAT-B
setting is ignored.
has its own character
information
only in a source
program
on the
personal computer.
Compiled
Only
Net
ROM format file does not include

comment
pointer(
information
output to ROM format file as an functional

This Net comment
ROM
format
pointer
file that
any net comment
is edited
LADDER.
l-104
on CNC
of net comment
instruction
helps to restore
characters.
net comment
built-in
position.)
can be
NOP.
editor
date at decompiling
and
uploaded
the
to FAPT
5. OPERATION
5.3.5
(a)
The list of source program indications
The file (selected directory)
(4
appears.
Making the #LS-file
Please select the source program,

(Note)
It is impossible
and then the #LS-file
to resister
by source program of different
occur on print out/compilation
The sequence
is registered.
of making the #LS-file
PMC type.
Because
error
operation.
as following
flow chart.
Select the list of source program
Display the list of source program

(The target file indications)
Select one of source program

(Register to #LS-file)
(1) Start
(a) Select [LIST]
(< F2 > : Print out/< F4 > : Compilation)
(b) The list of source program
The target file indications
Indications
screen appears
Source program file indications.
Meaning
..
Parent-directory
DIR
Sub-directory
: xxx
PMC type
l-105
(Indicated
directory)
5. OPERATION
Selected file indications
Fig. 5.35
(1)
Selected target file is indicated
by absolute-pass.
The List of Source Program Screen
(2) Function key indications and selection
The list of source program functions
(a) [LIST1
correspond
to the function
keys as indicated
below.
EXEC
CHANGE
1 (W
EXTEND
DRIVE
SEARCH
END
1 (c)
(b) [CHANGE] 1
DELETE
INSERT
CHANGE
END
(c) [SEARCH) 5
TOP
BOTTOM
FILE
PCTYPE
END
1 (d)
(d) [PCTYPEJ 1
PREV
NEXT
END
l-106
5. OPERATION
(3) Making of #LS-file [EXEC]
The sequence
for registration
source program file to #LS-file
1.
Source file indications
2.
The cursor moves to the selection
3.
Push the <RETURN
4.
Changing
5.
Select [EXEC]
(The target file indications)
(changing
of the select file)
(Making of the #LS-file + End)
The #LS-file name is changed
1st registered
file
> key (Registration)
of selected file
Each data (System
is shown below.
to the 1st registered
file name .#LS.
parameter~TitleSymbol&comment:Message/lO
module)
is effective
file.
(4) The list of source program indications
(a) Changing
Changing
of directory
with drive [DRIVE]
of drive + directory
use [DRIVE]
It is possible to change directory

The following
software key.
in the same directory
by <cursor
> keys.
message appears after push the [DRIVE].
INPUT DRIVE NAME, PLEASE '
Example
Specification
of only drive
B:<RETURN>
Specification
(Changing
by absolute-path
+ drive
B:\DATA<RETURN>
(b) Changing
[EXTEND]
of file extension
to B:)
(Changing
to B:\DATA)
[EXTEND]
is used to change extension
(A part of 5_ mark on Fig. 53.1
It is possible to indicate file name except source program by changing

In case of there are some selected
Extension
files, it is impossible
can be changed
Fig. 5.3.5 (2)
extension.
to use this function.
by [EXTEND]
A Part of Target File Indications
l-107
(2).
in the
5. OPERATION
The following
message
appears after pushing
the [EXTEND].
INPUT EXCHANGE EXTEND(MAX 3 CHA.) '
Result from specification

File indications
(Without extension)
File name with specified
Searching
Following
(4
extension
for a fle in the source file list [SEARCH]
functions
to &arch
in the source file list are available.
1.
Searching
for the first file
[TOPI
2.
Searching
for the last file
[BOTTOM]
3.
Searching
by file name
[FILE]
4.
Searching by PMC model
Searching
[PCTYPE]
for the first file [TOP]
The cursor moves to the first file in the current directory.
lb)
Searching
for the last file [BOTTOM]
The cursor moves to the last file in the current directory.
Searching
by file name [FILE]
Type a filename
by [FILE].
When specified
file exists, the cursor moves to the specified
When specified
file does not exist, an error message
to continue
to search by pressing
To terminates
(4
followed
Searching
the search function,
file.
is displayed.
And then, it is possible
any key.
press < ESC > key or select [EXEC].
by PMC model (PCTYPE)
Type a PMC type, for example

When files with specified
RC3, followed
PMC type exist,
the file at th e cursor
possible
to select
following
operations
by [PCTYPE].
the cursor
position
backward
[NEXT]
forward for the next occurrence
When no file with specified

possible to continue
To terminates
by pressing
to the file.
<RETURN>
And then, it is
key.
And,
are also allowed.
[PREV] searches
searches
moves
for the previous
occurrence
of file with specified
of file with specified
PMC type exrsts, an error message
to search by pressing
the search function,
is displayed.
any key.
press < ESC z= key or select [ENDj.
l-108
PMC type.
PMC type.
And the, it is
5. OPERATION
(6)
Changing
Following
the selected
functions
file list [CHANGE]
to change the list of selected files are available.
1.
Deleting a file
[DELETE]
2.
Inserting
[INSERT]
This operation
a file
is also used to move the cursor between
the source
file list area and selected
file list area.
(a) Deleting
a file [DELETE]
A file at the cursor position
is deleted.
And, the files following
the deleted
file are shifted
one line upward on the display.
a file [INSERT]
(b] Inserting
A blank line is inserted
at the cursor position
and then the cursor moves to the source file
list area.
By selecting
a source
file in the source
file list area, the selected
file is inserted
blank line and the cursor moves to the inserted file name.
(c] Terminates
Function
(7) Terminating
the changing
of selected
to change the selected
In this case no .#LS file is created.
terminates.
DOS command
You can call MS-DOS

If you want to terminate
file list terminates.
[END ]/ < ESC >
The source program listing function
5.3.6
file list [END]/ < ESC >
A:bEXIT
shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing

this, key in the command
[DOS] key.
as bellow at MS-DOS
l-109
command
line.
at the
5. OPERATION
5.4 Decompilation
During decompilation,
a ROM format file is translated
into a source program
that can be edited or
printed out.
Data that is uploaded
from the PMC or is read from ROM is ROM format file data.
ROM format file cannot be edited or printed out.
Such data must be decompiled
Data in the
before it can be
edited or printed out.
(Note)
To discompile
password.
5.4.1
a password-protected
ROM
format
file,
(See Section 5.3.)
Operation
(1) Start
[Operation]
0
Select [DISCPL]
The decompile
(decompile)
from the main menu.
screen appears (Fig. 5.4).
2,1:
3)
4,
51
6~
7
8)
9)
COUtiTER
DATA TYPE
PMC.:OS SERIES
LADDER EXEC
(UNUSED,
(UNUSED)
(UNUSED
(UNUSED
SYNCHRONIZED
LEVEL
P&Z/OS EDITION
:
:
405: SerieS ( O:BINARI.l:BCD

100%
( 100 - 150%
( 0:NO.
)
1
1:YES
0:
Fig. 5.4
Discompile
Screen
(2) Decompiling
[Operation]
0
Specify a ROM format file name and source program name.
Select [EXEC] on the decompile
screen.
l-110
it is necessary
to enter
5. OPERATION
Decompilation
@ When
is performed
the decompiler
NORMALLY
is output.
and memory map information
terminates
normally,
the
When the decompiler
is output.
message
terminates
DECOMPILE
abnormally,
TERMINATED
an error message
is
output.
(3) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
(Note
1)
During
decompilation,
recompilation,
PASCAL
and
C language
the same operation.
condense
is lost.
After
editing
and
link PASCAL and C language data again.
(Note 2) A ROM format file generated by compilation

using
data
After editing,
moded, if necessary.
l-111
in
condensed
the source
mode can be decompiled
program
can be recompiled
in
5. OPERATION
5.4.2
Outputting
When the results

subprograms
to split files
of decompilation
and output to different
are output
files.
to a source
program,
they
are split into units
For details, see Section 9.1.
ROM program
Source program
LEVEL1 #LA
1
1
Ladder 1st level

LEVEL2.#LA
Ladder 2nd level

LEVELB.#LA
END3 (SUB 3)
SP (SUB 7
SPE (SUB 72) v
SP (SUB 71)
SPE (SUB 72) L
SP (SUB
1 *
PO02
I-
Ladder 3rd level
END (SUB 64) 1-1

1
The END instruction
is not included
in
the source program.

The instruction
is automatically
when the program is compiled.
1-112
added
of
5. OPERATION
54.3
Converting a step sequence program according to the model
Usually, mnemonics
are used to convert a ladder program according
However,
a ROM file is used only when a step sequence
converted
for the PMCRC4(STEP
to the model.
program for the PMCRB4(STEP
SEQ) is
SEQ.
[Procedure]
1)
Compile
the step sequence
program
for the PMCRB4(STEP
SEQ) and create
a ROM
program.
2)
Set model PMC-RCI(STEP
3)
Select F4 (DECOMPILE)
4)
Specify the ROM file created in step 1)above and decompile
The program is converted.

the PMC-RC4(STEP
5.4.4
SEQ) for FAPT LADDER.

from the main menu.
The step sequence
the program.
program read into FAPT LADDER
can be used for
SEQ.
Merge
In case the existent
file is specified
for output
source
program
when
decompiling,
source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents
In this case it is possible
program by specifying
Decompile
in source
function-key.
- When the used name is specified
for source program
PMC-RB4
<O>[A:YFL%DATAYRB4
ROM format file name
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX
Source program name
: A:yFLYDATAyRB4
OOutput
of ROM data.
to merge the Ladder in ROM data with the SymboVCommnet
the undermentioned
the existent
to Source program
SYMBOL/COMMENT
MERGE
[F4] YES
Duplicated symbol definition
[FS] SOURCE DATA(effective)
Specified
source program already exists.
Overwrite
7 (Y/N)
1-113
5. OPERATION
(1)
F4 [MERGE]
This specification
1)
NO
decides whether
to merge the symbol/comment
The
existent
source
program
is deleted
YES
and new
source
program
is created
with
the
of ROM data.
There is no display of F5[SYNBOL)
in this condition.
The symbolkommnet
in source program is merged with that in ROM data. As for the other
data except symbol/comment,
ROM data is effective.
Just
F5[SYMBOL]
after
definition
(2)
or YES.
: (Default setting)
contents
2)
by NO
this
specification,
is effective,
will
be displayed
to specify
which
symbol
either in source program or in ROM data, when they are in conflict.
F5 [SYMBOL]
F5[SYMBOL]
will be displayed
This specification
effective
1)
decides
SOURCE
ROM
which
symbol
is specified
definition
DATA
: (Default setting)
in source program is effective.
DATA
The symbol definition
in ROM data is effective.
l-114
for F4[SYMBOL].
in either
when they are in conflict.
The symbol definition
2)
when YES
source
program
or ROM data is
5. OPERATION
(3) The combination
of F4[MERGE]
and F5[DUPADR],
and its result.
ROM format file

- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte)
+-I-
COIL-COMMENT(30byte)
x0.0
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
R1.4
YYYYYY
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
Source program
- Symbol/Comment data
ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte)
x0.0
Y2.3
Y4.7
+a)
AAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBB
YYYYYY
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition = ROM data".

Source program
x0.0
xxxxxx
Y2.3
BBBBBBBB
Y4.7
YYYYYY
tc)
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
The result of "MERGE = NO"

Source program
x0.0
xxxxxx
R1.4
YYYYYY
tb)
COIL-COMMENT(30byte)
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition=source

Source program
x0.0
AAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBB
Y2.3
R1.4
YYYYYY
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
l-115
program".
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
5. OPERATION
5.5 Link
During linking, load modules
a ROM format
file.
created in the C language,
The C language
can be used only with
PASCAL can be used only with PMC-N.

similar language
PASCAL,
or other language
are linked with
PMCNIRCIRC3iRC4/QCINB.
Linking is not required when the C language,
and
PASCAL,
or
is not used.
Transferred
to the ROM writers
and PMC
(Note 1) The format of load modules

However,
varies
between
PMC-N
and PMCRC/RC3/RC4:QC/NB.
linking with FAPT LADDER is the same.
(Note 2) This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer.

this function,
a ROM format file holding
load modules
can be separately
In addition,
only ladder data, and C language
transferred
or PASCAL
to and linked on the PMC (dotted
line in
the figure below).
C prooram development
environment
for PMC-N
- Personal computer
- FAPT LADDER
C language
FANUC
distribution
library
1
source
1
1
ICM (compiler)
format
LMB (linker)
LMT (converter)
ttt
Link
1
C language
load module
+
ROM format file with
C language/PASCAL
load modules linked
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .
P-G
FAPT PASCAL
PASCAL load
. . . . . . . . . _ ROM
file
PMC-N
Debug
1-116
with
5. OPERATION
C oroqram development
-Personal
environment
for PMC-RC
(RC3!RCWQC!NB)
computer
Link control statement
creation tool
FAPT LADDER
J
C language
Link control source
source
J-Y
iC286 (compiler)
ROM format
file
FANUC distribution
1 -library
BND386 (binder)
+
BLD386 (binder)
0J386
$_
(converter)
+
Intel hexadecimal
load module
Link _
-
HEX2SREC
(Note) -
-:
L:
-:
ROM format file

with C language
load modules linked
II t
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. *
(Note)
FAPT LADDER does not allow Intel hexadecimal

operation,
i I
vv$
PMC_RC
On the
indicated
convert the file format by referring
PMCRCIRC3IRC4IQC/NB,
above cannot
be directly
program is provided on the following
RBiRC Module Floppy
QC Module Floppy
NB Module Floppy
load
linked.
modules
Perform
load modules
to the HEX2SREC
created
in the
to be linked.
Before link
Users Manual.
development
the below operation
languages
before linking.
floppy disk:
#JP)
Edition 3.1 or later
(A08B-9201 -J604 #EN)
(A08B-9200-J605#JP)
(A08B-9201 -J605-#EN)
(A08B-9200-J606#JP)
(A08B-9201 -J606-#EN)
(A08B-9200-J604
[Operation]
0
Execute
HEX2SREC.EXE
in response
A:\FLADDER\APPENDIX,
Conversion
to the MS-DOS
HEXZSREC
is performed.
1-117
prompt.
input-file-name
Specify as follows:
output-file-name
This
5. OPERATION
Check that specified
Specify
file names have been created using the DIR command.
an output file name (for example.
SAMPLE.%)
as the load module
file name for
linking.
(Note)
When
of an input
the extension
assumed.
changed
is directed
Output
file name
to a file with the same
The specification
to SR.
is omitted,
of the following
the
name
.HEX
is
but the extension
is
extension
files has the same effect
in
input/output:
HEXZSREC
SAMPLE.HEX
SAMPLE.SR
HEX2SREC
SAMPLE SAHPLE.SR
HEXZSREC
SAMPLE.HEX
HEXZSREC
SAMPLE
(1) Starting linking
(Operation]
@I Select [LINK] from the main menu.
The link screen appears (Fig. 5.5).
Load
module
ROM format
file
file
name
name
Edition
Series
A:YDATAYC-MODULE.
A:YDATAYSAMPLE.
Machine
tool
SR
#EK
name
Program
NC & PMC name
Fig. 5.5
no.
Link Screen
(2) Linking
[Operation]
@
Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link.
name must conform
specified
to MS-DOS
with its extension
specifications.
(--------.
l**).
name for HEX2SREC.
Select [EXEC].
1-118
The load module file
Here the load module file name should be

For PMC-RC,
specify
an output
program
5. OPERATION
Linking is executed.
(3) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
5.6 Input/Output
There are three types of input/output
as described
1)
ROM read/write
2)
Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.
3)
Input/output
operation
operations,
between
below.
by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).
PMC RAM and a memory
card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette
Adapter or Handy File, respectively.
On the PC-9801
device driver.
series PC, types 1) and 2) require
Install it according
to the description
RSDRV.SYS,
which
is an MS-DOS
standard
in Section 2.1.
[Operation]
0
Switch off the personal

cable.
(See Appendix
computer
and input/output
unit, and connect
them via an RS232C
1.)
Before starting FAPT LADDER,
Start FAPT LADDER.
Select [l/O] (input/output)
The input/output
make sure that RSDRVSYS
from the main menu.
menu appears.
1-119
has been installed.
5. OPERATION
Table 5.6
Input/output
Baud Rate Setting
destination
Baud rate setting (bps)

4800
ROM writers
(PMC WRITER,
FA WRITER)
FANUC Series 0 (PMC-L/M!M
(MMC))
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL
A/B/C/E (PMC-P)
FANUC Series 15 (PMC-N)
4800 (9600)
(Note 1)
4800 (9600)
(Note 2)
480019600
(Note 3)
FANUC Series 158 (PMC-NA)

FANUC Series 16/18!20 (PMC-R series)
4800/9600
FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB)

FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-QC)
FANUC Power Mate-MODEL
(Note 1) In input/output
possible
D (PMCPAl/PA3)
operations
with the FANUC Series 0. a transmission
only for downloading
necessary
on the PMC LOADING
screen.
at 9600 bps is
In this case, it is
to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal computer.
transmission
operations
with
the
at 9600 bps is possible
case, it is necessary
FANUC
Power
only for uploading
to make the settings
Mate
MODEL-A/B/C/D,
and comparison.
In this
of the CNC match those of the personal
computer.
operations
and 9600 bps are possible.
with the FANUC
Series
15, transmissions
In this case, it is necessary
at both 4800
to make the settings
CNC match those of the personal computer.
[Reference]
I!0 port setting
FAPT LADDER sets up ports according
1)
PC9801 version
FLIO
2)
IBM PC/AT version
FLIO-AT.DAT
-
These files are in text format.
to the values in the following
data files.
98.DAT
So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.
l-120
of the
5. OPERATION
1)
Contents
of the FLl0_98DAT
(effective
data section only)
DATA-BLOCK
2)
= IO-PORT-SET
Contents
of the FLIO_AT.DAT
(effective
data section only)
DATA-BLOCK
= IO-PORT-SET
FA-WRITER
= RO. 4800. B8, PN. S2, NONE
PM&WRITER
=COMl
: 48, N. 8.2
PMC-WRITER
= RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE
FA-WRITER
=COMl
: 48, N. 8. 2
PMC-L
= RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2. NONE
PMC-L
=COMl
: 48, N. 8. 2
PMC-M
=RO, 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE
PMC-M
=COM1:48.N,8.2
PMC-M
(TT)
= RO, 4800.88,
PN. S2, NONE
PMC-M
(-IT)
=COMl
: 48, N, 8.2
PMC-M
(AXIS)
= RO. 4800.88,
PN. S2. NONE
PMC-M
(AXIS)
=COMl
: 48, N, 8.2
=COMl
: 48. N, 8, 2
PMC-MMC
= RO, 4800, 88. PN. S2. NONE
PMC-MMC
= RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE
PMC-MMC
PMC-N
-RD. 9600,88,
PN, S2, NONE
PMC-P
PMC-OA
PMC-MMC
(AXIS)
(AXIS)
=COMI
: 48. N, 8,2
PMC-N
-COMl
: 96, N. 8.2
- RO, 4800, B8, PN, S2. NONE
PMC-P
=COMl
: 48, N, 8,2
- RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-QA
=COMl
: 96, N, 8.2
PMC-M
(I/O)
= RO. 4800, B8, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-M
(l/O)
=COMl
: 48, N, 8.2
PMC-M
(I/O, TT)
=RO, 4800,88.
PMC-M
(I/O, TT)
=COMl
: 48. N, 8,2
PMC-M
(l/O, AXIS)
PN. S2, NONE
= RO. 4800,88,
PN, S2, NONE
PMC-M
(I/O, AXIS)
=COtVll
: 48, N, 8,2
PMC-N (l/O)
= RO, 9600.88,
PN, S2, NONE
PMC-N
(l/O)
=COMl
: 96, N, 8.2
PMC-RB
= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RB
-COMl
: 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-RC
= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RC
=COMl
: 96, N, 8,2
PMC-RAl
= RO, 9600,68,
PMC-RAl
=COMl
: 96, N, 8.2
PMC-RAP
= RO, 9600, 88, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RA2
=COMl
: 96, N, 8,2
PMC-RBP
= RO, 9600, 88. PN. S2, NONE
PMC-RB2
=COMl
: 96, N, 8,2
PMC-RA3
= RO, 9600. 88, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RA3
=COMl
: 96. N, 8,2
PMC-RB3
= RO, 9600,88,
PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RB3
=COMl
: 96. N, 8.2
PMC-RC3
= RO. 9600,88,
PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RC3
-COMl
: 96. N, 8.2
PMC-PA1
= RO, 9600.88,
PN, S2. NONE
PMC-PA1
=COMl
: 96, N, 8.2
PMC-PA3
= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2. NONE
PMC-PA3
=COMl
: 96, N, 8, 2
PMC-OC
=RO. 9600, B8. PN. S2, NONE
PMC-QC
-COMl
: 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-NB
= RO. 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-NB
= COMl
: 96. N, 8,2
= RO, 9600,88,
PN. S2. NONE
PMC-RB4
=COMl
: 96, N, 8.2
= RO, 9600, 88, PN. S2. NONE
PMC-RC4
=COMl
: 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-RB4
PMC-RC4
PN, 52, NONE
PMC-RB4
(STEP-SEC))
= Ro, 9600, B8. PN, S2, NONE
PMC-RB4
(STEP-SEQ)
=COMl
: 96, N. 8, 2
PMC-RC4
(STEP-SEO)
= RO, 9600,88.
PMC-RC4
(STEP-SEQ)
=COMl
: 96, N, 8.2
Entity on the left-hand

Entity
on the
SPEED/MODE
PN, S2. NONE
side of each equal sign ( =) : Device
right-hand
command.
side
of each
equal
sign
Only the first parameter
rate) can be changed.
1 - 121
(=)
: Represented
(port number)
in the
and second
format
of each
parameter
(baud
5. OPERATION
5.6.1
ROM format
personal
data is written
computer
to ROM installed
for I/O operation,
PMC model, as indicated
in the PMC.
see Section
in Table 56.1.
For information
ROMs which
5.6.
on the setting
can be used depend
When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.
Table 5.6.1 ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model

PMC model
Usable ROM
PMC-L/M
256K-bit
PMC-N
ROM cassette A, B, C, D, and E
PMC-RAl
/RA2/RA3/RB
ROM, 2 each (note 1)
lM-bit
ROM
PMCRB2/RB3
lM-bit
ROM/ROM
PMC-RCIRC3
ROM module A, B, C, and D
PMC-QA
ROM cassette A, B
module B (note 2)
(1) Read
[Operation]
0
Select [WRT]
(writer) on the I/O menu screen.
Select [READ].
Enter the name of a ROM format file containing
@I Read operation
is executed.
When read operation
During operation,
terminates
normally,
read data.
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
(2) Write
[Operation]
0
Select [WRT]
Select [WRITE].
Enter the name of a ROM format file to be written.
Writing is executed.
When writing terminates
During operation,
normally,
the indication
the indication
l-122
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
of a
on the
5. OPERATION
(3) Verification
[Operation]
0
Select [WRT]
Select [VERIFY].
Enter the name of a ROM format file to be verified.
@ Verification
is executed.
When verification
During operation,
terminates
normally,
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
(4) Blank check
[Operation]
0
Select [WRT]
Select [BLANK]
(3
Enter the name of a ROM format file to check.
@I Blank checking
(writer) on the I10 menu screen.
(blank check).
is executed.
@ When blank checking
During operation,
terminates
normally,
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
(5) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
(Note
1)
Input/output
with ROM for PMC-UM
With PMC-UM,
a high ROM is paired with a low ROM.
from ROM with an FA writer on a PMC-L/M,

ROM and low ROM to be processed
be used to switch between
concurrently.
the processing
pair of ROMs.
1 - 123
When performing
I/O to and
FAPT LADDER allows a pair of a high

At this time, the < F2 > key can
of a single ROM or the processing
of a
5. OPERATION
2nd PAIR
1st PAIR
3rd PAIR
4th PAIR
7
High side
q 10clOClcl
0
Socket allocation
for concurrent
processing
Low side
PMC-L
0E2
OEl
PMC-M
OF2
OF1
of pairs of ROMs with the FA writer
Writinq
During concurrent
writing, data can be written to a maximum
of four pairs of ROMs.
Readina and verification
During concurrent
reading or verification,
only one pair of ROMs can be handled
When two or more pairs are set, the ROMs with the smallest
socket
number
at a time.
are read or
verified.
(Note 2) When writing

displayed
1Mbit
(Note 3) PMC-P, PA1IPA3,

cannot be installed
5.6.2
Transfer
for PMC-RB2
with
But writing terminates
NB, QC do not transfer

in PMC-P, PAlIPA3,
to and from PMC-L/M
Data can be transferrod

computer
ROM
on FA writer.
to and from PMC-L/M.
FA writer,
ID
ERROR
will
data to and from EPROM.
(EPROM
NB, QC.)
(FANUC
Series 0)
See Section
5.6 for the setting
of the personal
for I/O operz.:lon.
FAPT LADDER
)Switchable
Parameter
11Download
FSO
between 4800 bps and 9600 bps

No. 0060
PMC loading screen
IL
4800 bps (fixed)
(Note)
+I
I/O (P-G) screen

I
II
Upload
4800 bps (fixed)
(Note)
4800 bps (fixed)
(Note)
1
I
Ib
PO (P-G) screen
4
I
I
FSO baud rate settinq
(Note)
be
normally.
A ladder editing cassette
is required for this operation.
1-124
1
1
5. OPERATION
SYSTEM P-MODEL G
READ OR WRITE OR VERIFY
PHC LOADING
ADDRESS
DATA
EXECUTING
OOOOH
OOH
:
:
1 [CANCEL] [
i
Fig. 5.6.2 (a)
Fig. 5.6.2 (b)
PMC Load Screen
11
II
l/O (P-G) Screen
(1) FSO baud rate setting

This setting functions
only for download
operation
using the PMC load screen.
[Operation]
*O Press < DGNOSPARAM
> to display the parameter
*Q A baud rate can be set by specifying
bit 7
bit 6
bit 5
the parameter
bit 4
screen.
as follows:
bit 2
bit 3
bit 1
bit 0
PCLDB
0060
PCLDB 0 : 4800 bps
1 : 9600 bps
*a
After a parameter
change, turn the power off then on again.
(2) Download
(a) Download (using the PMC load screen)

[Operation]
0
Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.
Select (DNLOAD]
Enter a ROM format file name.
(download)
on the PMC menu screen.
*@ Press c 1> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.

(Select (1) LOAD FROM I/O. The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(a) appears.)
Position the cursor on LOAD for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press
the <RETURN>
Downloading
key.
is executed.
When downloading
During operation,
terminates
normally,
the indication
the indication
1-125
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
5. OPERATION
(b) Download
(operation
using
the l/O (P-G) screen)
[Operation]
@Select
[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [DNLOADJ
(download)
*@ Press < 5 > on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.
(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)
*@ Press the CNC soft keys
[l/O]
and [P-G]
in this order.
(The screen
shown
in Fig.
5.6.2(b) appears.)
451 Position
the cursor on EDIT for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press
the <RETURN>
Download
key.
operation
is executed.
During
operation,
the
indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
@I When downloading
(Note)
terminates
During downloading
normally,
to PMC-L/M,
the indication
NORMAL
symbol and comment
END is output.
data is not transferred.
(3) Upload
[Operation]
0
Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [UPLOAD]
*a
Press <5>
on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [VO] and [P-G] in this order.
(The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)
appears.)
Uploading
When uploading
is executed.
During operation,
terminates
normally,
the indication
the indication
l-126
EXECUTING
NORMAL
blinks.
END is output.
5. OPERATION
(4) Comparison
[Operation ]
@
Select [COMPAR]
43 Press <5>
(comparison)
on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [I/O] and [P-G] in this order.
(The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)
appears.)
Comparison
When comparison
is executed.
During operation,
terminates
normally,
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
blinks.
END is output.
(5) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
C3 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
(Note)
In the operations
above, an asterisk prefixed
on the CNC.
l-127
to a circled number represents
an operation
5. OPERATION
5.6.3
Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E)
Data can be transferred

computer
to and from PMC-P.
5.6 for the setting
To transfer data to and from PMC-P, some parameters
for 10 operation.
on the Power Mate.
See Section
Set the parameters
according
. Power
4800 bps (fixed)
Download
//
Upload
Switchable
Parameter

Nos. &0226 or &0227
Switchable
Parameter

Nos. &0226 or &0227
11 Comparison
Mate-MODEL
A/B/C/E
PMC loading screen
need to be set
to Item (1) below.
- FAPT LADDER
of the personal
It
Diagnostic
screen
Diagnostic
screen
Power Mate-MODEL
(1) Power
A/B/C/E
Mate-MODEL
ABICE
baud rate setting
setting
PMC-P needs to be made ready for 110 operation.
The operation
below is required
on the Power
Mate.
[Operation ]
$0 Press < DGNOSPARAM
*a
Position the cursor on the I!0 parameter,

(Specify
0 or 1 in the I!0 parameter
*O Set the parameters
> to display the parameter
When I!0 parameter
bit 7
settinq
&0006
I-I-I-I-I-I-lOIll
&0009
&0014
&0226
BRATEO
>.
setting.)
= 0
bit 5
then press < 0 > < INPUT > or < 1 > <INPUT
as follows:
bit 6
screen.
bit 4
BRATEO
1 0:
bit 2
bit 3
4800 bps
1 1 : 9600 bps
1-128
bit 1
bit 0
I
I
5. OPERATION
When the I/O parameter
bit 7
settino
bit 6
= 1
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
II0006
a0010
&0014
8~0227
BRATEl
I
BRATEl
1 0:
4800 bps
1 1 : 9600 bps
(Note)
represents
The mark -
*@ After a parameter
a parameter
not associated
with this function.
change, turn the power off and then on again.
(2) Download
[Operation]
0
Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.
Select [DNLOAD]
(download)
*@ Turn on power to the CNC while holding down < 0 > and <X/AXIS
*@ The indication
PMC LOADING
Downloading
is executed.
(ADDRESS
@ When downloading
terminates
(Note)
During downloading
is output on the CRT screen of the CNC.
During operation,
address indication
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks, and the
=) counts up.
normally,
the indication
to PMC-P, symbol and comment
(3) Upload
[Operation]
Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.
Select [UPLOAD]
> at the same time.
l-129
NORMAL
END
is output.
data is not transferred.
5. OPERATION
@I The indication
*8
PLEASE
SET UP PMC
is output.
Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSIPARAM
> twice to display the diagnostic
screen.
*@3 Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press <WRITE>
(?I Uploading
is executed.
address indication
When uploading
During
(ADDRESS
terminates
CNC, the indication
operation,
WRITE
the indication
=) counts up.
normally,
while holding down
< * >.
EXECUTING
blinks,
On the CNC, the indication
WRITE
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
and the
blinks.
On the
disappears.
(4) Comparison
[Operation]
0
Select ]PMC) on the I/O menu screen.
Select [COMPARJ
@I The indication
(comparison)
PLEASE
SET UP PMC
is output.
*@ Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSPARAM
> twice to display the diagnostic
screen.
*Q Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press C WRITE>
Comparison
is executed.
address indication
@I When comparison
CNC, the indication
During
(ADDRESS
terminates
WRITE
operation,
the indication
=) counts up.
normally,
while holding down
< >-
EXECUTING
blinks,
On the CNC, the indication
WRITE
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
and the
blinks.
On the
disappears.
(5) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
(Note)
In the operations
on the CNC.
l-130
to a circled number
represents
an operation
5. OPERATION
Transfer to and from PMC-N/NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A,

-MODEL B)
5.6.4
to and from PMC-N.
computer
for I/O operation.
required.
See Item (1) below.
To transfer
See Section
5.6 for the setting
data to and from
PMC-N,
- FAPT LADDER -
II
Download
Title screen
b
Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps
fDATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)1
Upload
I/O screen
Ib
[DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)]
1 Comparison
is
FS15
[DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)]
of the personal
FS15 baud rate setting
j110[
FS15 baud rate settinq
(1) FS15 baud rate setting

FS15 baud rate setting
4800 bps.
is required.
On the FSl5,
The baud rate setting on the personal
on the FS15.
Operation
on the FS15 is described
data can be transferred

computer
at either 9600 bps or
needs to match the baud rate setting
below.
[Operation]
*@ Press the < CNCIPMC > key.
*8
Press the soft keys [PCPRM]
*@ The following
information
and [MODE]
in this order.
is output on the CRT screen of the CNC:
PMC MODE
PMC DATA INITXALIZE
DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)
DATA TRANSFER TO RAMBOARD
RAM ENABLE (PC DGN,EDIT)
DATA TRANSFER RATE (AUX)
*@ Press the values
of both
DATA
TRANSFER
OFF
ON
9600BPS
MANUAL
4800BPS
AUTO
OFF
ON
4800BPS
9600BPS
RATE
RATE (AUX) by moving the cursor and using soft keys.
1-
131
(OFF-LINE)
and DATA
TRANSFER
5. OPERATION
(2) Download
[Operation]
@
Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.
Select [DNLOAD]
(download)
*$! Press the <CNC/PMC>
key of the CNC.
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [EDIT] and [TITLE]
in this order.
61 Enter a ROM format file name.
Downloading
is executed.
When downloading
During operation,
terminates
normally,
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
(3) Upload
[Operation]
0
Select [UPLOAD]
@I Initialization
is started and the indication
61 The indication
PLEASE
INITIALIZE
SET UP PMC
*@ Press the <CNC!PMC>
*8
EXECUTE
is executed.
@I When uploading
EXECUTE
is output.
After a few seconds,
disappears.
the indication
is output.
key of the CNC.
Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS),
@I Uploading
INITIALIZE
During operation,
terminates
normally,
[OUTPUT],
[ALL], and [P-G] in this order.
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
(4) Comparison
IOperation]
0
Select [COMPAR]
(comparison)
1-132
END
blinks.
is output.
5. OPERATION
Initialization
The indication
PLEASE
is started and the indication
INITIALIZE
SET UP PMC
INITIALIZE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
disappears.
is output.
After a few seconds,
the indication
is output.
*!I3 Press the < CNCPMC > key of the CNC.
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS],
Comparison
iS executed.
@I When comparison
[OUTPUT],
During operation,
terminates
normally,
[ALL], and [P-G] in this order.
the indication EXECIJTING
the indication
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
(5) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
(Note 1) In the operations

operation
above,
an asterisk
prefixed
to a circled
represents
an
on the CNC.
(Note 2) For FS15, it is possible UPLOAD, COMPARISON

LANGUAGE
PMC program
without
PASCAL,
and [P-G]
in
data.
In this case, please change (3 of each function

*@I
number
Press the CNC soft keys [l/O],
[FDCAS],
this order.
1-133
as below.
[OUTPUT],
[LADDER],
5. OPERATION
5.6.5
Input/Output
Before
PMC-CA
and
for PMC-QA
the
ladder
(FANUC
program
SYSTEM
are transmitted,
F-MODEL
the
D Mate)
following
(1)
or
(2)
must
be
performed.
Whether
(1) or (2) is depended
on the model of FD Mate.
(1) Setting of FD Mate PMC communicative
utility FLEX OS version
(a) File configuration

The configuration
of files in the floppy disk is as follows:
ACILOAD.
DRIVERS
--c
C
BAT (Driver installation
FDM_SCD.
FDUTILS.
UTILS
batch file)
DRV
286 (Utility start file)
PGFD. 286
PGSV. 286
1
(b) Installing
FDSV. 286
the driver
The driver must be installed

operating
system
only once when power to the main unit is turned on.
starts, insert the floppy disk of external
into drive A in the following
example and enter the following
equipment
input/output
After the
software
commands.
FD Mate Main unit

6 : >A-rReturnJ
A
A:>
To change drives
A : >CD DRIVERS r Return J
To change directories
A : DRIVERS/>
To install the driver
Note 1)
The underlined
indicates
A : DRIVERS
portions
are not case sensitive.
Note 2)
indicate
soft key entry.
Incorporate
> ACILOAD
data entered
Other portions
The following
the RS-232-C
serial
(The system needs to be changed

the operating
system is started.)
The following
define statement
by the system.
In the above example,

B: DRIVERS
Key entries
are given in this format.
into memory
with
a logical
name
(ser:).
so that the serial drive is loaded with ser: when
must be entered from the keyboard
driver version after the driver is installed.

define -s fanuc_ser
from the keyboard.
are displayed
explanations
driver
r Return J
= ON
enter the following
> define -s fanuc ser = ON
1-134
from the keyboard:
according
to the
5. OPERATION
Starting the utility

The utility
must be started
whenever
data is input or output
between
the PMC and the
external equipment.
In the
following
example,
the
floppy
disk
containing
external
equipment
input/output
software is assumed to be inserted in drive B.

Procedure
for Starting the Utility

FD Mate Main unit
To change drives
A : >BA *r ReturnJ
B:>
To change directories
B : > CD UTILS I- Return J

B : UTILS/>
To start the utility
B : UTILS > FDUTILS r Return J
The screen display
==
changes to the main
____----___-______-_____________________----
screen.
1 : PMC-----HO/F0
(Main unit)
= Utility main = = =
2 : PMC-----Device
3 : HDIFD---Device
4 : spare
0 : Quit
Enter the desired menu number and press the RETURN

the following
key.
The numbers
correspond
to
processing.
1: Transmits
data between the PMC and the HDIFD.
2:
data between
the PMC and the external
equipment
(connected
through
data between
the HDiFD and the external equipment
(connected
through
Transmits
RS-232-C).
3:
Transmits
4:
This function
0:
Terminates
RS-232-C).
is not currently
used.
the utility.
Numbers other than the above are not accepted.

If an incorrect
number is entered,
delete the number with the BS or DEL key and enter the
desired number.
1 - 13s
5. OPERATION
(2) Setting the UNIX version of the F-D Mate PMC communication
utilities
(a) File configuration

The configuration
of utility files on the distribution
UTILS
FDUTILS
floppy disk is as shown below.
(utility startup file)
FDSV
PGFD
F
(b) Driver installation
PGSV
and utility startup
Operation
(1) Create an appropriate
directory
on the Main screen

r Return J
on the
mkdir
directorv-name
created in step (1)
cd directorv-name
doscD
A:IUTILS/FDUTILS
doscD
A:/UTILS/FDSV
doscp
AYUTILSPGFD
r Return J
dosco
AYUTILWPGSV
r Return J
(4) Make the copied files executable.
chmod
(5) Specify a path.
PATH = $PATH:.;export
FDUTILS
hard disk.
(2) Make the directory
r Return J
current.
(3) Copy the utility software on the floppy
disk (drive A) to the current directory.
(6) Start a utility.
(Note)
(Note)
The method of using the UNIX version

following
Filenames
must be in lowercase
2.
ACILOAD
is unnecessary.
1-136
r Return J
r Return
letters.
r Return J
*
PATH
r Return J
r Return J
differs from that of the Flex version
two points.
1.
+x
in the
5. OPERATION
(3) Preparing
transmission
in the main unit
Operation
in the main unit
Enter 2 to display the
===
main screen.
-----------------------------------------.------
Utility main = = =
1 : PMC -----HO/F0
2 : PMC-----Device
3 : HDIFD---Device
4 : spare
0 : Quit
-----------------------------------------------Select 3 : 2
Press any key other
Press any key, to execute child program
than the control key.
Press ESC key, if you stop it

Read/Write
The message on the
ver. 1.00 -
Vight is displayed.
Change to the PMC
Press the CTRL + ALT + HOME, or MODE
screen
key.
To stop this program,

terminated
PMC data utility
press the ESC key on the screen
and the following
in the main unit.
Then, the utility
is
message appears:
End of child program

Press RETURN
key, to go ahead
Pressing the RETURN
Note)
key returns to the main screen in (c).
If the CTRL + S key is pressed while the utility is running,

pressing
the CTRL+Q
key restarts
the program.
the program stops.
Pressing
any key other
(CTRL + Q) key while the program is stopped causes abnormal termination
l-137
However,
than the
(hang-up).
5. OPERATION
(4) Down load
Operation
Operation in the personal compu
in the F-D Mate main

unit:PMC
3 Start the utility. (See Subset.
3.4.1.)
in the main unit of
3 Select PMC - Device.
F-D Mate
Select 7 : 2
To put the
personal
computer in the
reception wait
status
@I Select [ PMCJ from the

input/output menu screen.
@ Select [DNLOAD]
(download)
from the PMC menu screen.

aEnter
the name of the ROM
format file.
a Initialization begins, and the
message INITIALIZE
EXECUT
appears.
D Press MODE key or press
To output
The screen display changes, and
sequence data
PMC SIDE SET I/O DISPLAY, At
CTRL + ALT + HOME key to
from the PMC
KEY IN FILE NAME. is displayed
display the PMC screen.

D Press the IO key to display the IO
screen.
3 Press the FDCAS key to display
the FDCAS screen.
D Press the OUTPUT
key to select
OUTPUT.
0, Press the LADDER
key to select
LADDER.
YpPress the P-G key to select P-G.
4t transmission
The EXECUTING
and the counter
turns on and off

is displayed
at tht
The displayed
value indicating
an
address is counted.
bottom of the screen.
If transmission
PMC displays
terminates
OUTPUT
normally,
the personal
COMPLETED.
1-138
computer
displays
NORMAL
END
and the
5. OPERATION
(5) Upload
Operation
Operation
in the P-G Mate
in the F-D Mate main

unit/PMC
3 Start the utility.
in the main unit of
3 Select PMC - Device.
(See (3))
Select ? : 2
F-D Mate
3 Press the MODE key or
To put PMC in
the reception
CTRL + ALT + HOME key to
wait
display the PMC screen.
status
9 Press the EDIT key to display the

EDIT screen.
9 Press the TITLE key to display the
TITLE screen.
@ Select [PMC] from the
To output
sequence
data
from the personal

computer
input/output
menu screen.
0 Select [UPLOAD]
(upload) from
the PMC menu screen.

@Enter
the name of the ROM
format file.
@Initialization
begins, and the
message INITIALIZE
EXECUTE
appears.
At transmission
The EXECUTING
turns on and off,
and the counter is displayed
at the
The displayed
value indicating
a size
s counted.
bottom of the screen.
If transmission
PMC displays
terminates
normally,
the personal
INPUT COMPLETED.
1-139
computer
displays
NORMAL
END
and the
5. OPERATION
5.6.6
Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB/QC
serially via RS-232-C.
In this case, personal
See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal computer
- FAPT LADDER
computer
for I/O operation.
-Power
1
9600 bps14800 bps
Download
II
Upload
9600 bps14800 bps
PMC (I/O) screen
Ik
9600 bps/4800 bps
PMC (I/O) screen
II-
Baud rate settina for FSl6/18/15B,
FS16/18/15B
Mate-D,
F-D Mate mini
w-1
II Comparison
port must be set.
Power Mate-D, and F-D Mate mini
(1) Download
[Operation]
0
Select [DNLOAD]
(download)
$8 Press the <SYSTEM
> key of the CNC.
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC],

0
Downloading
When downloading
is executed.
[l/O],
[HOST],
During operation,
terminates
normally,
and [EXEC]
the indication
the indication
in this order.
EXECUTING
NORMAL
END
blinks.
is output.
(2) Upload
If the PMCRCRC3,
programs
-CC,
can be used.
one of two data types

following
or -NB is used,
When uploading
(LADDER
language
or comparison
or ALL)
data (C language)
is executed
can be specified.
LADDER
meanings:
LADDER
Sequence
program only
ALL
Sequence
program and language
l-140
other
than
Ladder
from one of these PMCs,
data (C language)
and ALL
have
the
5. OPERATION
Specify either data type in step 8 of the operation
described
below:
[Operation]
0
Select [UPLOAD]
*a
Press the <SYSTEM>

key of the CNC.
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC],
(IO],
[HOST],
Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.
(?I Uploading
@
is executed.
When uploading
During operation,
terminates
normally,
and [EXEC] in this order.
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
blinks.
END is output.
(3) Comparison
[Operation]
0
Select [PMC] on the 110menu screen.
C!9 Select [COMPAR]

*a
(comparison)
Press the <SYSTEM
> key of the CNC.
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [PMC],
6)
Comparison
When comparison
is executed.
[I/O], [HOST],
During operation,
terminates
normally,
and [EXEC] in this order.
the indication
the indication
EXECUTING
NORMAL
blinks.
END is output.
(4) Termination
[Operation]
0
Select [END].
(21 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
(Note)
In the operations
on the CNC.
l-
141
to a circled
number represents
an operation
5. OPERATION
(5) CRT/MD1
and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D
The NC of the Power Mate-D has the CRT/MD1 screen

CRTlMDl
screen is used, the procedures
PMC-R Series ((1) to (4) above).

input/output
When
are different
the DPL/MDI
described
and the DPUMDI
for data input/output
When the DPUMDI
screen.
When the
are the same as those with the
screen
is used, the procedures
for data
from those with the PMC-R Series.
screen
is used,
perform
downloading,
uploading,
and comparison
as
below:
(a) Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPUMDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen.
03
Press the c READ>
Follow procedures
5.6.7
or c WRITE>
key on the DPUMDI
(1) to (4) described
screen.
above on the personal
computer.
Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card
A ROM format file compiled
in a personal
computer
and output to a memory card via a memory

PMC program on the memory
card in the memory
transferred
can be converted
card interface
installed
to a memory
in the personal
card format file,

computer.
card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting
card interface
By reversing
in the CNC.
the procedure,
programs
can be
from the CNC RAM to the memory card.
PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
5.6.7.1
[Operation]
Install a memory card interface
in the personal computer.
Compile a source program to create a ROM format file.
Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output)
Select [M-CARD]
(memory card) from the input/output
F4
KEY
Handy
F5
KEY
Memory
from it.
menu.
File
Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a)
card
InputiOutput
1-142
Menu
The
the memory
5. OPERATION
@ Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> memory card)).
Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b)
Memory Card Input/Output
Screen
Convert the file from ROM format to memory card format.

Specify the following
l
items for execution.
Name of the ROM format file

Specify the ROM format file to be converted.
Name of the memory card file

Specify the name of a memory
card file (accessible
CNC) to be created by conversion,
l/O i TO UC ::
WRITE
(PROCRAWR
ROM FORMAT
FILE
&BP
- > Memory
NAME
Card)
: A:YDATAAYSAMFLE.
Memory Card FILE NAME

: D:YSAMPLE.
(Specify
the MEMORY CARD drive)
Fig. 5.6.7.1 (c)
The following
operations
via a memory
llEX
XBF
InputlOutput
are performed
card interface
in the
and the drive where the memory card is inserted.
(to MC) Screen
on the CNC side.
l-143
5. OPERATION
The following
two methods
the memory card interface

0
Using the I/O function

Specify
M-CARD,
FUNCTION,
[EXECJ.
can be used to insert the memory

in the CNC and read programs
in step @ into
on the memory card.
of the PMC
READ,
and
the
desired
filename
and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen,
Sequence
card output
programs
or
file
number
respectively.
at
DEVICE,
7en press soft key
are read from the memory card file created in step 0.
PMC 110 screen
PMCI/O PROGRAM
MONIT STOP
CHANNEL
= 1
DEVICE
= M-CARD
~;~~J..~~~Ij-j~;~= READ
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO.
( #NAME )
q
I EXEC I [CANCEL]
[WRITE I[ READl[COMPARI
Using the BOOT SYSTEM

See Appendix
at power-on
time
5.
PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
5.6.7.2
PMC programs
the memory
are written
to a memory
card is inserted
card, using a memory
in a memory
card interface
programs on the memory card can be accessed
as ordinary
card interface
in the personal
MS-DOS
in the CNC.
computer,
the
When
PMC
files.
[Operation]
0
Specify
M-CARD,
FUNCTION,
key [EXEC].
WRITE,
LADDER,
Sequence
DATA
KIND, and the desired
filename
and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen,

programs
are output to the memory.
l-144
(omissible)
respectively,
at DEVICE,
then press soft
5. OPERATION
PMC I/O screen
'PMC I/O PROGRAM
MONIT STOP-
CHANNEL = 1
DEVICE
= M-CARD
;;i~iJJ#~;I;$&&= WRITE
DATA KIND = LADDER
FILE NO. =
( #NAME )
[.EXEC
1 [CANCEL1 [WRITE 1 E READ 1 [COMPARI
The following
operationsare performed on the personal computer side.
Select [M-CARD]
from the main menu.
Select [READ] (read (programmer
Convert
the PMC programs
output to a memory
to ROM format by specifying

l
C- memory card)).
the following
menu.
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1(a).)
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b).)
card in step @ from memory
items and running the utility.
Name of the memory card file

Specify
the name of the conversion
source
memory
card file written
to the memory
card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.
l
card format

Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data after conversion.
1.~3C FROM K
READ
(PROCRAMER
- > Memory
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Card)

: D:YSAMFLE.
(Specify
the MEMORY CARD drive)
R&l
FORMAT
FILE
NAME
Fig. 5.6.7.2 (a)
#RF
A:YDATAYSMPlE.
Input/Output
1 - 145
#EX
(from MC) Screen
5. OPERATION
Discompile
the ROM format file after conversion,
and the resultant
file will become
able to
be edited on the personal computer.
Memory card input/output function (PMC-RAl)

CNC (L/R) with loader control
5.6.7.3
This function
MODEL
writes a loader control
B with loader control.
sequence
program
The loader control
for the PMC of the
to, or reads it from, the FANUC Series 16-
sequence
program
can be edited by specifying
the model as PMC-RAl.
(1) Writing
(programmer
- > memory card)
To write an L/R sequence

(The operations
program to a memory card, use the F8 key (L/R).
other than input/output
as those for the conventional
with the memory
card (such as editing)
are the same
PMC-RAl.)
[Operation]
Select [INOUT]
(input!output)
Select [M-CARD]
Specify
from the main menu.
the names of the desired
card filename
is specified
ROM format
menu.
file and memory
card file.
(The memory
in the form of memory card drive + filename.)
Write to the memory card using the F8 key (L/R).
WRITE
fPROCRMfE%!
ROM FORMAT
FILE
- > Memory Card)

NAME
A:YDATAYSMfPLE.

: D:YSAMPLE.
(Specify
the MEWRY CARD drive)
Fig. 5.6.7.3
(2)
Reading (programmer
Input/Output
XBF
(to MC) Screen (model supporting
loader control)
< - memory card)
To read the loader control

procedure
XEX
sequence
as for the conventional
program from the memory
PMC-RAl.
1-146
card, use the same operating
5. OPERATION
56.8
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format)
If a ROM format file compiled
on a personal computer
to a 3.6 floppy disk (MS-DOS
format),
via a Handy File interface connected
is converted
the PMC program
to the CNC.
to Handy File format and output
can be read into the RAM of the CNC
This operation
can be reversed.
PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
5.6.8.1
[Operation]
Compile a source program, and create a ROM format file.
from the main menu.
Select
[FDCAS]
menu.
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)
Select [WRITE]
(FLOPPY
CASSETTE
(write (programmer
IKI iFDCASi
& Handy
-> FLOPPY CASSETTE
&B
File) from
ADAPTER
the input/output
& Handy File)).
\\\m-
Fl
KEY
WRITE
(PAOCRAhSA
-->
Handy
File)
F2
KEY
READ
(PROCRMMR
< -
Handy
File)
FlO
KEY
ESD
Fig. 5.6.8.1 (a)

Convert
ADAPTER
FDCAS Input/Output
the ROM format file to Handy
File format
Screen
by specifying
the following
items and
running the utility.

l

Specify the name of the ROM format file to be converted.
Name of the Handy File format file

Specify the name to be assigned
File) to be generated
to the Handy File format file (accessible
by conversion,
by the Handy
and the 3.5 disk drive to which the file is output;
5 floppy disk cannot be used.
l-147
5. OPERATION
'ARITE(PROCRAMER--> HandyFile:
FiM(FORMT FILE t&ME
A:YDATACSAAlNE.PEX
HandyFile FILE !iAME

: C:YSAllF'LE.:SF
:Specif!the floppydisk drive!
The following
Connect
operations
are performed
on the CNC side.
the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5 floppy disk generated
in step @ into
the Handy File.
PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
5.6.8.2
[Operation]
Connect
the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program
to a 3.5 floppy disk (MS-
DOS format).
The following
operations
Select
[FDCAS]
are performed
on the personal computer
side.
from the main unit.
(FLOPPY
CASSETTE
ADAPTER
& Handy
File) from
the input/output
ADAPTER
& Handy
menu.
Select
[READ]
(read (programmer
<-
FLOPPY
CASSETTE
File)).
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)
Convert the PMC program on a 3.5 floppy disk (Handy File format) generated
ROM format by specifying
l
the following
items and running
in step 0
the utility.
Name of the Handy File format file

Specify
the program
name output
in step 0,
and the 3.5 floppy disk drive where the
floppy disk is inserted.

l
to

Specify the filename to be assigned
to the ROM format data generated
1-148
by conversion.
5. OPERATION
I.!0
READ
; FROM FDC.AS
(PROCRAWR
<-
:::wc-Rc3
Handy
Handy File
FILE W.AME
(Specify
the floppy
disk
ROM FORUAT
FILE
Discompile
drive,
NAUE
Fig. 5.6.8.2 (a)
File
_\\ 1: ~ .,@ux%wm
.: ~_ \\\\,\...._
!
C:YSAWLE.
:SF
: A:YDATAYSAWLE.
Input/Output
PEX
(from FDCAS) Screen
the ROM format file after conversion,
and the resultant
file will become
able to
be edited on the personal computer.
5.6.9
FLOPPY CASSETTE
If a ROM format file compiled
ADAPTER + 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)
on a personal
computer
to a 3.6 floppy disk (P-G format), the PMC program

FLOPPY CASSETTE
ADAPTER
connected
is converted
to Handy File format and output
can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a
to the CNC.
This operation
can be reversed.
(Caution]
There are two types of adapters for access to 3.5 floppy disk drives.
Specification
Name
FLOPPY CASSETTE
ADAPTER
CASSETTE
ADAPTER3
This function
uses P-G
does not support

Similarly,
200
this function
<- > MS-DOS
floppy
Accessible
number
floppy disk type
Al 38-01 SO-BOO1
2HD
A13B-0131-8001
2DD
format
conversion
disks, so CASSETTE
ADAPTER
supported
3 cannot
cannot be used on the IBM PC/AT, because
MS-DOS format conversion.
1-149
by FLPGMS.
FLPGMS
be used with FLPGMS.
it does not support
P-G
<->
5. OPERATION
5.7 Mnemonic Editing
57.1
Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file
A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.
[Operation]
Select [MNEEDT]
(mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 5.7.1(a)).
1WiWW2SRCtXV3BAT&H
Fig. 5.7.1(a)
Select [MNECNV]
6 ,,V'. y,y:-< 8" ".;,,g"v ', ,O FJ@j-
"5"
Mnemonic Menu Screen
(conversion to mnemonic).
The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 57.1 (b)).
1) SOURCEPROCRAMNAFe:
2) HMINIC FILE NW
3'(;ONEJ; DATA KIND SELECTION
[ ; ; fW;M
PARAWTER
( 3 : SYmiOL& CU)IEah"T
4) MODE
: FUR P-G
l-150
5. OPERATION
Specify the following
items:
Source program name
Specify
the name of the source program to be converted.
be specified.
Mnemonic
Never specify an extension
can
for the name.
file name
Specify the name of the mnemonic

40 characters
file to which a source program is converted.
Up to
can be specified.
Data conversion
Up to eight characters
selection
All data files can be specified
Specify data files subject to conversion.
or specific
data
files can be selected.

Mode (setting item selection)
Specify
setting
Select
items.
items
from
the table
below,
using
the
< t
>
and
< + > keys.
FOR-
P-G
P-G output format data is converted.

Converts
the text of a Japanese-language
Japanese
Comment
anguage
Converts
:omment
(Note)
WLL - OPTION
message to code format (Note 2).
data, which may include kanji characters,

is converted.
message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).

Comment
Data
data, which may include kanji characters,
including
address
symbols
names treated as comments

Data
including
sections
and
is converted.
comments,
and function
instruction
is converted.
all instruction
sections,
operand
sections,
and
comment
is converted.
Converts
message
to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).

_ABELI
Data is converted
SUB-PROGRAM
(JMPB,
JMPC,
highlighted.
and the jump destination
CALL. SP, or another
The step number
agree with other setting.
(label) of a function
instruction)
of the converted
(The function
instruction
instruction
used in a sub-program
mnemonic
section
data does
is
not
used in the sub-
program does not agree with the other setting.)

Converts
message
to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).
(Note 1)
The item specifying
Japanese
language
comment
conversion
cannot
be selected
on an IBM PC/AT.
(Note 2, 3)
Format
displayed
on the code or Japanese-language
message editing.
Select (EXEC] upon completion
ci3 Source program is converted
of item specification.
to a mnemonic
file.
1 - 151
input
mode
screen
during
5. OPERATION
@I An error message is displayed

conversion
if <RETURN
screen appears when
> is pressed after conversion.
The mnemonic
-z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.
5.7.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic
text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted
program that can be edited with the personal computer
to a source
version of FAPT LADDER.
[Operation]
0
Select [MNEEDT]
The mnemonic
Select (SRCCNV]
(mnemonic
editing) from the main menu.
menu screen appears.
(conversion
to a source program).
@I The source program conversion
screen appears (Fig. 5.7.2).
: FoRP4
Fig. 5.7.2
61 Specify the following
l
Mnemonic
Specify
Source Program Conversion
Screen
items:
file name
the name of a mnemonic
file to be converted.
Up to 40 characters
can be
specified.
0
Source program name

Specify
the name of the source program
Up to eight characters
l
can be specified.
to which
a mnemonic
file is to be converted.
Never specify an extension
for the name.
Mode (setting item selection)

Specify setting items.
Select items from the table below using the < + > and < + >
keys.
(Note)
The item specifying
Japanese
language
comment
IBM PC/AT.
1-152
conversion
cannot
be selected
on an
5. OPERATION
Select [EXEC] upon completion
(?J Mnemonic
@
file is converted
An error message
to a source program.
is displayed
program conversion
of item specification.
if c RETURN > is pressed
screen appears when
after conversion.
The source
< SPACE > is pressed after conversion.
5.7.3 Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic
file created using a commercially
program, the mnemonic
(a) Identification
available text editor is to be converted
file must be in the following
to a source
format.
code
The mnemonic
file defines data with four different
identification
ID code
The unit-format
Description
O/o@A
Beginning
%@E
End of ALL-format
%@O to 5
Beginning
% only
End of unit-format
data mentioned
codes that each begin with %.
of ALL-format
data
data
of unit-format
data
data
above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.
PMC model
Unit-format
data
L
%@O
Parameter
~ %@l
Title
N!NAKIA
I series/PAl/PA3/QC/NB/NB:
TO@0
% @O
% @O
% @O
%@l
%@l
%@l
%@l
Symbol & comment
%@2
%@2
% @2
%@2
% @2
Ladder
O/o@3
/0@3
O/o@3
%@3
% @3
Message
%@4
% @4
l/O module
%@4
% @5
O/o@5
(b)
Linefeed code
Control
character
LF (OAH) is defined
as a linefeed
code.
Control
character
CR (ODH) is
ignored.
(c) Reserved symbols

0
r;J
This special character

l
A semicolon
comment.
for use in ladder data.
is used in the ladder data section

Characters
When a mnemonic
a comment
is reserved
that follow
file is converted
a semicolon
ladder data from a
are treated
as a comment.
back to a source program, a semicolon
that follows it are not generated.
1-153
to separate
and
5. OPERATION
r:j
This special character

l
A coton is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder
data.
is reserved for use in ladder and I/O module data.
Data that precedes
A colon
a colon is treated as a net number.
is also used in the I/O module
number
from
channel
number.
In case of PMCRB4!RB4(STEP
110 module
data.
data section
Data that precedes
to separate
a colon
SEQ NB2),
SEQ/RB5.!RBG)/RC4RC4(STEP
a channel
is treated
mnemonic
as a
file has
below format.
%@A
r
ID code (See 10.1)
%@2-c
R0200.0 UNIT 3 POWER
KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON II
$1 KEEP POWk?-ON
R0200.1 UNIT
$1 SPOWER$$
ACT
KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$
-
R0300.0
KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON
$1 KEEP POWER ON
PO008 OPEN
FRONT
$1 OPEN FRONT COVER
LO100
Description of symbol
and comment (See 10.3)
ON
Control character
(See 10.2)
INITIALIZE
INITIALIZE
$1
%
OF SEQUENCE
% @3
RD R1OO1.O
OR R120.3
AND R1000.2
WRT Y2000.4
(
Net comment
Description
comment
is written in here. Any characters
you enter by using personal
computer
is permitted.
3
RD R1OO1.O
of net
(See 10.4(l))
AND R1000.2
WRT Y23.4
Designation
(*SP 3
RD R1O1.O
of new page (for ladder diagram printing)
(See 10.4(2))
OR R123.4
AND R100.2
WRT Y200.4
%
y
I%
@E
Note) A mnemonic
file converted
with version
08.1 or earlier is able to be converted
to source
program with version 08.4 or later.

But a mnemonic
file converted
with version
source program with version 08.1 or earlier.
1-154
08.4 or later is not able to be converted
to
5. OPERATION
1)
ID code
The ID code for symbol and comment
Another
data has been changed
to %@2-C.
ID codes are not changed.
RB4RB4
(STEP)RC4;RC4
(STEP)
Data kind
Ver. 08.1 or earlier
Ver. 08.4 or later

System parameter
% @O
% @O
Title
%@l
%@l
Symbol/comment
%@2-c
% @2
Ladder
% @a
%@3
Message
% @4
% (94
l/O module
% @5
% @5
Note) For PMC-RB5!RBG/NB2
2)
Control character
The dollar
character
3)
is Ver 08.5 or later.
character
in the sentence
Symbol and comment
is used
as control
must be described
character
as $$
in the
mnemonic
in the mnemonic
file.
Every
dollar
file.
data
(1) Description of address and symbol

Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line.
Describe
the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe
with blank character

1 R0200.0
(2) Description
or horizontal
UNIT -- 3
The first string between
character
and coil comment

and coil comment
two single quotation
next string between two single quotation

1 $1 KEEP POWER ON
Blank character
after address data
as delimitter.
POWER
of relay comment
Describe the relay comment
tabulation
after address defined in (1).

marks after mark $1
is relay comment.
marks is coil comment.
KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON
or horizontal
tabulation
character
Mark of comment
1-155
data line (only $1)
And
5. OPERATION
When relay comment

single quotation
is not used, a part of relay comment
INITIALIZE
Note) Every single quotation
4)
by double
marks.
$1
described
must be described
as $
OF SEQUENCE
mark in the relay comment
+ *I in the mnemonic
and coil comment
string
must be
file.
Ladder data
(1) Description
of net comment
The net comment
(2) Designation
Designation
data is specified
by (* and 3 characters.
of new page (for ladder diagram printing)

of new page for ladder diagram printing
the mnemonic
must be described
file.
Characters
$P or $p
Means
I
Designation
of new page
(for ladder diagram printing)
1-156
as $P
or $p
in
5. OPERATION
5.7.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter
PMC-L
ce
4001
1. D address size
01
2. Whether an operators
501
3. Size of the area used for timers
(0 to 400 bytes)
301
4. Size of the area used for counters
(0 to 400 bytes)
101
5. 4-digit BCD display address
(0 to 400 bytes)
501
(0 to 400 bytes)
1
(0 to 400 bytes)
panel is used
(1: YES, 0: NO)
81
tEoB1
PMC-M!M
(l/O LINK)/PMC-M
(MMC)
se
0 1
3901
1. D address size
11
2001
3. Size of the area used for timers
(0 to 400 bytes)
401
4. Size of the area used for counters
(0 to 400 bytes)
201
(0 to 400 bytes)
(0 to 400 bytes)
101
1501

7. Ladder execution
time
(100 to 200%)
11
B. Ladder execution
period
(0: 16 ms, 1: 8 ms)
11
9. Division/non-division
(0 to 400 bytes)
panel is used
method
(1: YES, 0: NO)
(0: Division,
1: Non-division)
01
IEOBI
(Note)
The parameter
in Item 8 above (ladder execution
period) is not applicable
to PMC-M
(MMC).
PMC-P
ae
01
20481
1. D address size
%l
IEOBI
1-157
(0 to 2048 bytes)
5. OPERATION
%@ 0
PMC-N/N
(VO LINKRB4)
4040~
BINARY1
3
4
SOSPC-N1
8000001
581
0001
8100001
NOi
(4040: N, 4045: N (I!0 LINK))
Counter data type
(Binary or BCD)
PASCAL execution
(0 to 100%)
time
Setting not required
(PC-N (fixed))
PASCAL TCB start address
(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal))
PASCAL PMC screen processing
Ladder execution
time
Level-3 synchronization
[EOBI
(Note)
(Note)
YES: Synchronous)
(PMC edition (2-digit))
Set a value subtracting
"7.Ladder execution
(Example)
(0 to 99%)
(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal))
(NO: Asynchronous,
10. PMC edition
sl
time ratio
(000 to 050%)
PASCAL data start address
041
10
PMC Series
100 from an actual value for the
time.
When an actual value desired for the ladder execution

time is 125%, set 025 to that setting.
PMC-RAl
%@ 0
!RA2IPAl
/PA3PB4RB4
(STED)/RB5/RBG
BINARY1
2.
Counter data type
No1
3.
Whether an operators
PMC-
RAll
(Binary or BCD)
panel is used
(PMC-RAl/PMC-RA2PMC
14. PMC model
81
[EOBI
(Note)
(YES: Used, NO: Not used)
RB4iPMC-RB4
(STEP SEQ) PMC-
PAl/PMCPA3/PMCRB5/PMCRBG)
YES in Item 3 above (whether
When specifying
the KEY address,
LED address,
an operators
KEY image address,
follows:
3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl
1-158
panel is used), specify
and LED image address
as
5. OPERATION
se
PMCRB,RB2RA3RB3
0 1
BINARY1
2. Counter data type
(Binary or BCD)
NO1
PMC-RB1
4.
1001
7. Ladder execution
YES1
9.
panel is used
PMC model
(PMC-RB,
time
Division/non-division
PMCRB2
or PMC-RB)
(100% (fixed))
method
(NO: Division,
YES: Non-division)
01
[EOBI
(Note 1)
When
specify
YES
specifying
in Item 3 above
the KEY address,
LED address,
(whether
an operators
KEY image
address,
panel
is used),
and LED image
address as follows:
(Note 2)
The parameter
in Item 9 above
(division/non-division
method)
is not applicable
to
PMCRB2/RA3/RB3.
%e 0
2
PMCRCIRC3iRC4IRC4
(STEP)
1
Counter data type
BCDS.
3
4
ND1
PMC-RCl
000000
100s.
NOi
panel is
PMC model
used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
(PMCRCRC3
Start address of language
(fixed)/PMC-RC4)
program link control statement
(hexadecimal))
Ladder execution
time
Division/non-division
[EoBl
When
specify
specifying
the
YES
method (NO: Division,
in Item 3 above
KEY address,
(1 to 150%)
LED address,
(whether
YES: Non-division)
an operators
KEY image
address,
panel
3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO5.
Parameter
9 Divisioninon-division
method
1-159
is used),
and LED image
address as follows:
(Note 2)
data
(0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF
81
(Note 1)
(Binary or BCD)
Whether an operators
is not available for PMCRC3.
5. OPERATION
@I PMC-QC/NB:NB2
%@ 0 1
2. Counter data type
(Binary or BCD)
BCDJ
3
4
NOSPHC-QCl
4.
PMC model
000000
5.
Start address of language
6
7
panel is used
(PMC-QCPMC-NB!PMC-NB2)
program link control statement
501
1001
(hexadecimal))
81
6.
Percentage
of language
7. Ladder execution
fEoB1
(Note)
If YES is specified
addresses
program execution
time
(Always
100%)
in item 3 (whether
an operators
panel
time
(1% to 99%)
is used),
of KEY, LED, KEY image, and LED image as follows:
lb)
Title
%@
(common
to all models)
11
01
MACHINE
TOOL
BUILDER
02
MACHINE
TOOL
NAMES
03
CNC
04
PMC
PROGRAM
05
EDITION
NO.1
06
PROGRAM
DRAWING
07
DATE
08
PROGRAM
09
ROM
10
REMARKS1
NAMES
PMC
OF
NAME
NO.1
NO.1
PROGRAMING1
DESIGNED
WRITTEN
BYi
BY1
el
fEOB1
(c)
data
(0 or 200000 to PFFFFF
Symbols
and comments
(common
to all models)
1
x000.0
2PX.M
START BELT CONVEYER
x000.1
2PY.M
LIMIT SWITCH
%@ 2
%l
(EOBJ
l-160
ON1
specify
the
5. OPERATION
Symbols and comments
(at using the expanded
Symbol
%@2-c
symbol function)
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER
$1 'KEEP POWER ON'
'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'

Coil Comment
Relay comment
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT
$1 *$*P~wER$$'
*KEEP UNIT-~ $$PowER$' 0~'

IControl
R0300.0
$1
'KEEP POWER ON'
PO008
'KEEP INIT-
POWER ON'
OPEN-FRONT
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER'

INITIALIZE
LO100
'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'
$1 "
no Relay comment
%
[EOBI
(d)
Ladder
(common
FOR -- P
to all models)
%@ 31
RD
X0.41
OR
Y80.61
WRT
DSOO.ll
SUB
11
RD.
NOT
SUB
X3.01
401
21
81911
03001
SUB
21
81
[EOBI
1 - 161
code
5. OPERATION
FULL- OPTION
%@3 1
NOOOOl: SUB
N00002: RD
SUB
N00003: RD
SUB
N00004: RD
SUB
71
; SP
Pl
;(SUBPRl
) [SUB PROGRAM
x0.0
;(XADRSl
) [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl] 1
68
; JMPBl
LlOO
;(LABELl
) [LABEL Looooi] 1
x0.1
;(XADRS2
[JUMPB LABEL Looooi] J
73
; JMPCl
LlOO
;(LABELl
[LABEL Looooi] 1
x0.1
;(XADRSZ
[JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl]l
65
; CALL1
P2
;(SPlOOO
) [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.lOOO] 1
) [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.lOOO]J
66
; CALLU5.
P2
;(SPlOOO
69
; LBL 1
LlOO
;(LABEL~
YOOO07: SUB
72
; SPE
VOOOOB: SUB
71
P2
: -1
; (SPlOOO
RO.0
;(RADRSOO ) 1
DEC
DO
;(DADRS04 ) 1
WRT
21
DO.0
N00005: SUB
N00006: SUB
YOOO09: RD
DATA NO.011 1
1 [LABEL LOOOO~] 1
300010: SUB
72
300011: SUB
64
; END 1
) [SUB PROGRAM
SPE 1
I1
1-162
DATA NO.1000
11
5. OPERATION
FULL-OPTION
(at using the expanded
symbol function)
Symbol
%@3 1
NOOOOl: SUB
71
; SP
Pl
;(SUBPRl
;
N00002: RD
SUB
Relay comment
[_,
) "SUB PROG. N0.01"
[SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.011 1
L-Coil comment
x0.0
;(XADRSl
68
; JMPBJ
LlOO
;(LABELl
) "JUMPB LABEL Lool" l-_-1

no Comment
)l
; [LABEL ~ooool] 1A
N00003: RD
SUB
x0.1
;(XADRSZ
73
; JMPCJ
LlOO
;(LABELl
no Relay comment
) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"$

)l
; [LABEL ~00001 11
N00004: SUB
69
; LBL
LlOO
;(LABELl
1
)1
; [LABEL LOOOOlJ1
N00005: SUB
72
; SPE
N00006: SUB
71
-1
P2
; (SPlOOO
RO.0
;(RADRSOO ) 1
DEC
DO
;(DADRSOII ) 1
WRT
21
DO.0
N00007: RD
N00008: SUB
72
; SPE 1
N00009: SUB
64
; END 1
81
1-163
"SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l
5.
OPERATION
@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM
H3
;UBPRl
LABEL1
SP
>
;<Pl
[SUB
PROGRAM
DATA
RD
XADRSl :<Xo.o
LABEL1 :<LlOo
> [LABEL Looool] 1
RD
XADRSZ ;<Xo.l
> [JUMPB LABEL ~ooool] 1
JMPC
LABEL1 ;<Lloo
> [LABEL L00001] 1
RD
XADRSZ ;<Xo.l
> [JUMPB LABEL Looool] 1
CALL
SPlOOO :<P2
> [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.looo]1
CALLU
SPlOOO ;<P2
> [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.lOoo] 1
LBL
> [JIJMPBLABEL LOOOO1]1
;<LlOOO
> [LABEL Looooi] 1
;<P2
> [SUB PROGRAM
SP
RD
RADROO ;<RO.O
DEC
DADR04 ;<DO
DATA NO.lOoo] 1
1
1
'
21
DO.0
WRT
SPE
END 1
1
6)
1
LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM
%@3 1
SUBPRl
(at using the expanded symbol function)
SP
Address
SUBPRl :<Pl
Symbol
r
RD
XADRSl ;<XO.o
JMPB
LABEL1 ;<LlOO
Relay comment
>. "SUB PROG. N0.01"
; [SUB PROGRAM
LABEL1
DATA NO.011 1
Coil comment
> 'JUMPB LABEL LOOl"1
>l
[LABEL
Looooi] 1
RD
XADRS2 ;<XO.l
> "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"l
JMPC
LABEL1 ;<LlOO
> [LABEL Looool] 1
LBL
;<LlOOO
;
>1
[LABEL Looool] 1
SPE 1
SPlOOO
SP
;<P2
> "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l
RD
RADROO ;<RO.O
'
DEC
DADR04 ;<DO
'
WRT
DO.0
21
SPE
END 1
%
NO.011 1
JMPB
SPE
iPlOO0
71
1-164
5. OPERATION
(e) Message
re
4 1
A0
0.
(other than PMC-L, PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/M (MMC), PMC-P)
2100020
2101022
AOO.l
L
ATC
SIGNAL
NOT
SPINDLE
NOT
ON1
EDTOK
2100020
AO0.2
DOOR
CLOSE1
SPEED
KEY
SWITCR
%l
[EOBI
(f1 I/O module (other than PMC-UP)

%@ 5
x000
YO08
ID64Al
OD64Bl
81
L [EOBI
(Note)
The ID code depends on the model as follows:

.
0
%@4 : PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC)

%@5 : PMC-N/N (I/O LINK), PMC_RAl/RA2/RB/RB2/RC
1-165
ARRIVA
ONi
5. OPERATION
5.7.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

(a) PMC-M
1
%@0 1
%@ A
3901
11
11
11
el
ee 11
01
MACH
INE
TOOL
BUILDER
02
MACH
INE
TOOL
NAME1
09
ROM
WRITTEN
10
REMA
RKSl
NAMES
BYA
sl
%@ 2 1
x000.0
2PX.M
START BELT CONVEYER
x000.1
2PY.M
LIMIT SWITCH
%l
%@ 3 1
SUB
RD.
11
NOT
SUB
x3.01
401
21
81911
03005
SUB
21
SUB
481
%l
se 4 1
x000
ID64Al
YOO8
OD64Bl
%l
%@ E 1
[EOBI
1-166
ONS.
5. OPERATION
PMC-N
1
1
%@0 1
%@ A
sosol
BINARY1
NO1
10
041
%l
%@ 11
MACHINE
01
TOOL
BUILDER
02
MACHINE
TOOL
NAME1
09
ROM
10
REMARKS1
WRITTEN
NAME1
BY1
sl
%@ 21
x000.0
2PX.M
START BELT CONVEYER
x000.1
2PY.M
LIMIT SWITCH
sl
%@ 3
ON1
SUB
11
RD.
NOT
K3.01
401
SUB
21
81911
DO001
SUB
21
SUB
481
%l
%@ 4 1
AOO.0
2100020
ATC
AOO.l
2101022
SPINDLE
SIGNAL
NOT
DOOR
ON1
rl
%@ 51
x000
ID64Al
YOO8
OD64Bl
%l
%@ El
tEoB1
1-167
NOT
SPEED
CLOSE1
ARRIVA
5. OPERATION
(cl
PMC-FIB
1
se 0 1
%@ A
BCDJ.
NO1
1001
YES1
%l
%@11
01
MACHINE
TOOL
BUILDER
02
MACHINE
TOOL
NAME1
09
ROM
10
REMARKS1
WRITTEN
NAME1
BY' J
%l
%@2 1
x000.0
ZPX.M
START BELT CONVEYER
x000.1
ZPY.M
LIMIT SWITCH
sl
oe
0 N 1
SUB
11
RD.
NOT
K3.01
401
SUB
21
81911
D3001
SUB
21
SUB
481
sl
%@4 1
AOO.0
2100020
ATC
AOO.l
2101022
SPI
SIGNAL
NOT
DOOR
NDLE
ONS.
%l
%@ 5 1
x000
ID16
YOO8
OD32
%l
%@ E 1
[EOBI
cl
Al
l-168
N
SP
OT
EED
CLOSE1
ARRIVA
5. OPERATION
(d)
PMC-RB4
%@A
%@O1
2 BINARY&
3 NO1
4 PMC-RB4
1
%@l1
%
01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1

10 REMARKS1
% 1
ae2-c
RO200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1
'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1
$1 'KEEP POWER ON'
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1
'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'J.
$1 '$'P~wER$$'
RO300.0
'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'1

$1 'KEEP POWER ON'
OPEN-FRONT1
PO008
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1
INITIALIZE1
LO100
'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'&
$1 "
$1
$@3 1
RD RlOOl.03.
3R R120.3 1
9ND R1000.2 1
nlRTY2000.4 1
(*
Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters
1
which are input with personal computer can be used.
R)
RD R1OO1.O1
9ND R1000.2 1
dRT Y23.4 1
form feed position (in Ladder diagram)
(* SP l1
RD R1O1.O 1
OR R123.4 1
AND R100.21
WRT Y200.41
% 1
%@a
AOO.0
2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ

AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1
%
%@5
X000
1 0 1 IDlBC&
YO08 1 0 4 OD32Al
1
%@E1
%
1-169
Net comment
5. OPERATION
5.7.6
The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a

model
When using the step sequence

The mnemonic
1)
conversion
Programming
by Mnemonic
A step sequence
method, mnemonic
functions
program
create a step sequence
Source-to-Mnemonic
cannot
subprograms
step
3)
It is impossible
to
into FAPT LADDER
is executed
to mnemonics,
program
conversion,
Conversions
for a step sequence
step sequence
is subjected
source program,
subprograms
to source-to-mnemonic
being
only ladder
ignored.
conversion,
If a
then
to
the original source program will not be replicated.
Source Program Conversion
using Mnemonics
A program can be converted
by using mnemonics,
instructions.
conversion.
conversion
source
mnemonic-to-source
with mnemonic
program with a text editor, or to read the program
are converted
sequence
be created
and Mnemonic-to-Source
If source-to-mnemonic
cannot be coded.
notes:
instructions
by means of mnemonic-to-source
2)
instructions
need following
PMC-RB3
as shown below:
, *
PMCRC3
t
(STEP SEQ)
A program
for the PMC-FIB4
(STEP SEC), because
(STEP
SEC?) cannot
of the reason explained
if a ROM file is used, however.
(For details
decompiler.)
l-170
be converted
in Section
7.2.
for use with the PMCRC4
The program can be converted
of this conversion,
see the description
of the
5. OPERATION
5.7.7 User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT
can be executed
A users own batch file generated
by suspending
by editing the contents
the execution
of FAPT LADDER.
of the FLMNE.BAT
file with a standard
text editor can also be executed.
Examole 1
The execution
of FAPT LADDER
is suspended
VZ must be defined in the environment
and text editor VZ is activated.
(In this case,
variable PATH beforehand.)
[Operation ]
Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNEBAT
as follows:
vz
Select MNEEDT
The mnemonic
(mnemonic
menu screen appears.
Select ([BATCH]
The following
editing) from the main menu.
(user batch file execution).
message appears:
Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'.
Add parameter(s)?
Specify
[A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]
A (Add), and specify
with the extension
*.HEX
and a list of files
VZ.
to FAPT LADDER. Hit any key! I

The screen display returns to the mnemonic
Press any key.
VZ is activated
.HEX is displayed.
To restart FAPT LADDER. terminate
IReturn
as the parameter.
menu screen.
Example 2
The
execution
COMMAND.COM
of
FAPT
is activated
LADDER
is
suspended.
and MS-DOS
commands
follows:
COMMAND
1 - 171
Then,
the
are enabled.
command
Create
processor
FLMNE.BAT
as
II. APPLICATIONS
(NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)
1. COMMON OPERATIONS
1. COMMON OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PGAT
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT
1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC

This function
is used to transfer
data in ASCII (mnemonic)
Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232 cable.

FLOAD98,
and the command
Use this function

(data exchange
provided
to transfer
function)
format between
The command
a P-G (including
the
for NEC PC9801 series PCs is
for IBM PC/ATs is FLOADAT.
the sequence
cannot
program
between
be used with 3.5 floppy,
with a 5 floppy disk drive or in a system
the P-G and a personal
for example,
with a personal
computer
if
in a system with the P-G
computer
not provided
with a
3.5 floppy disk (1.2 Mbytes) drive.
Command input during startup
1.1.1
(1)
Uploading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic
data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.
FLOAD98 -
[name of file for storing uploaded data] -
-u (for PC9801)
FLOADAT
[name of file for storing uploaded data] -
-u (for IBM PC/AT)
When a file with the same name as the file specified

current directory,
File is exist.
(2)
the following
Over write?
for receiving
data already
exists
in the
message is displayed.
<Y/N >
Downloading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic
data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.
FLOAD98 -
[name of file for storing downloaded
data] -
-d (for PC9801)
FLOADAT
[name of file for storing downloaded
data] _
-d (for IBM PC/AT)
As shown above, the load commands
have the following
two parameters:
-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC.

-d: Downloads
(Note)
data from the PC to the P-G.
The above parameters
can be specified
with either lowercase
2-l
or uppercase
characters.
1. COMMON
1 .1.2
Communications
OPERATIONS
settings
PC side
NEC PC9801 Series
baud rate:
(MS-DOS
character
SPEED command)
4800 or 9600
length:
7 bits
parity:
even parity
stop bits:
2 bits
X parameter:
none
IBM PC/AT Series
MODE COMI:
4800,E,7,2
(PC DOS MODE command)
MODE COMl:
9600,E,7,2
(for 9600 baud)
P-G side
IO NC,CNl,Fl
,F6
10 NC,CNl,Fl,F6,BRlO
(for 9600 baud)
(Note 1) The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600.

baud rate is set to 9600, the parameter
However,
note that when
the PC
BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting
for the P-G.
(Note 2) It is necessary to set these communications

using
this function,
(Chapter
to CN4.
the communications
settings
as the section
2.1
For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from
For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl
note that the CN number

cables specified
restore
After
1).
The CN number is not fixed.

CNl
please
setting only for doing this operation.
selected
in Appendix
to CN3.
here must match the CN number of the IO command.
1.
2-2
However,
Use the
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
Operation examde
During
uploading
Operation
Example of input and screen contents
procedure
c PC > < PG > Turn on power.

< PG > Enter IO command
; IONC,CNl
settings.
c PC > PC9801 Series: Enter SPEED command

settings.
IBM PC/AT Series:
< PC > Execute
(See Section 2 of Communications
Settings)
Enter MODE
command
< PG > Store transmission
,Fl ,FG(,BRlO)
settings.
data in P-G memory.
Press the [F2] key to select menu item
no.2.
FLOAD98.
Enters waiting state.
FLOAD98
FILE NAME -u
Execute FLOADAT.
FLOADAT
FILENAME
i < PC >
< PG > Set [F6] ON.
Select no.4 on the menu.
LOADER
-u
START
is displayed.
c PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the

submenu.
i c PG >
3egins transmission.
EXECUTING
is displayed.
Completes transmission.
i =zPC > Operation
e PG > Returns to the menu.

( PC > The message Operation
displayed,
followed
ANY KEY.
During
Complete
is
by the prompt HIT
Complete
is displayed.
HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
i
;
Hit any key to end operation.
downloading
Operation
Example of input and screen contents
procedure
< PC > < PG > Turn on power.

< PG > Enter IO command
settings.
< PC > Enter SPEED command
< PG > Turn on [Fl]

menu.
key.
settings.
IO NC,CNl,(BRlO,)Fl,FG
(See Section 2 of Communications
Settings)
! =zPG > EXECUTING
Select no.2 on the
is displayed.
< PC > Execute FLOAD98.

Execute
FLOADAT.
FLOAD98
FILE NAME -d
FLOADAT
FILENAME
i <PC>
Begins transmission.
Output
-d
Start is displayed.
Completes transmission.
<PG>
Returns to the menu.
< PC > The message

displayed,
ANY KEY.
Operation
followed
Complete
is
by the prompt HIT
: < PC > Operation

i
Hit any key to end operation.
2-3
Complete
is displayed.
HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
1. COMMON
1 .1.3
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PGAT
Protocol
Durinq uploadinq
When the FLOAD98
or FLOADAT
command
request is issued for the P-G and reception

sent and transmission
is executed
begins.
After all data has been received,
DC 3 is
is completed.
DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmission
Data is received.
Completion
DC 3 code is sent.
Transmission
on the PC side, a communications
code is received
and reception
and reception
both use the l-byte
request).
is completed.
machine-dependent
BIOS call for input and
output.
Durina downloadinq
After the P-G issues
FLOADAT
a transmission
is activated
the P-G enters
in the PC, then transmission
is sent and transmission
begins.
the waiting
state.
FLOAD98
or
After all data has been sent. DC 4
is completed.
The P-G issues DC 1.
DC 2 code is sent to the P-G.
Data is sent.
DC 4 code is sent.
Transmission
request,
and reception
both use the l-byte
machine-dependent
BIOS call for input and
output.
1.1.4
BUSY control
When the transmission

issuing
speed is faster than reception
the DC 1 and DC 3 codes.
command
is set to off, which
In the PC9801
allows the application
IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter,
processing,
series,
2-4
the X parameter
to provide
which effectively
BUSY control
support
is performed
by
in the DOS SPEED
for BUSY control.
has the same result.
In the
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.1.5 Data start and end codes

The system will automatically
is used.
When
determine
none of these
codes
which of the following

are used,
an error
seven pairs of start and end codes

message
is displayed
and operation
terminates.
(Note)
The end codes
shown here must appear at

the beginning
of a line.
In
other words, strictly speaking,

a data reception
end code is
actually denoted by the

sequence
code.
CR + LF + an end
End codes (% etc.)
appearing
within comments
are ignored.
1.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received,
(ODH) followed
it is converted
into two characters,
the first of which is CR
by LF (OAH).
(2) When a CR code (ODH) is received,
it is discarded.
(3) When an end code (DE) is received,
CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended
to it in that order.
1.1.7 Transmission and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received,
data is discarded.
1 1
1 1
. . ..-Discarded
Valid data I...
After the end code (DE) has been sent or received,

downloading,
then the file is closed.
2-s
DC 3 is sent for uploading
or DC 4 is sent for
1. COMMON
1 .1.8
Error detection
and messages
four types of errors.
This software detects the following
(1) When
OPERATIONS
there is an error in the command
line
Error in the file name, -u. or -d.

Parameter
FLOAD98
(2) When
Error
FILENAME
the specified
-u/-d set parameter.
(FILNAME,
upload or download.)
file cannot be found
Output file cannot be found or file for receiving
cannot be opened.
I~- ~~~
Cannot open output file
(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received
Wrong data received
(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code,

Start Code error detected
or there is a definite
IEnd code
oroblem with the end code
error detected
This software only detects errors in the command

This software does not support detection
line and in the FAPT LADDER format.
of errors in the contents
of FAPT LADDER data.
Messaaes
When the file name specified

the following
as the file for receiving
message is displayed.
File is exist.
Over write?
<Y/N >
2-6
data already
exists
in the current
directory,
1. COMMON
1.1.9
Error detection
OPERATIONS
and handling
1.
Incorrect entry found in the command line.
2.
Specified file cannot be opened.
3.
Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.

The following
causes can be considered
for the above errors:
The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted).
The start code has been omitted (%@, where
Garbage data exists at the beginning
Garbage data exists between each unit of data.

The file format is completely
During
screen.
downloading,
if an error
is A or 0 to 5. was omitted).
of the file.
different
When any of the above errors is detected,
from the FAPT LADDER format.
the current operation
is detected
is canceled.
on the PC, the system
will return
to the DOS
At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return it to the
menu screen.
4. Others
When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted

(When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted
When data transfer
is interrupted
data transfer is restarted.

When
data transfer
during
(To interrupt
is interrupted
uploading,
during operation,
the system
will enter a waiting
the waiting state, press cCTRl_>
during
downloading,
transfer must be started over from the beginning.
2-7
etc.)
state until
+ <C >).
the data becomes
corrupt
and data
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT
1.2 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

By changing
the mnemonic
file, it is possible
to convert
some PMC type sequence
program
to
another type of it.
1.2.1 Converting by system parameter editing

PMC type, it is possible
On the following
of the mnemonic
parameter
However,
to edit the different
PMC type data by changing
system
data.
format of the system parameter,
usable functional
instructions
and range of address
are
different.
1~
CNC TYPE
PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RB!YRB6~RC/RC3/RC4
FS16f 18-T/M
Power Mate-MODEL
[Example:
(1)
(2)
PMC-RB
PMC TYPE
PMC-PA1 /PA3
+ PMC-RC3]
Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert

Change the system parameter
(3) Set the

file(+(2))
PMC
type
the original source program to mnemonic
of the mnemonic
to PMC-RC3
on
FAPT
fife to PMCRC3
LADDER
system
file.
with a standard text editor.

and
convert
the
mnemonic
to source program.
Original
file (PMC-RB)
Converted
%@A
%@A
%@O
%@O
2 BCD
2 ECD
Change
system parameter
3 NO
3 NO
b
4 PMC-RB
file (PMCRC3
4 PMC-RC3
7 100
5 000000
9 YES
6 50
7 100
%@l
01 ABC-KIKAI
%
%@l
01 ABC-KIKAI
02 S-DRILL
02 S-DRILL
%
%
%@5
X000 1
1 ID16C
YO08 1
4 OD32A
$65
X000 1
1 IDl6C
YO08 1
4 OD32A
%@E
8
%@E
2-8
1. COMMON
1.2.2
Convert with signal address
CONVERTER
FILE NAME
FS()T
OPERATIONS
APPLICABLE
CNV.SYM
converter
PMCCNC
-+ PMC-RAl
PMC-uM/M(MMC)
(FSO-T)
TYPE
REFERENCE
iRA2IRA3IRB
/RB2RB3RB4RB5
RBG/RC/RC3/RC4
(FS16/18-T)
MATERIALS
FANUC PMC
PROGRAMMING
(LADDER
MANUAL
LANGUAGE)
B-61 863E
FSOM
CNV.SYM
PMC-UM/M(MMC)
+ PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB
/RB2/RB3!RB4/RB5/
(FSO-M)
RBG/RC/RCB/RC4
(FS16/18-M)
PM-C_CNV.SYM
PMC-P
(Power Mate
PAllPA
(Power Mate
-MODEL C)
(Note)
[Example:
(1)
(2)
The converter
-MODEL
file is stored in the directory
D)
APPENDIX
of module floppy disk.
PMC-P + PMC-PA11
Set PMC type to PMC-P, and

Set PMC type to PMC-PAl.
convert the original source program to the mnemonic

And input the source
program
name and select
file. (+A.)
[END]
at edit
mode without editing the ladder program.

(3) Convert the source program(2)
to the mnemonic
file. (+B.)
(4) Quit FAPT LADDER, and activate any standard text editor.
(Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.)
(5) Replace the symbol and comment
(PM-C.CNV).
data of the mnemonic
to the converter
file
(+C.)
(6) Replace the ladder data of mnemonic

mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.)
(7) Complete
file (PMC-PAl)
file
(PMC-PAl)
to the
ladder
data
the text editor, and activate FAPT LADDER.
(8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl,
and convert the mnemonic
(3) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment
2-9
file@) to source program.

data.
of the
original
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
Convert file
PM-C - CNV.SYM
%@2
A. Original file
(PMC-P)
60004.3 G68.3
60005.0 695.0
%@A
60005.2 695.2
%@O
1 2048
60005.3 G95.3
60005.6 G83.7
G0006.2 675.2
be1
B
60006.4 674.4
b@2
B. Converted file
(PMC-PAl)
%@A
60007.2 G68.2
%@O
G0007.5 684.5
2 BINARY
3 NO
b@3
4 PMC-PA1
?D X21.4
X1027.4 X23.4
iRT G121.4
X1027.5 X23.5
eel
tD.NOT X22.3
X1027.6 X23.6
fRT.NOT 6122.3
X1027.7 X23.7
:UB 1
IUB 2
se2
c
I$-
D. insertion ,-
b
ae3
fRT 6121.4
!D.NOT X22.3
se4
b
rRT.NOT 6122.3
se5
b
UB 1
UB 2
b@E
@E
2-10
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT
1.2.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program

Data (such as title, symbol
& comment,
ladder,
program can be used for another sequence
The range of addresses

Refer to the programming
[Example
message,
program, by the following
used varies from one model to another.

manual of the respective
: Using the symbols
& comment
data) in a sequence
method.
They may have to be modified.
models.
data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]
%@A
%@A
%@O
%@O
2 BCD
2 BCD
3 NO
4 PMC-RB
7 100
9 YES
%
eel
%@2
x000.0
and I/O module
3 NO
4 PMC-RC3
5 000000
6 50
7 100
9 YES
%
%@l
2PX.M
x000.1 2PY.M
X000.0 ZPX.M
X000.1 ZPY.M
1.3 Standard Symbol Data

When
a mnemonic
file and the standard
standard symbol name provided
symbol
by FANUC.
DATA FILE NAME
CNC TYPE
(Note)
data are combined,
FS16/18-T
F16&F18-T.SYM
FS16/18-M
FlG&F18-M.SYM
Power Mate-MODEL
PM-D.SYM
Power Mate-MODEL
PM-H.SYM
The standard symbol data is stored in the directory
2-11
APPENDIX.
it is possible
to use the
1. COMMON
1.4 Changing
Each parameter
OPERATIONS

file of this software
can be rewritten
that the output format shown in each of the following

-AMROFTRP.
1 Diagram output %
1.
2.
3.
4.
using a commercially
DAT
-PR201-10
. INF PR201-15 . INF
PR201-A4 . INF
PRlO-A
. INF
PRlS-A
. INF
PRA4-A
. INF
ESC-P-10 . INF
ESC-P-15 . INF
ESCPl O-A. INF
ESCPl5-A. INF
-FANUC-10.
INF -
paw
L
DAT
(Setting the cross-reference

list output format)
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
For these parameter
Set the output format

guidance information
Set the output information
Specify the output format
Set the read/write coil
guidance information
Specify the linefeed
Specify the page break
files, do not change any item not described
2-12
text editor so
frames can be changed.
Change the paper

selection name
Set the top margin
Set the net interval
Set the printer model and
-CROSSING.
available
5.
6.
7.
here.
Set the line spacing

Set the left margin
Set the title of printout
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
#PAPER=lO-G
: flO-A=lO-inch/ASCII
i
LENGTHL=ll
i
LENGTH=11
: WIDTHL=lO
: WIDTH=10
; PTCHL=lS/lZO
: LI
: z
Print format
:.......)
lo-inch/ASCII ................................ ....:

*lo-inch/graphic
15-inch/ASCII
15-inch/graphic
A4 portrait/ASCII
A4 portrait/graphic
- ,:gq:
.,...
. .. .:.:,~:.:,~~:-:
>::
,.
.:
b-1
.((.,.,
.,...,._._.
6:~:~7~8~,.g~~10
,.y
F
~j$.#)..
:;
,,..
LEFTMGL=O
LEFTWG=O
TOPMGL=O
TOPMG=O
LCNTL=4
C_FI LE+-ij
O_FILE;PRTDAT.DMP
#END,:'
#lQ'G=lO-inch/graphic
LENGTHL=ll
LENGTH=11
WIDTHL=lO
WIDTH=10
PTCHL=lS/lZO
:.
I-
A.
SETUP screen (diaqram output)
:.
LEFTMGL=O
LEFTWG=O
TOPMGL=O
TOPMG=O
b-2
:
:
:,:...:...
C-l.
:...,,.. .
:
.*.
::.,~,,,.,.... .,>,,:
.....,.,
......
B.
AMROFTRP.DAT
/
.. ..:..
>:
l.lNF files selectable at #l O-A

jindicated aoainst a white backaround)
C-2. l.lNF files selectable at #10-G

lindicated aaainst a white backaround)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._......
(Example) If lo-inch/graphic is selected in A:
0
In 8, setting b-2 is valid.
@ In C-2, a setting of PR201-lO.INF isvalid.
i
. . . . . . . ...................................................................................
2-13
file
1.4.1 Changing the paper selection name

This
item makes
it possible
to change
Name of file to be
the name of each
choice
during
diagram
Point of change
output
format
Settings
edited
9MROFTRP.DAT
#l O-A = lo-inch!ASCII
Arbitrary
#l O-G = 1O-inch!graphic
up to 30 half-size
#15-A = 15inch/ASCII
characters
character
string consisting
of
(or 15 full-size)
#15-G = 15-inch/graphic
#A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII
#A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic
(Note)
#A4L-A = and #A4L-G = are unavailable
in the IBM PC/AT system.
1.4.2 Setting the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.
Name of file to be
Point of change
Settings
edited
AMROFTRP.DAT
TOPMGL = 0
Decimal number
TOPMG = 0
(for each form)
1.4.3 Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying
changed
this item, the spacing between
the LADDER nets used during diagram printout
in the manner shown below.
NO0003
C
00001
+00006
II
II
YO.7
00001
YO.0
l00006
YO.0
YO.7
00001
YO.1
l00006
YO.0
YO.1
YO.7
00001
NO0004
D
YO.0
.00006
YO.1
YO.7
00001
NO0005
YO.2
+00008
E
+00006
When LCNTL = 4
When LCNTL = 5
2-14
YO.2
+00008
can be
1. COMMON
File edited
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT
Modifications
Settings
LCNTL = 4
(Set for each sheet)
AMROFTRP.DAT
Specify either 4 or 5
I
1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change
the printer model and print paper that are specified
during
paper selection.
PR201 is not usable in the IBM system.
Name of file
Point of
l.lNF that can be
to be edited
change
set
AMROFTRP.
DAT
#l O-A
:
C;FILE
1O-inch
1O-inch
1O-inch
1O-inch
1O-inch
continuous
continuous
continuous
continuous
continuous
form/ASCII
form/graphic
form/ASCII
form/graphic
form/ASCII
.INF
PRlO_A
PR201_10 .INF
ESCPlO_A. INF
ESC P lO.INF
FAN%zlO.
INF
PR201
PR201
VP1 000
VP1000
FANUC printer
1O-inch
1O-inch
1O-inch
1O-inch
lo-inch
continuous
continuous
continuous
continuous
continuous
form/ASCII
form/graphic
form/ASCII
form/graphic
form/ASCII
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1 000
15inch
PR 15-A
.INF
PR201_15 .INF
ESCP15 A. INF
ESC_P_i5.
INF
continuous
15-inch continuous
15-inch continuous
15-inch continuous
form/ASCII
form/graphic
form/ASCII
form/graphic
.INF
PRlS_A
PR201_15 .INF
ESCPIS A.INF
ESC _ P1 15.INF
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1000
15-inch
15-inch
15-inch
15-inch
form/ASCII
form/graphic
form/ASCII
form/graphic
PRA4_A
PR201_A4
.INF
.INF
PR201
PR201
A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
PRA4_A
PR201_A4
.INF
.lNF
PR201
PR201
A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII

A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
#15-A
#15-G
#A4L-A
: (Note)
C;FILE
(Note)
continuous
continuous
continuous
continuous
#A4L-G
: (Note)
C;FILE
mode
PR201
PR201
VP1000
VP1 000
FANUC printer
C.-FILE =
C;FILE
Print paper type/print
PRlO_A
.INF
PR201_10 .INF
ESCPlO_A.INF
ESC_P_lO . INF
FANUC_10. INF
#10-G
.
C-FILE
Printer name
This item is not supported
in the IBM system.
2-15
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.4.5 Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output.
The file to be edited is the
one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.
Name of file to be
l.INF
Settings
Point of change
edited
LPI
LDRLPI
(H) (1 B) (C) (120) ;

(H) (1 B) (C) (T15) ;
(H) (1 B) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ;

(H) (1B) (C) (Tedecimal
number >) ;
1.4.6 Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output.
The file to be edited is the
one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.
Name of file to be
edited
Point of change
1LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO);
2-16
Settings
I(H) (1B) (C) (LKdecimal
number>)
1. COMMON
Environment
When 1 is
selected as
the printout
paper
When 2 is
selected as
the printout
paper
When 3 is
selected as
the printout
paper
settings for diagram printout
#PAPER = 10-G
L #10-A= 10 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11
WIOTHL = 10
WIDTH = 10
PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83
LINES = 55
RATIOL = 2/3
RATIO = 2/3
GRAMODL = 14
GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 0
ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
l TOPMGL
=0
* TOPMG = 0
* LCNTL = 4
L C FILE = PRlO AJNF
O-FILE = PRTtiAT.DMP
&ND
L #10-G = 10 inch/graphic
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11
;/w&i
; A0
PITCHL: 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83
LINES = 55
RATIOL = 2/3
RATIO = 213
GRAMODL = 14
GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 0
ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
l TOPMGL = 0
. TOPMG = 0
+ LCNTL = 4
* C-FILE = PR20l_lO.INF
OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP
+ #I 5-A = 15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 15
WIDTH = 15
PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83
LINES = 55
RATIOL = 213
RATIO = 213
GRAMODL = 16
GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 1
ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
+ TOPMGL = 0
+ TOPMG = 0
+ LCNTL = 4
. C-FILE = PRl S_A.INF
OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP
*#15-G-15
(Note)
OPERATIONS
- example
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC,AT
1 (settings
Changing the types of

printout paper
The name is changed from
1:lO inch to l:NEC 10.
see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.)
Changing
the upper margin
(The upper margin is set to )

5 characters.)
Changing the types of
printout paper
*
(The name is changed from
2:15 inch to 2:EPSON 10.
See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)
Changing
the type of printer
)
(The printer is changed to
EPSON VP1000 and the paper
is changed to IO-inch forms.)
#PAPER = I O-G
#lo-A=NEC
10
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 10
WIDTH- 10.
PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20
uw:L
;E
RATIO; = 2/3
RATIO = 213
GRAMODL = 14
GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 0
ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
;c$w-=,5
LCNTL = 4
C-FILE = PRlO_A.INF
2EFlkE * PRTDAT.DMP
#l O-G = EPSON 10
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 10
WIDTH = 10
PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20
LINESL = 83
LINES = 55
RATIOL = 2/3
RATIO - 2M
GRAMODL = 14
GRAMOD = 16
ANKMODL = 0
ANKMOD = 1
LEFTMGL = 0
LEFTWG = 0
TOPMGL = 0
ym&
;40
C-FILE :ESCPlO
A.INF
fEF&E = PRTDAf.DMP
115-A = 15 inch/ASCII
LENGTHL = 11
LENGTH = 11
WIDTHL = 15
WIDTH = 15
PITCHL = 15/l 20
PITCH = 20/l 20
#L
;k
RATIO; = 2/3
RATIO = 2M
GRAMODL = 16
GRAMOD = 16
;;EIg;L
71
Changing the spacing between

:he LADDER nets
*
:The net spacing for the
-ADDER diagram is widened.)
inch
An asterisk (*) indicates
in file AMROFTRP.DAT)
data which can be modified.
2-17
LEFTMGLZ 0
LEFTWG = 0
TOPMGL = 0
TbPMb = 0
LCNTL = 5
C FILE = PR15 A.INF
O-FILE = PRT@AT.DMP
#END
*#15-G--15
inch
1. COMMON
Environment
OPERATIONS
settings for diagram printout
FOR THE
- example 2 (settings
in fife PR201_1O.INF)
..
..
..
..
..
..
PRZOlH3 CNTINF
CRLF
FORMF
CPI
CANCEL
LDRCP I
*
LPI
*
LDRLP I
*
LMARGIN
RMARGIN
LDRCHAR
JPNSET
JPNRESET
1
(H) W)(C)
(T2D);
(H) w
(C) (Tl5) ;
(H)WW)(LDDD);
(H) W (C) t/D781 ;
(H) (18) (C) (50014);
(HwB)ww;
(H) W W (H) ;
..
..
..
..
..
..
Setting the left margin
Setting the spacing

between lines
(Left margin is set to 5
(Line spacing is set to 25.)
characters.)
I
PRZOlH3 CNTINF (
CRLF
FORMF
CANCEL
W)(OD,OA);
yw{:
CPI
LDRCP I
LPI
LORLP I
LMARGIN
RMARGIN
LORCHAR
JPNSET
JPNRESET
(Note)
An asterisk (*) indicates
PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT
OWhH);
(H) (1B) (C) (Q) ;
(H)W)WT25);
(HWWC)(Tl5);
(H) (1B) (C) (LOD5) ;
(H) (18) (C)(/078);
(H) (16) (C) (50014);
(H) W) w (K);
(H) W
(C)(H);
data which can be modified.
2-18
1.4.7 Setting the title of printout

This item can change
specified
according
the title of a diagram
to the descriptions
Vame of file to be
when it is output.
Point of change
~~
-T
SYS-TITLE
(C) (
Settings
(C) (<any
System parameter
character
of up to 60 half-size
string consisting
(or 30 full-size)
characters > ) ;
CMT-TITLE
(C) (
is the one
in Section 1.4.4.
edited
:INF
The file to be edited
Symbol & comment
) ;
LAD-TITLE
(C) (*
Ladder diagram )
IO-TITLE
(C) (*
I!0 module data )
MSG-TITLE
(C) (
Message data 7
TIT-TITLE
(C) (
Title data 7
CRS-TITLE
(C) (
Cross-reference
Bit address map T
BIT-TITLE
(C) (
LS-TITLE
(C) (-
(Note)
Half-size
List file 7
katakana characters
cannot be used.
1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

This item can specify
reference
guidance
listing.
characters
to be output as guidance
In the CROSSINF.DAT
information
file, lines with no semicolon
to be output
at the beginning
during
cross-
are valid as
information.
Name of file to be
Point of change
Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
GUIDE =
Any character
to 19 bytes
2-19
string consisting
of up
1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers
step and net numbers
CROSSINF.DAT
file,
are specified,
lines
with
which
to be output as cross-reference
is to be printed
no semicolon
at the
information.
If both
first can also be specified.
In the
beginning
are valid
as cross-reference
information.
Name of file to be
Settings
Point of change
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
When only the net number is output:
NET-INF =
NET-INT = 1
STEP-INF =
STEP-INF = 0
When only the step number is output:
NET-INT = 0
STEP-INF = 1
When the net and step numbers
are
output in the stated sequence:

NET-INT = 1
STEP-INF = 2
When the step and net numbers
are
output in the stated sequence:

NET-INT = 2
STEP-INF = 1
1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference

This item enables a character
the CROSSINF.DAT
string to be printed at the beginning
file, lines with no semicolon
Name of file to be
list output format
at the beginning
of the step and net numbers.

are valid.
Point of change
Settings
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
(Note)
I Character
1 FORM =
Only letters in lowercase
are valid as %s.
Z-20
string + %s
In
1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment
semicolon
at the beginning
about coil attributes.
In the CROSSINF.DAT
file, lines
with
no
are valid.
Vame of file to be
Settings
Point of change
edited
READ =
XOSSINF.DAT
Character
string consisting
of up to
13 bytes.
WRITE =
When coils are indicated

graphic symbols,
using
specify as shown
below, and select graphic
as the
diagram output format.

READ = -I I-
-l/l-
READ = -I I-
-l/l-
READ =
-I I-
READ =
-I I-
WRITE = -()WRITE =
:
:
:
-(/)-
-()-
1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between
semicolon
at the beginning
addresses.
In the CROSSINF.DAT
file, lines with no
are valid.
Name of file to be
Point of change
edited
CROSSINF.DAT
(Note)
IDecimal
1NL =
number
In this case, space lines as many as the specified
value plus 1 are inserted
between
addresses.
no space line is inserted
between
(If 0 is specified
as the linefeed
count,
addresses.)
1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between
no semicolon
at the beginning
Name of file to be
address types.
Point of change
edited
:ROSSINF.DAT
In the CROSSINF.DAT
file, lines with
are valid.
FF =
Settings
0 = the page is not advanced

1 = the page is advanced
2-21
1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance

A desired character
string can be output as guidance
the CROSSINF.DAT
file, data of a line beginning
when the cross reference
with a character
list is printed.
other than a semi-colon
In
(;) is
valid.
File edited
Modifications
CROSSINF.DAT
Settings
Desired character
GUIDE =
string of up to 19
bvtes
1.4.15 Setting the output information

As the cross
reference
output
information,
When both step and net numbers

In the CROSSINF.DAT
step numbers,
net numbers,
or both can be output.
are output, the order in which they are printed can be specified.
with a character
(;) is
valid.
Modifications
File edited
Settings
NET-INF =
CROSSINF.DAT
Only net numbers
STEP-INF =
are output.
NET-INF = 1
STEP-INF = 0
Only step numbers
are output.
NET-INF = 0
STEP-INF = 1
Net numbers
and step numbers
are
output in that order.

NET-INF = 1
STEP-INF = 2
Step numbers
and net numbers
are
output in that order.

NET-INF = 2
STEP-INF = 1
1.4.16 Setting the output format

A character
string can be printed in front of each step or net number.
data of a line beginning
File edited
CROSSINF.DAT
(Note)
With %s,
with a character
1
I FORM
Modifications
=
only the lowercase
(;) is valid.
I
I Character
letter s is valid.
2-22
In the CROSSINF.DAT
Settings
string
+ %s
file,
1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance

A comment
beginning
about each coil attribute

with a character
can be specified.
In the CROSSINF.DAT
(;) is valid.
Modifications
File edited
CROSSINF.DAT
file, data of a line
Settings
string of up to 13 bytes.
READ =
Character
WRITE =
To print a coil with graphic

characters,
specify as follows and
select graphic diagram output.
READ=-
1 I- -I/j-:
READ=-II-
-I/I-:
READ=
-1 I-
READ=
-I I-
WRITE = -()WRITE =
(Note)
With %s, only the lowercase
-(I)-
-()-
letter s is valid.
1.4.18 Setting line feed

Blank lines can be inserted
data of a line beginning
between
the data of different
with a character
addresses.
In the CROSSINF.DAT
file,
(;) is valid.
-1
Modifications
File edited
CROSSINF.DAT
(Note)
NL
Decimal value
Blank lines of the specified
address types.
Settings
(If zero is specified
number
plus one are inserted
between
the data of different
as the line feed value, no blank lines are inserted.)
1.4.19 Setting form feed

The
printing
of the
CROSSINF.DAT
data
of each
address
FF
can
be
with a character
Modifications
File edited
CROSSINF.DAT
type
started
on
a new
page.
(;) is valid.
Settings
0 = Form feed is executed.
1 = Form feed is not executed.
2-23
In the
1. COMMON
Environment
l
OPERATIONS
settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT
Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT
file)
file
GUIDEsSTEP No./NET No.

NET-INF=2
STEP-INF-1
FROM=S%s/N%s
READ--I I- -I/I- :
WRITE=-()-(/):
NL=l
FF=O
;
0 Sample cross reference
output
1 [A:YFLADDER4(SAMPLE]
***
Address
x0.0
-II-Yl+
Cross reference
Symbol
***
PAGE 1
STEP NO./NET No.
Comment
: S00045/N00009
SOOO88/NOOO20
SOOO49/NOOO12 S00053/N00013
SOOO94/NOOO2
S00082/N00017
s00050/N00010
S00077/N00029
SOOO54/NOOOl2 SO0059/N00015
S00065/N00017
S00045/N00009
SOO128/NOOO62
x0.1
-It-+
YO.0
U-Q-:
RO.0
-Ii-++
Double writing
: S00009/N00003
S00022/N00010
S00047/N00019
SOOOO2/N00001
S00256/N00098
SOOOl2/NOOOO8 S00014/N00009 SOOOl5/NOOOlO

S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017
S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035
2-24
1. COMMON
Environment
l
OPERATIONS
settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT
Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT
file
GUIDE-Step number
NET-INF=O
STEP-INF=l
FROM=S$s
READ=read
WRITE=Write
NL-0
FF=O
:
0 Sample cross reference
output
[A:YFLADDERYSAMPLE]
l **
Cross reference
PAGE 1
**
Step number
Address
Symbol Comment
x0.0
: SO0045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094
Read
x0.1
Read
YO.0
: SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077
Write
: SO0045 SO0128 SO0256
Double writing
RO.0
Read
Write
: SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045

so0047 so0074 so0079
: soooo2
2-25
file)
III. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE
FUNCTIONS
1. OVERVIEW
1.1 What is a Step Sequence ?
The
step
sequence
programmable
flow chart.
Therefore
is one
controller.
method
for
This method features
Each block of processing

it provides
programming
sequence
control
the direct representation
is described
an easy-to-understand
the
as a subprogram,
visualized
governed
of the control
using
flow of the processes
by
flow on a
the ladder
method.
and is well-suited
to
the control of entire processes.

For details of the step sequence
FANUC PMC-MODEL
PROGRAMMING
method, refer to the following
manual.
PA1 /PA3/RAl /FWWtA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4~NB/NB2

MANUAL(LADDER
LANGUAGE)
B-61863/06
1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method

The programming
editing function
with step sequence
method
on FANUC PMC-MODEL
is supported
by Fapt ladder, not but by the built-in
RB4!RB6/RC4/NB2.
Setting a model in Fapt ladder decides which method, step sequence
or ladder, is used.
1.3 A Program Configuration Screen

If a model that supports the step sequence
subprograms.
This screen lists subprograms,
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
0 LEVEL1 0
i0"'tiUOO1.'
0
0 PO008 0
0 PO021 0
.
.
.
.
0
function
To enable this, a subprogram
PO101
is selected,
configuration
and supports the selection
SEQUENCE)
and editing of a target subprogram.
RCa(STEP SEQ) [A:yFLYDATAYSFCOl]

PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
LEVEL2
PO002
PO009
PO022
0
0
0
0
.
.
PO202
0 JPO304
Sub-program
a program can be edited in units of
screen has been added.
LEVEL3
PO004 0 PO005
PO014 0 PO015
PO024 0 PO025
.
.
q]PO405
0 PO006
0 PO016
0 PO026
.
.
0
0
PO007
PO017
q]POO27
.
.
qJPO407
0]PO406
: PO001
DELETE
3-l
NEW
ZOOM
1.4 The Configration
of a Sequence
Program
A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit;

- The 1st level of ladder
- The 2nd level of ladder
- The 3rd level of ladder
- Subprograms of ladder sequence
- Subprograms of step sequence
LEVEL 1 (LADDER)
LEVEL 2 (LADDER)
LEVEL 3 (LADDER)
Sub
Program Pl (Step Sequence)
Sub
Program P2 (LADDER)
ISub
Program P3 (LADDER)
Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)
3-2
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS
1.5 Data Flow
-PC9801*IBWPC/AT
Source program
Mnemonic program
Ladder 1st level
Mnemonic
conversion
Ladder 2nd level
Ladder 3rd level

Subprogram
Pl
Subprogram
A mnemonic program without

step sequence
P2
Compilation/Decompilation
Object code
I
L
ROM format program I

t
'71
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
Transfer data
Floppy cassette
Memory card
4
- RS232C
4
- Handy File.
- FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER
4
- Memory card
-CNC
1) [PMCI
2) II/O1
3)[HOST]
1) [PMCI
2) I I/O1
3)[FDCAS]
1) IPMCI
2) II/O1
33) [MCARD]
(Boot process also can
read the memory card)
The operation of soft key when input/output
3-3
FUNCTIONS
2. SETTING A MODEL
2.1 Operation
(1)
Starting FAPT LADDER

At the MS-DOS
(2)
Displaying
prompt, key in FLADDER.
the initial screen
Once the system edition, copyright.
and other information
FAPT
have been displayed,
press any key.
LADDER
AOEB-92014502#EN
Ver
08.0
Copyright
(C)
1994.07.22
1991 FANUC LTD
END ? (Y:END, 0THER:RESUME MENU)
(3) Displaying
the main menu
When the menu screen is displayed
as shown below, press the < F7 > (SETUP)
MAIN MENU
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
FE
F9
FlO
EDIT
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
COMPIL
key.
[A:YFLYDATAYSFCY
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
EDIT
PRINT
COMPILE
DISCOMPILE
LINK
I/D
SETUP
MNEMONIC EDIT
UTILITY
END
DISCPL
I/D
3-4
SETUP
UTILTY
END
FUNCTIONS
(4) Setting the PMC model

To use the step sequence
(model which supports
SETUP
PMC-RAl
PMC-RA2
.
.
PMC-RB4
function,
select PMC-XXX(STEP
the step sequence
function)
SEQ or PMC-RB6
or PMC-NB2)
from the listed models.
RCQ(STEP SEQ)
(STEP SEQ)
.
.
* PMC-RC4
(STEP SEQ)
.
.
Select by cursor and hit [Enter] key.
COPY
3-5
END
FUNCTIONS
3. EDITING
This section describes
how to create a step sequence
program.
3.1 Basic Operation

(1) Displaying
the main menu
Press the < Fl > (EDIT) key.
MAIN MENU
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FlO
EDIT
(2)
Selecting
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
COMPIL
[A:YFLYDATAYSFC%
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
EDIT
PRINT
COMPILE
DISCOMPILE
LINK
I/O
SETUP
MNEMONIC EDIT
UTILITY
END
DISCPL
UTILTY
SETUP
I/O
END
the program to be edited
Enter the name of the source program to be edited.
SELECT SOURCE PROGRAM
Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC%
SOURCE PROGRAM NAME : TEST
EXEC
END
Press the c Fl > key.
1)
The screen changes,
depending
on the program to be entered.
If a new program name is specified:

The model setting screen is displayed.
Re-confirm
the selected
model.
Then, the edit menu is displayed.
2)
If the specified
selected
name
is that of a program
created
for a model
which
from
the
model:
The selected
model is automatically
changed
according
to the specified
the edit menu is displayed.

3)
differs
If the specified
name is that of a program created for the selected
The edit menu is displayed.
3-6
model:
program.
Then,
To return to the main menu, press the < FlO>

up to eight alphanumeric
characters,
(3) Displaying the editing menu

Press the < F2 > (LADDER/STEP
EDIT
or < ESC>
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
KEY
:
:
:
:
SEQUNCE)
key.
[A: YFL~DATAYsFcY
:
:
(4) Subprogram
configuration
The subprogram
..0
.
LEVEL1
........... . 0
m;iJ)@ti$.,
0
0
0
PO008
PO021
PO101
LEVEL2
PO002
PO009
PO022
I ENDI
PO202
as shown below:
RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:YFLyDATAYSFCOl]

0
0
0
0
LEVEL3
PO004 0
PO014 0
PO024 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
q]PO304
q ]PO405
q]PO406
q]PO407
Sub-program
screen is displayed
SEQUENCE)
.
.
.
.
0
0
0
screen
configuration
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
TITLE
LADDER / STEP SEQUENCE
SYMBOL h COMMNET
MESSAGE
I/O MODULE
SYSTEM PARAMETER
END
1 TITLE ILADSFC ISYMBOL IMESSAG IMODULEISYSPRM 1

I
As the program name, enter
without an extension.
RCI(STEP SEQ)
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
FlO
key.
FUNCTIONS
PO005
PO015
PO025
0
0
0
PO006
PO016
PO026
0
0
PO007
PO017
qJPOO27
: PO001
DELETE
3-7
NEW
ZOOM
Note
1)
Note 2)
The 3rd ladder level can be omitted.

If the
[ZOOM]
subprogram
key was
configuration
used
Such subprograms
Step sequence
Position
is displayed
for which
to a certain
depth,
and
upon a single press of the [MAIN]
the [ZOOM]
key was pressed
to a program
marked with 01,
editing screen is displayed
,..:.)))):.
.... .,:,:
(..>:t:i
J@J$,
key,
is suspended.
cl Sll
s13
then press the [ZOOM]
or <RET>
as shown below:
Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~]

q s21
cl s31
4 (Note 1)
Note 1)
if the
are marked with A].
DIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE)
s3
a program
diagram
the cursor
The step sequence
to nest
screen
the editing of the subprograms
(5)
FUNCTIONS
The current
The entire
position
screen
and 64 elements
of the cursor
consists
on the screen
of 32 elements
from top to bottom.
any element on the screen.
3-8
across
is indicated.
the screen
The cursor is positioned
to
key.
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
3.2 Creating a Step Sequence

3.2.1 Creating a subprogram of the step sequence
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
0 LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2
;/$;;-'i:&jflQ~!n
,..
....
]POOO2
.:
...i........
i,,.
0
PO008 0
PO009
0 ]POO21 0
PO022
0
0
0
0
LEVEL3
PO004 0
PO014 0
PO024 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
RCI(STEP SEQ) [A:~FL~DATAfSFCOl]

I
Following
PO005
PO015
PO025
0
0
0
PO006
PO016
PO026
.
.
0
0
PO007
PO017
q]POO27
.
DELETE
NEW
ZOOM
keys are useful in this screen.
Function
Other keys
key
[ DELETE]
: Deleting a subprogram
[ROLL UP]
[NEW
] : Creating a new subprogram
[ZOOM
] : Modifying
: Displaying
[ROLL DOWN] : Displaying
previous
screen
next screen
a subprogram
Meaning of display
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
Edit
(LADDER/STEP
PMC-RC4
SEQUENCE)
(STEP SEQ)
[A: Y FL..
RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:%FLYDATAYSFCOl]
FAPT LADDER editing screen
The list screen of subprogram
Setting a model
Current directory

:
PROGRAM
q LEVEL2
aLEVEL
Remarks which is one of the title data
OLEVEL3
I
LEVEL1
The 1st level of ladder
LEVEL2
The 2nd level of ladder
LEVEL3
The 3rd level of ladder

(In case of PMC-RC4
the 3rd ladder level can be omitted,
in case of PMCRB4
the 3rd ladder level does not exist.)
q]POOO2
PO001
Cl
01
-:
PO004
PO005
a subprogram
of the ladder
a subprogram
3-9
PO006 0
PO007
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
(1) Creating a new subprogram

-
Press the [NEW] key.
name ? m
New program
Enter the number of the subprogram
Press the [F2 ] key.
(2) Modifying
-
a subprogram
Key in the number

[ZOOM]
[ZOOM]
or
key.
Alternatively,
position
(P200, for example),

the cursor
to P200
then press the

then
press
the
number
marked
A ] (P21, for example)
with
is selected,
the following
is displayed:
this
subprogram
is not completed.
(Yes/No) [Yl
Continue to select it 7
To continue
to be modified
or <RET > key.
message
Editing
of the subprogram
<RET>
If a subprogram
session,
to be created (P200, for example).
the editing
session
press the < RET > key.
the subprogram
using
the results
obtained
from suspended
To cancel the results of the previous
previous
editing session
editing
and edit
from its original state, enter < N >.
3.2.2 Creating a step sequence program

The basics and configuration
FANUC
PMC-MODEL
RB4/RC4
Supplementary
are described
Description
in the following
of Programming
document:
(Ladder
Language)
B-61 863EI05-3
On the step sequence
screen,
different
soft keys are displayed,
depending
on the position
of the
cursor.
When the cursor is on the step line, following
I
cl
I
cl]
softkey menu is displayed.
...I
s2
101
:ti;:ili;;$;$
01
s20
-+ JHP
3-10
+cl
La
s30
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
1
1
0
UJI
01
[ +JMP
I:
Step subprogram
[ tLBL
1:
Initial step subprogram
I:
I :
Block step subprogram
( FUNC
Various functions
Line for link
Grammatical
Jump to label
( ZOOM
Zooming
When the cursor is on the transition
ACHK
line, following
Label for jump

The end of block step
I:
checking
into a subprogram
softkey menu is displayed.
FUNC
I l[ l==
ZOOM
CHK
ZOOM
I : Divergence of selective sequence

1:
Divergence
of simultaneous
I:
Line for link
sequence
I
I
I t[t==
I :
Convergence
of selective
1:
Convergence
of simultaneous
[ FUNC
Grammatical
Zooming
CHK
[ ZOOM
(1)
CHK
Transition
I:
FUNCTIONS
sequence
sequence
Various functions
checking
into a subprogram
Entering a step
Position the cursor to the desired input position,
Then, enter a step number and subprogram
Pressing the [n]
then press the [Cl] key.
number.
key causes a step to be created, as shown below.
A free step number is automatically
assigned.
iii;iij,t~.:.:.~.:.Y:::
~~~
.;:.S
$5
::::!,:i-i_._:~:
..,.:.._
STEP
ACTION
:......Sl
:?
l-1
The specified
subprogram
JMP
+LBL
number (PlO in this example)
3-11
-L
is displayed
FUNC
below Sl.
FUNCTIONS
STEP : 81
ACTION : PlO
l-l
To change the step number, press the <RET>
key to position the character cursor .? on
STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.
.:$:f:B~~:.:~
~~~~:
T;f;y
)::::::,
.:
.. ..... :.:.::.:
,,i;;,;i;y:::::::::
:>:..
,...,.:.:::::::::
::::::...:.:.:.:.:.~..~:
.).
:.:.:,
:.:.:
:.
STEP : Slg
ACTION : PlO
l-l
(2) Entering a transition

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key.
Enter a subprogram number
Press the [ + ] key.
ACTION : .:$
l-2
FUNC
Enter a subprogram number.
I
o)i
,:ilFI:t:~:~::s:~~~~~~
.\: ..
:..:::p::;
;I:,.
,.:
.),.
:.:~~~~~
3
:
.::.::. ....::
j::+ ::~.~:~,~.~::~~~:~,:::~.:,~,.~:i.~
.::.;
,:,
:
+
:........,
..:.:::>,. .>
... ...
;,.;..
: ...i.;:; 1:::....::.:.I,., :..
ACTION : $100
l-2
3-12
CHR
ZOOM
(3) Divergence
of selective
FUNCTIONS
sequence
Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 --_I key.
FUNC
CHR
ZOOM
CHK
ZOOM
Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 -_I key.
(4) Convergence
of selective
sequence
Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ f -]
key.
ACTION : PlO&
2-4
1 +. I+_Il=zl
It-_lt__l
3-13
FUNC
-x
g
j_
II
II
z
-
-z
II
II
c
-
i
-
II
I
+
I
+
-_,
II
II
II
Specifying
FUNCTIONS
a label for jump destination
Position the cursor to the desired input position
(step line), then press the [-
LBL] key.
Then, enter a label name.
Press the [+
LBL] key.
LABEL
Ll@;
l-l
JMP
+LBL
FUNC
Enter a label name.
STEP : Sl
ACTION : PlO
l-l
3-15
CHR
ZOOM
(8)
FUNCTIONS
Specifying a label jump

Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [+ JMP] key.
Then, enter a label name.
Press the [+ JMP) key.
LEBEL :
A...
$$
2-3
JMP
LBL
FUNC
Enter a label name.
+- L10
101 s1
I
f-r
PlOO
, q ]s 2
PlOO
I::,::'
:.i,jjj.~:~:i'i.li~:~;i:
:;.;
._
.,;::;.
';
y<.:.y
;I:;:-"'
:i'i.:.:?.i':...
&A:itxiO
.,.I.:::::i.:
:,,;
,:>,
:::......
...... .y,
.:.:...:.:.:;.:.:.:.:.:.:
:~~:~.~:~::...:::::::~::::~:~:~:::::
PlOO
t
LEBEL : Llfi:
2-3
3-16
CHK
200?4
(9)
FUNCTIONS
Deleting an element
Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the [DEL] key.
Select
the element
by the <DEL> key and press
In the example shown above, two figures (elements)

selected.
video.
the
of a selective
<return>
branch and transition
Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed
To position the cursor displayed
key
in reverse video, press the [DEL] key.
are
in reverse
To restore the
state shown above, press the (ESC] key.
If the [RETURN]
the following
key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective
screen is displayed:
3-17
branch is deleted and
FUNCTIONS
To specify another figure, press the [DEL] key again.
I
I01 Sl
.k
... ,..,.......
.
>:..A
..I
.,
.. .. ..
... :~l;;;i;~g~.
.
.:..
:::..
Inserting an element
Position the cursor to the desired insertion
position,
then press the [INS] key. To create an
mpty row, press the [INS] key.

o create an empty column,
STEP
ACTION
press the [SHIFT]
and [INS] keys.
: S2
: p 2 0 0 @$
l-3
3-18
Press the (INS] key.
l-3
Press the [SHIFT]
and [INS] key.
IO1 Sl
c
Pl
Cl Sll
cl s21
STEP : S2
ACTION : PlO2
l-3
3-19
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS
(11) Search
q;;..;.
,, ======i =
1
....::::. ...:j:::ji(ij:j.
..;:.II:;::: :.:.::: jj ::..:.
g$j::$i:.;.:l:li:
I-J
Cl s20
t
SlO
_..t
.,.
..,::,,...
: .. $5:":
;;.
(,
:)>>::..,:
:>:
::.::.:
.
.~,
..
".."."..."~>;.>
.:.,.::.:.>
z:.
.:
.?....
,.i..
...
..........
....
,.,
Pll
P21
cl SlO
I
Cl s20
I
Pl
T2
If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed
shown below:
Fl
F2
F3
F4
FS
Search
Copy
Move
Main
List
cl Sll
Y3
Press the [Fl]
cl s21
I
(Search) key.
A pop-up menu is displayed,
Pl
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
Step
Action
Label
symbol
Position
Top
Bottom
3-20
as shown below:
as
Then, press the (Fl]
(Step) key.
Another
Enter the step number to be searched

The system starts searching
Copying
pop-up menu is displayed,
for (S20, for example),
through the part subsequent
or moving an element
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.
Pl
3-21
FUNCTIONS
as shown below:
then press the < RET > key.
to the cursor.
When the [F8) (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed
Fl
F2
F3
F4
FS
as shown below:
Search
Copy
Move
mAin
List
Press the [F2) (Copy) key.
The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.
ACTION :
Specify Start position
l-2
Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example
,.::
$;;;y;:
.gi.lj?
:,:.: .>.::.::::::
,.
... ...... .._
:: :: :::::.::::::
q]S2
,(,..:*:...
,.:.:
,.,.:
;;::,&T
1
IJ
:..:....:.:.:..q:-:
./\....:.::::
....,.,.,.,..
:
::::.y::::
,.:.
::,:;.
::
:.,::.:,,.
..
:::.;
.j,.
:.;.
.,,..,...,i
:::::.::::::.;::.:.+:
s20
P21
Pll
Pl
shown below), then
The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.
Pl
It
FUNCTIONS
ACTION :
Specify End position
2-3
3-22
3.
THE STEP SEQUENCE
FUNCTIONS
Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then
The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.
:z: J::
qlS2
p1
i
;;; ~~~
:~~~~~~:~~~~
I:::iliii:ll:i:li#i:~,::,:~:~:~:~~:
::..
j..:.:...:
.....:>:...:.:i\:.:
:::.zy
,.,
:i,i:I:I:I:II:i:II:I:i::I:i6:i:
.:j;j;y
. ,. ;:~~:~,~:~:~:~:~:~:~::::::.,.~~.~::i:~.~r~:~~:::~~:..~,
.:i.~.I_:~~I:I:I:i.i:~~~~~~~~~:~~:~:,,~,~~
.....\.
...\\
.:....... ._..
,,., ,,,,,.,,,
::;:;:y:;:~:..:::::::::.:.:.:..:.:
:.:.::;:::::::
.........:.:._.,.
.........y,,:
:...::::z::i
,:,
:::.:;;::
::~~~~~::5::iili:~Bi:~:~~:::::~:
:,;:;i:@!:qgg
.;C.
,,,.
<,,,::I:~;~~ws
~~;~~~:;:,::.;..:,,
q.:.:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
,.(
,.l,L..i_
:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:i(.:.,.;..
.,.,.,...
:.:.:..,:.:.:.:.:.
;:
..:,,
:::;:y:i:::;
,:::
,.,.
:,:::,:::::::z:i::
L.............
.....:..: :.:.::::::::::::::::::::::::
I:::.:::
::,:,...:
.,.y::
i:,.,
:.:.....
::.:f+;~:::.:.:.::::::.:.:::.:.:.:
..:..
....:,.
+ ..,,,):,:
c
ACTION :
Specify End position
3-4
Position the cursor to the desired copy destination

then press the < RET > key.
The specified
(position 4-3 in the example shown below),
part is copied.
Pl
ACTION : PlOO
When a part is copied,

-
The S address is not copied.
The P address is copied.
Assign a free number.
If required,
change the address.
3-23
(13) Returning
from the ZOOM destination
to the program configuration
To return to the program configuration

procedure
below.
screen, displayed
screen (MAIN).
when editing was started, follow the
The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence
from which the [ZOOM]

The edited subprogram
key was pressed,
FUNCTIONS
subprogram,
is suspended.
is not saved in the source program file.
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.
_....\\..
........................
$1::::;;g::
:.:;:::y:y:;:~::
_, ,.,.,.
..
,.,_
.
..Yy.*
$Q;
$.:rii:
~~~~
1 SlO
Cl s20
i
tpll
P21
After pressing
F3
Move
F4
mAin
List
F5
rfter pressing
the [F8] (FUNC) key
the (F4] (MAIN) key
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
R~~(~TEP
PROGRAM:(STEP
LEVEL1
$@,iip;&#$
LEVEL2
0 ~0002
LEVEL3
0 PO004
q ~0008
0 PO009
0 PO022
.
0 PO014
0 PO024
.
.
q JPO304
0 PO015
0 PO025
.
.
0JPO405
A]~0021
.
.
0 ~0101
~0202
3-24
pooo5
SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~)
SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
poooe
q PO016
0 PO026
.
.
c]]PO406
p(JoO7
PO017
q lPOO27
.
&PO407
If the subprogram
whose previous
editing session was suspended
selected again for editing, the following
FUNCTIONS
(marked with A])
is
message is displayed:
Editing this subprogram is not completed.

Continue to select it ?
(Yes/No 1 [Yl
To continue
Otherwise,
the previous
editing session, press the [RET] key.
enter N. (The result of the previous
editing session is cancelled.)
(14)LIST
The list of subprograms
referenced
by the stepsequence
subprogram
that is currently
being
edited is displayed.
Press the (F8] (FUNC) key.
:.:::::.:::::ii::I:i8iiiiiiii
i_i:.::~~.::;:.;
7====j =
:~~~~~~~
Cl SlO
cl s20
....... ..:::...::.:.;.:
........:.:,:.:::.:::.::::::~:;::~::,:
.I...
... .......+
..
.I
:::,t
.::~i;::i:::i::i::_:~::.~
Pl
P21
Pll
After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key
Pl
=II=I=t=III
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
Search
Copy
Move
mAin
List
After pressing the [F4] (LIST) key
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~]

OJP200
0
0
PO008
PO021
0
0
PO009
PO022
0
0
PO014
PO024
PO015
q PO025
0
0
I
3-25
PO016
PO026
PO017
q ]POO27
MAIN
CHANGE
ZOOM
Following
Function
FUNCTIONS
keys are useful in this screen.
Other keys
key
] :Displaying
[ MAIN
configuration
[ CHANGE
] :Creating
[ ZOOM
] :Modifying
: Displaying
[ROLL UP]
the subprogram
[ROLL DOWN] : Displaying
screen
previous
screen
next screen
a new subprogram
a subprogram
Screen display
q ]P200
The subprogram
which is being edited is displayed.
program to a certain depth, the subprogram

which
they
displayed
( 0
The
are nested.
numbers
subprogram
are arranged
for which
the
[ZOOM]
PO015
PO016
key is pressed
to nest the
from the left in the order in

key was pressed
first is
at the left end.
PO008
Subprograms
following
PO009
referenced
[I3 PO014
by the subprogram
that is currently
mark: :
cl
Ladder subprogram
cl]
Step sequence
(15)Checking
subprogram
the syntax
Press the [CHK] key.
If the [ZOOM]
Pl
gqc. :.::.:::,:::I:.:,:,::::....:.
.;:.(.:.:.:.:.~:.~::::::::::,
j:,...,
:.:7 ./.
0
;-,~:il~:~:~~
;,.,; ::~...,.,.:
s1 0
:,t-ll~~
Pll
I
0
t
s20
P21
3-26
PO017
being edited
are listed with the
$."f:"
...
....................
.;...::..:.::;:
.:
..?..):
..: ..:.:.::::
is satisfactory,
~~~~~~~~ I
...
.:.:.::
.....
: : : >: :
...
the following
.....
..................
..
slo
.:.::.:..:. .. .: :.:::j::::::::
:>::z: .::i;i::,i:i::llii;ili:iliiilcy;
2;:s:: ............
......>
...
....................
. :.:.
...................
Pl
t
Check completed
Pll
Pl
~11 [Chart
a subprogram
Press the [ZOOM]
Sequence
error
I
(16)Modifying
is invalid, the following
(ZOOM)
key.
~~~~~~~l,;~~.~
i ====7 =
::::::::
:;:;:::::::;
;:::
:.:,:g:>::;:;:i:
~~:~~~~di 0
SlO
. ::.:i.:.:.:::::+
:..2;. t
:....::,:::.::.::
::;:;$,.,,,,,;,:.,
.jjj,::jjj:,:~~g::j:~::
Pl
cl s20
t
P21
Pll
cl SlO
Y2
Cl s20
I
3 - 27
FUNCTIONS
When the [ZOOM]
key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides
FUNCTIONS
the type of subprogram
which is to be edited.
L
Meaning
Figure
Step sequence
of the figure
Subprogram
to be edited
Ladder subprogram
subprogram
101
Initial step sequence
subprogram
Ladder subprogram
01
block step sequence
subprogram
Step S8qU8nC8 subprogram
Transition
Ladder subprogram
(17)End of modifying
Press the [ESC] key.
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
Save(update)
Quit
Edit
save
Rename,
Optimize
h quit
h quit
Menus
Menu
Save
I
IEnd
Editing
Result of editing
Display
IOptimized
-
Quit
End
Discarded
Edit
Continue
Continued
Not optimized
Rename
End
Updated
Optimized
optimize
Continue
Optimized
3-28
and continued
Optimized
Z
LJJ
CL
a
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
1 DATA TRANSFER
1 DATA TRANSFER
CABLES
CABLES
Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer),
or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).
1.
For PC9801
PC980 1
25pin male
connector
On-line cable
25pin male
connector
CNC, ROM writer, or P-G
2.
For IBM PC/AT

IBM PC/AT
g-pin female
connector
25pin male
connector
On-line cable
II
25pin female
connector
25-pin male
connector
IBM PC/AT cable

3.
For IBM PS/2

IBM PSI2
25-pin female
connector
25-pin male
connector
25-pin female
connector
IBM PS/2 cable
On-line cable
25-pin male
connector
1
Al-l
APPENDIX
On-line
cable
(AOSB-0031-K8Ol/K802)
2
SD
SD
RD
RD
4
RS
25dn male
connector
RS
I
cs
cs
ER
ER
DR
DR
CD
ZI
25-pin male
connector
CD
SG
SG
FG
1 DATA TRANSFER
FG
IBM PC/AT cable
CD
CD
3
RD
RD
2
SD
SD
g-Din female
connector
20
ER
ER
7
SG
SG
6
6
DR
DR
7
22
RS
RS
cs
cs
Cl
Cl
Al-2
25-pin female
connector
CABLES
A!
APPENDIX
2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING

THE PMC-UM WITH RAM
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING

RAM
THE PMC-L/M WITH
1. GENERAL
This appendix
describes
using the optional
2.
the procedure
RAM board.
HARDWARE
for operating
It also describes
the PMC-L using built-in
RAM or the PMC-M
related notes.
CONFIGURATION
(1) PMC-L
No extra hardware
is needed.
The PMC-L is operated with ROM only when the PMC-L is provided
the Ladder Edit Cassette
with the ROM and without
(printed circuit board).
(2) PMC-M
The optional
RAM board is necessary.
It is also necessary
or to mount ROMs for the PMC-M on the ROM sockets,
to mount the Ladder Edit Cassette
OEl
and OE2, on the memory board.
Mount the PMC-M ROMs on the sockets as shown below.
ROM number
Socket location on the memory card
OF1
-_)
OEl
OF1
OEl
Memory card
(A16B-1212-0210)
(Note 1) When the PMC-M is provided with the ROM board, it is operated with ROM whether
the Ladder Edit Cassette
is mounted
(Note 2) When a ladder program is modified

provided
using
the Ladder
with the ROM board, the PMC-M executes
in the ROM board, and the modified

DGNOS
or not.
ladder
diagram
program being displayed
display
Edit Cassette
the original
ladder program is displayed

function.
are different.
A2-1
The
program
on the PMC-M
ladder program
stored
on the screen with the
being
executed
and
the
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING

THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM
3.
RAM OPERATION
Follow the flowchart
shown below to perform the RAM operation.
(1) PMC-L
Yes
Contents of the
backup RAM
Parameter for
displaying the
PMC load select
screen
No
Is the EPROM
Yes
(Note) Ladder programs

stored in the EPROM are
copied to the RAM.
=I pk
(see Section 4)
A2-2
APPENDIX

(2) PMC-M
Contents of the
backup RAM
I
Yes
Is the EPROM
ROM operation
No
Parameter for
displaying the
PMC load select
screen
(Note)
Ladder
programs stored in
the EPROM on the
ROM board are
copied to the RAM.
Yes
PMC LOADING
ADDRESS:OOOOH
DATA:
OOH
==k
RAM
(Note)
Transferring ladder programs from the
FAPT LADDER is needed. RAM contents are
deleted when the power is turned off.
PMC load select

screen
i (see Section 4)
AZ-3
APPENDIX
(3) Notes on RAM operation

Follow the description

in the PMC-M
below.
@ When a ladder oroaram sent from the FAPT LADDER is executed

Mount
the ROMs
memory
board.
for the PMC-M
usually
Write data into the ROM using the PMC-M
the same version

only contains
into the sockets
as that used for transferring
the END code (SUBl,
on RAM ooeration
used for the PMC-L
on the
management
that is
a ladder program.
A ladder program
follow the description
that
SUB2, and SUB48) can be used.
When a ladder program is sent from a ROM or a floppy disk that contains
be executed,
software
a program which can
above.
When a ladder oroctram chanaed
or created usina the Ladder Edit Cassette
is executed
on
RAM ooeration
Merhod
7: Mount
the
Edit Cassette.
Cassette executes
Mefhod 2:
Mount
the Edit Cassette.
sockets
usually
management
To change
a ladder
program
The
PMC-M
management
software
in the
Edit
the ladder program.
used
Also
for the
mount
PMC-L
the ROMs
on the memory
software in the ROM executes
which
is executed
for the PMC-M
on RAM
board.
into
The
the
PMC-M
the ladder program.
operation,
follow
the description
above.
If an attempt
is made to perform
RAM operation
above, ROM parity alarm 604 is issued.
in conditions
other
Satisfy the above conditions
operation.
A2-4
than those
first.
described
Then perform RAM
APPENDIX
4.
FUNCTION
FOR OPERATING
THE PMC-UM
WITH RAM
PMC LOAD SELECT SCREEN
The PMC load select screen shown below varies depending
on hardware
configuration.
When the Edit Cassette is not mounted

Item (5) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.
When the PMC-L is not provided

When
the PMC-M
with ROMs on the sockets;
is not provided
with
ROMs
on the sockets
nor the
ROM
board
is not
mounted on the PMC-M;

Item (2) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.
PMC LOAD SELECT

( 1) LOAD FROM I/O
(2) LOAD FROM EROM
(3) RUN
(4) RUN WITHOUT PMC
(5) EDIT LADDER
PUSH l-5 KEY :
Fig. 4
Whether
the PMC load select screen is displayed
a bit of the following
NO.71
by the setting of DPCRAM,
DPCRAM
I
#7
DPCRAM
or not is determined
CNC parameter.
#6
I
#5
#4
1:
The PMC load select screen is not displayed.
0:
The PMC load select screen is displayed.
A2-5
#3
#2
I
#l
#O
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES

1. MAIN MENU/SETTINGS
Description
Message
xxx executable
Hit any key!
file not found.
Insufficient memory.
Hit any key!
and action to be taken
Executable file xxx does not exist in the system

directory.
System directory is not specified in the declaration
made by environment variable PATH.
Main memory is insufficient.

Arrange setup so that
sufficient main memory can be acquired (500 KB or
more).
Error occurred
xxx file l/O error.
I/O error for the xxx file occurred during system

setup for the type of machine being used.
Not found I_COxxx.EXE.
The executable file of compiler

Install the system again.
Not found FLxxx.TBL.
No system setup file was found.

There is no machine type setting file that can be
used by the compiler. install the system again.
xxx process error.
Hit any key!
A3-1
while loading executable
file xxx.
was not found.
APPENDIX
2.
3 ERROR MESSAGES
ERRORS AT [LIST] COMMAND

Message
(compilation
Meaning
& printer)
and Dealing
Data table for target program list is making.
When source program list screen exit, writing

selected files into P INTERF.DAT.
OPEN ERROR P_INTERF.DAT

HIT ANY KEY...
There is no P INTERF.DAT
READ ERROR P_INTERF.DAT

HIT ANY KEY...
Reading error about P INTERF.DAT.
WRITE ERROR P
Writing error about P INTERF.DAT.
Memory is not sufficient

screen.
MAKING
DATA TABLE
WRITING
SELECTED
HIT ANY KEY...
FILE DATA
INTERF.DAT
in current directory.
NOT ENOUGH
KEY...
MEMORY.
FILE ALREADY
KEY...
SELECT.
HIT ANY
HIT ANY
- The number of selected
for source program list
file is out of range.
When any file are not selected as target file, you

cant move the cursor to target file list screen.
NOT FOUND IN CURRENT

DIRECTORY.
HIT ANY KEY...
Specified strings is not found.

(Search for file name)
NOT FOUND SPECIFIED

HIT ANY KEY...
Specified strings is not found.

(Search for PMC model)
NOT BE SELECTED
FILE, YET.
STRINGS.
NOT MODIFIED EXTEND, ALREADY

SELECTED FILES. HIT ANY KEY...
- You cant change the extension, when selected

are exist in select file list screen.
ABSOLUTE PATH MUST BE

SPECIFIED. HIT ANY KEY...
- Absolute path must be specified,

[DRIVE ] command.
INPUT ERROR DIRECTORY

L-IIT ANY KEY.
NAME.
with using
Specified directory name is not found, with using

[DRIVE] command.
A3-2
files
APPENDIX
3.
3 ERROR MESSAGES
EDITING (SOURCE PROGRAM SELECTION)

Message
Description
Insufficient
memory.
There is not sufficient main memory for loading an

executable file. An area of 500 KB or more is
required.
nsufficient
disk space.
Disk space was used up during file l/O.
\lot found xxx Set-up file.
System setup file xxx does not exist in the system

directory.
\lot found xxx PMC-OS file.
Software management
system directory.
(xx file I/O error.
I/O error occurred for file xxx during creation of a

source program file.
Invalid characters appear in the name, xxx, of the

input source program file.
inachine Kind And Input Program Not

>onsistency!
PMC series is xxx.
Machine type for the input program and the

machine type for the system (common table file) do
not agree. Perform proper system setup for the
type of machine being used.
lease Appoint Program Name
Neither the input program name nor the output

program name were specified when a source
program name was specified.
Output Program Already Exist!

All Right? (Y/N)
File already exists with the name specified for the

output program. To overwrite this file, enter 3.
To cancel, enter N.
nake New Source Program
Specified input/output program name does not

exist. A new file is being created.
lease Appoint Output Program Name
Specify an output program name.
Ippointed
Names of the input program and output program do

not agree and the input program does not exist.
Symbol and comment

contain error(s).
llegal xxx Source-program
name.
Input Program Not Exist
xx Symbol & Comment
data broken.
A3-3
file xxx does not exist in the
data in input program xxx
APPENDIX
3.1 Ladder Diagram
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Editing
Message
Description
-
ILLEGAL OPERATION
Only the RETURN key was pressed.

Address data input is incorrect.
Editing is not being performed
within the limits
when creating function instructions.
Function instructions
cannot be created while the
cursor is on the right-hand side.
EDIT BUFFER OVER
Editing buffer was exceeded
70LINE/l NET OVER
Editing cannot be continued due to the large size of

nets being edited. Make nets smaller.
Attempt was made to make a LADDER program of

more than 21,840 (24,000 when an EMS board is
used) steps.
SET COUNT OVER
Too many items in data table
INPUT INVALID
Non-numeric character(s) were specified for

[COPY], [INSLIN], ]C-UP], or [C-DOWN].
Input address was specified in a coil.
Data table contains invalid character(s).
Relay or coil address is not specified.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING
Relay or coil is required.
HORIZONTAL
Horizontal lines in LADDER diagram are

unconnected.
Vertical lines in LADDER diagram are incorrect.
Function
LADDER diagram is incorrect.
Incorrect
net found when [COPY][MOVE]
was
specified.
Error found on the screen during a search beyond
the screen.
LARGE NET APPEARED

256STEP/l
NET OVER
MNEMONIC
ADDRESS
BUFFER OVER
BIT NOTHING
VERTICAL
LINE ILLEGAL
LINE ILLEGAL
ARAMETER
-ADDER
during net creation.
NOTHING
ILLEGAL
ERROR NET FOUND
instruction
parameters
have not been set.
3ELAY OR COIL FORBIT
Unnecessary
LEASE
An incorrect
LLEGAL NETS CLEARED
Net which did not match the specified level of the

stack was found and deleted from the LADDER
program which was read in.
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
Specified
search.
-UNCTION
Specified function
function instruction
COMPLETE
NET
NOT FOUND
A3-4
relay or coil exists.

net was found.
address
was
not found
instruction
search.
during
was not found
address
during
APPENDIX
Message
STACK REGISTER
Description
OVER (8bit) ERR
3 ERROR MESSAGES
There are 9 or more continuous stacks in the

LADDER program which was read in.
There is not enough data area for the specified
FILE NOT READ
Disk space insufficient
DISK SPACE NOTHING
Error occurred
when reading data from a file.
FILE NOT WRITE
Error occurred
when writing data to a file.
NOT EXIST APPOINT
INSUFFICIENT
KEY!
DATA SIZE
MEMORY.
HIT ANY
file.
during writing
- Area to be used in editing could not be acquired.
3.2 Other Editing (Applicable to Title, Message,

and Comment, and I/O Module Editing)
Message
System Parameter,
Description
Symbol
File Read Error!
Hit Any Key
File could not be read.
File Write Error!
Hit any Key
File could not be written.
File I/O error occurred.
Not Enough Space
Work area for message editing could not be

acquired due to insufficient memory.
Same Symbol Data Exist
Symbol data already exists that is identical

symbol data that was input.
No Definition
Nonexistent
Data Save Error
Error occurred when symbol or comment

being registered in the work area.
Not Found Data Error
Required data could not be found during symbol

data lookup.
Input Data Invalid
There is an input error in the l/O module settings.
Appointed
group Not Exist
There is an error in the group that was input.
Appointed
Base Not Exist
There is an error in the base that was input.
Appointed
Slot Not Exist
There is an error in the slot that was input.
Appointed
ID Code Not Exist
There is an error in the ID code that was input.
Input Key Not Used
Undefined
Invalid Address Appoint
Specified
search.
Invalid Value
Out-of-bound value was input.

Data other than a numeric value was input.
Addresses
panel.
File I/O Error!
Hit Any Key
Address Appointed
Operate Panel Address
Error
A3-5
to
address was specified.

data was
key was specified.

address could not be found during
have not been set at the operation
APPENDIX
4.
3 ERROR MESSAGES
PRINTER
Description
Message
DATA INPUT ERROR
There is an error in the data input in the setup

screens such as the type selection screen for
diagram output.
NOT FIND FILE
Nonexistent file name was entered in the source

program selection screen.
Machine type codes in the common

the management file do not agree.
WRITE ERROR COMONDAT.TBL.

HIT ANY KEY...
Error occurred when a program name was written

to the common table file.
NOT EXIST AMROFTRP.DAT.

HIT ANY KEY...
AMROFTRP.DAT
exist.
WRITE ERROR AMROFTRP.DAT.

HIT ANY KEY...
Error occurred when the paper size was written to

AMROFTRP.DAT.
DATA INVALID AMROFTRP.DAT.

HIT ANY KEY...
Data in AMROFTRP.DAT
system program.
NOT ENOUGH MEMORY.

HIT ANY KEY...
Tried to acquire memory but there was no memory

area of a sufficient size.
FILE READ ERROR.

HIT ANY KEY...
There is no title file or system parameter file.

Either symbol or comment file could not be found
during LADDER diagram printing or cross-reference
printing.
Existing file could not be read in.
[BREAK]
SEL SWITCH OFF
SEL button of the printer is off.
DATA INVALID xxxxxxxX.

HIT ANY KEY...
Error occurred
data file.
Error occurred during opening of output file.

is not sufficient space on the disk.
OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED.

HIT ANY KEY...
No output file is specified

file.
OUTPUT FILE ALREADY

OVER WRITE (YIN)
EXIST.
File exists with the same name as the output file.

Enter Y to overwrite or N to cancel output.
WRITE ERROR OUTPUT

HIT ANY KEY...
FILE.
Error occurred during writing to the output file.

There is not sufficient space on the disk.
CANCEL FILE OUTPUT.

HIT ANY KEY...
[BREAK]
SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA

BROKEN. HIT ANY KEY...
Symbol and comment
DIFFERENT
MACHINE
CHANCEL PRINTER
HIT ANY KEY...
CODE.
OUTPUT.
OPEN ERROR OUTPUT

HIT ANY KEY...
FILE.
A3-6
table file and
(print format data file) does not
is incorrect.
Reinstall the
key was pressed during printing.
Turn it on.
during reading of the print format
There
in the print format data
key was pressed during file output.
data files are invalid.
APPENDIX
5. COMPILATION,
DECOMPILATION,
Message
3 ERROR MESSAGES
AND LINKING
Description
Error title 80
Character code not permitted

during title compilation.
by PMC was found
Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER).

Proceed to discompile using NO
System parameter that specifies use of the

operation panel was specified and there was an
invalid address specified in the external DI (KEY
data) address, external DO (LED) address, PMC
image address (DI), or PMC image address (DO).
This system parameter is forcibly turned off and
processing is continued (PMC-R series only).
Error message 60
Size of a message exceeded

the system.
the maximum
Error message 61

during message compilation.
by PMC was found
size for
Error symbol/comment
70
During compilation, the size of a symbol or

comment exceeded the maximum size for the
system.
71
During compilation, when the message area was

extended, symbol and comment data overflowed
the permitted ROM size.
72

during symbol compilation.
by PMC was found
73

during comment compilation.
by PMC was found
Error ladder 40
Error end 2
During LADDER compilation, the size of the

LADDER program exceeded the maximum size for
the system.
Error ladder 41
During LADDER compilation, when the symbol and

comment area was extended, the LADDER program
overflowed the permitted ROM size.
Error ladder 42
Error end 2
Invalid intermediate LADDER code was found

during LADDER compilation.
- Invalid LADDER object was found during LADDER
decompilation.
Error ladder 48
There is an invalid intermediate

intermediate code file.
Error end 25
There are no intermediate

There is no #LA file.
Error end 3
Number of partition codes exceeded
Error end 4
Execution time for the first level ladder exceeds the

PMC default value or the time set in the system
parameter.
A3-7
code in the
codes for the LADDER.
99.
APPENDIX
Description
Message
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Error end 17
END2 was found before END1 or END1 was not

found before the LADDER program ended.
Error end 18
END3 was found before END2 or END2 was not

found before the LADDER program ended.
Error end 19
END3 was not found before the LADDER program

ended.
(Does not include third level ommission mode.)
Error end 20
There is more than one ENDl.
Error end 21
There is more than one END2.
Error end 24
There is LADDER program code following
Error end 5
END1 exists in common
control mode.
Error end 6
control mode.
Error end 7
control mode.
Error end 11
END1 exists in jump control mode.
Error end 12
END2 exists in jump control mode.
Error end 13
END3 exists in jump control
Error end 8
COM exists in common
Error end 9
COME exists in common control mode in which the

number of coils is specified.
Error end 10
COME exists outside of common
Error end 14
JMP exists in jump control mode.
Error end 15
JMPE exists in jump control mode in which the

number of coils is specified.
Error end 16
JMPE exists outside of jump control mode.
Error end 27
WRT or WRT.NOT
function instruction
WRT.NOT.
Uarning end 29
Number of coils was specified in a machine type for

which the number of JMP coils cannot be specified.
The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE
specification mode) and processing is continued.
Narning end 30
Number of coils was specified in a machine type for

which the number of COM coils cannot be
specified.
The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE
specification mode) and processing is continued.
A3-8
END3
mode.
control mode.
control mode.
does not exist following

that requires WRT or
APPENDIX
Description
Message
Error link 90
3 ERROR MESSAGES
During linking, SO record was not found before the

end of the load module.
Different S record exists before the SO record.
Error link 92
During linking, the value for the record length area

in the S2 record was less than 4.
- S record other than SO, S2, S8, or S9 was found.
- No S8 or S9 record was found before the end of
the load module.
irror link 93
During linking, an attempt was made to load a load

module into an area other than the specified
address area.
\lot appoint source program name
No source program was specified

decompilation.
riot appoint ROM format file name
ROM format file name was not specified

compilation, decompilation or linking.
for
Jot appoint load module file name
No load module file name was specified
for linking.
Iut of memory
- Work area required for processing cannot be

acquired. This occurs because a device driver
which requires a large amount of memory is
resident, because data is too large, or for some
similar reason.
Jot enough space
Not enough space is available on disk for file

creation during compilation, decompilation or
linking.
:ile already exist

?enewal (Y/N)?
Name specified for ROM format file during

compilation already exists.
rogram already exist

?enewal (Y/N)?
- #CN file of the source program specified for

decompilation already exists.
qead error
#CN or #PA file of the source program specified

compilation does not exist.
Some sort of disk l/O error occurred.
or
for
ROM format file specified for decompilation or

linking does not exist.
Machine type of the ROM format file specified for
decompilation differs from the machine type
specified in the machine type setting.
Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.
lead error
Load module file specified for linking does not exist.

Some sort of disk l/O error occurred.
Vrite error
Vrite error
Iead error
for compilation
A3-9
APPENDIX
Description
Message
(System parameter)
Read error
3 ERROR MESSAGES
- Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.

(Note) When no #PA file exists for the specified
source program, the following message is displayed.
Cannot read source program j-l-j-\.
(Title) Read error

(Note) Error termination does not occur even if no
#TA file exists for the specified source program.
(I/O module)

#IO file exists for the specified source program.
(Message)
Symbol)
Read error
Read error

#SY file exists for the specified source program.
Read error
Comment)

#ME file exists for the specified source program.
Read error

#Cl file exists for the specified source program.
#LA file exists for the specified source program.
:Ladder) Read error
:Title) Write error
I/O module) Write error
Message)
Some sort of disk t/O error occurred.
Symbol) Write error
Comment)
Ladder) Write error
EXECUTING
System parameter)
Write error
Write error
Write error
Time-consuming
processing is being performed
during compilation, decompilation,
or linking.
(Note) This is not an error message.
A3-10
6.
COMPILE ERRORS
Compile errors can be divided into the following
Error:Processing
two basic groups:
is stopped because of a fatal error.
The processing
can not be continued
unless the cause of the error has been removed.
Warning: Processing
The processing
of a subprogram
for which a warning is output is stopped.
of other subprograms
is continued.
6.1 Path O/warning

001
- Editing sub-program
(Cause)
002
- Multiple
The editing of a subprogram
sub-program
(Cause)
003
has not completed
( Pn )
(Pn.$SJ)
has not been completed.
with same number exist ( Pn )
A ladder program and step sequence
program have identical
numbers.
. The title data which could not be display on the CNC was replaced with space code
(Cause)
The title data contains
a code which cannot be processed
(a Japanese
code,
for example).
004
* Illegal OP.PANEL(
(Cause)
Although
PARAMETER
). Proceed to discompile
the system parameter
using NO.
for the use of the FO machine operatorspanel
is set to YES, the DI/DO address data is not specified.
6.2 Path O/error/password

005
* Verification
(Cause)
006
007
error.
The password
is invalid.
* This word can not be used as password.Try

(Cause)
The entered password
(Action)
Enter another password.
* Only alphabetical
(Cause)
and numerical
A non-alphanumeric
another word.
is not valid.
characters
character
are allowed.
is specified.
6.3 Path O/error/others

008
- Not appoint source program.

(Cause)
009
No source program name is specified.
* Not appoint ROM format file name.

(Cause)
No ROM file name is specified.
A3-11
APPENDIX
010
- Not enough disk space.

(Cause)
011
* xxx(Title)
(Cause)
020
A write error occurred,
Retry the installation.
the cause is not known.
A ROM file having the same name exists.
(warning)
not found.
The xxx source program cannot be found.
- xxx(System
(Cause)
019
error may have occurred.
The source program may have been damaged or destroyed.
* xxx Source-program
(Cause)
018
An installation
-xxx file already exist.

(Cause)
017
name illegal.
The source program name is invalid.
* xxx write error.

(Cause)
016
free space in memory.
* xxx read error.

(Cause)
015
free space on the disk.
- xxx file not found.

(Cause)
014
There is insufficient
* xxx Source-Program
(Cause)
013
- Out of memory.
(Cause)
012
3 ERROR MESSAGES
parameter)
read error.
The system parameter
data of xxx may have been damaged
or destroyed.
read error.
The title data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.
* xxx(V0 module) read error.

(Cause)
The I/O module data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.
6.4 Path l/warning

001
- Not found Sub-program.

(Cause)
002
* Sub-program
(Cause)
003
An empty file was compiled.
number is different
The specified
program number does not agree with a stored programnumber.
* There is no SP instruction
(Cause)
The specified
Alternatively,
from Source-program.
at the head of the subprogram.
subprogram
does not begin with the SP instruction.
the data of the specified
A3-12
file has been damaged or destroyed.
APPENDIX
004
* SP instruction
(Cause)
005
007
* Specified
(Cause)
008
Data remained
- There is an undefined
(Cause)
A code of other than a step sequence
value for a parameter

The parameter
instruction
of the xxxx instruction
of the xxxx instruction
is stored.
is outside the range.
falls outside the predetermined
range.
for the xxxx instruction.
The program number specified
for the xxxx instruction
falls outside the
range.
- An illegal label number is specifed for the xxxx instruction.

(Cause)
The label number specified

predetermined
for the xxxx instruction
falls outside the
range.
- The label of xxxx is used twice or more.

(Cause)
011
after SPE instruction.
instruction.
predetermined
010
at the bottom of the subprogram.
* An illegal program number is specified

(Cause)
009
in the subprogram.
Data was already present before SP instruction.
* There is no SPE instruction

(Cause)
006
was detected
3 ERROR MESSAGES
A label number is duplicated
* The number of label exceeds

(Cause)
within a single subprogram.
the limit.
An attempt was made to exceed the maximum
number of labels that can be
defined in a single subprogram.

012
* Illegal DSTEP
(Cause)
instruction
The DLBL instruction

instruction
013
014
was detected,
* LADDER execution
is not defined.
Alternatively,
of the DSTEP
is duplicated.
time at the 1st level is too large.
(Cause)
The overall execution
(Action)
Reduce the size of the program of the first level.
* The coil number specification

(Cause)
the definition
The parameter
time of the first level exceeds
of JMP instruction
of the JMP instruction
the predetermined
is not allowed.
limit.
(number of coils to be jumped)
is other
than 0.
(Action)
015
Specify 0 for the parameter.
- The coil number specification

(Cause)
The parameter
of COM instruction
of the COM instruction
other than 0.
(Action)
Specify 0 for the parameter.
A3-13
is not allowed.
(number of coils to be controlled)
is
APPENDIX
016
017
3 ERROR MESSAGES
* There is no LADDER program.

(Cause)
The level 3/subprogram
is empty.
(Action)
Add an END3 or SPSPE
instruction.
- The symbol data which could not be displayed
on the CNC was replaced with space
code.
(Cause)
018
The symbol contains
- The comment
a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.
data which could not be displayed
code.
(Cause)
019
The comment
contains
* The message data which could not be displayed
code.
(Cause)
The message contains
6.5 Path l/error

020
* Not found FLCOMMON.MSG

(Cause)
021
An installation
* FLxxxxx.TBL
(Cause)
024
An installation
* Insufficient
(Cause)
file.
- Not found FLxxxxx.TBL

(Cause)
023
- Not found FLCOSTEP.MSG

(Cause)
022
An installation
file.
Set-up file.
Set-up file broken.
An installation
disk space.
free space on the disk, preventing
data from being output
to the file.
(Action)
025
data from the disk.
* LADDER program exists beyond END instruction.

(Cause)
026
Delete any unnecessary
A program is specified

(Cause)
after the END instruction.
the limit.
The number of labels used exceeds
the limit (up to 256 for each
level/subprogram).
027
- There is no label of Lxxxx.

(Cause)
The jump destination
(Action)
Define the label with the LBL instruction.
label for the JMPB instruction
A3-14
is not defined.
APPENDIX
028
- The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more.

(Cause)
029
In a subprogram,
by the SP instruction.
after the END1 instruction.
a program is specified
cannot be used excluding
The use of the END1 instruction
within level 2 or 3.
the 2nd level.

the 3rd level.

was attempted
cannot be used.
The use of the END instruction
* Program number is different

(Cause)
the 1st level.
was attempted
after the SPE instruction.
was attempted
* END instruction
(Cause)
042
Within level 2, a program is specified
* END3 instruction
(Cause)
041
is not preceded
. END2 instruction
(Cause)
040
was detected.
The SPE instruction
* END1 instruction
(Cause)
039
is not SP.
* LADDER program exists beyond SPE instruction.

(Cause)
038
of a subprogram
- LADDER program exists beyond END2 instruction.

(Cause)
037
at the head of the program.
The first instruction

(Cause)
036
The program of level 1 or 2 is empty.
. Illegal SPE instruction

(Cause)
035
A program of level 3 does not end with an END3 instruction.
* There is no SP instruction
(Cause)
034
* There is no LADDER program.

(Cause)
033
- There is no END3 instruction.

(Cause)
032
of the label is duplicated.
* There is no END2 instruction.

(Cause)
031
The definition
* There is no END1 instruction.

(Cause)
030
3 ERROR MESSAGES
The subprogram
parameter
was attempted
within level 1.
from program name.
file number does not agree with the number specified
of the SP instruction.
A3-15
in the
APPENDIX
043
044
- The size of LADDER program is too large.

(Cause)
The object size of the ladder program exceeds
(Action)
Reduce the size of the ladder program.
* The range controled

(Cause)
045
047
(Action)
by COM instruction
A COM instruction
Terminate
is beyond END2 instruction.

before the COME instruction.
was encountered
was detected
limit.
was encountered
An END3 instruction
- COM instruction
(Cause)
by COM instruction
the predetermined
was encountered
An END2 instruction

(Cause)
by COM instruction
An END1 instruction

(Cause)
046
3 ERROR MESSAGES
in the COM mode.
was encountered
control with the COME instruction,
then restart control with the
COM instruction.
048
- Illegal COME instruction

(Cause)
049
050
(Cause)
052
* JMP instruction
was detected
(Cause)
A JMP instruction
(Action)
Terminate
before the JMPE instruction.
was encountered
of JMP instruction
An END3 instruction
was encountered
of JMP instruction
An END2 instruction
- The destination
cannot be found before the COME instruction.
of JMP instruction
An END1 instruction
. The destination
(Cause)
051
The COM instruction
* The destination
(Cause)
was detected.
is beyond
END3 instruction.
was encountered
in the JMP mode.
was encountered
control with the JMPE instruction,
then restart control with the JMP
instruction.
053
* Illegal JMPE instruction

(Cause)
054
The JMP instruction
cannot be found before the JMPE instruction.

(Cause)
055
was detected.
* LADDER program is broken.

(Cause)
No instructions
can be recoonized.
A3-16
APPENDIX
056
* There is no coil in the functional

(Cause)
No output instruction
instruction
3 ERROR MESSAGES
which needs the coil.
is specified
after a functional
instruction
which requires
output.
057
* SP instruction
(Cause)
058
061
* Specified
(Cause)
within the main program.
was attempted
can not be used in the subprogram.
was attempted
within a subprogram.
- END3 instruction
(Cause)
062
The use of the SPE instruction
* END2 instruction
(Cause)
was attempted
can not be used in the main program.
* END1 instruction
(Cause)
060
The use of the SP instruction
. SPE instruction
(Cause)
059
can not be used in the main program.
was attempted
value for a parameter
was attempted
of the functional
An illegal value has been specified
instruction
is outside the range.
for the parameter
of a functional
instruction.
063
* An illegal program number is specified

(Cause)
for the CALL instruction.
A non-P address has been specified
for the parameter
of the CALL
instruction.
064
An illegal program number is specified

(Cause)
for the CALLU instruction.
for the parameter
of the CALLU
instruction.
065
. An illegal program number is specified

(Cause)
066
. There is an undefined
(Cause)
068
(Cause)
069
by the selected
A subprogram
* SP instruction
(Cause)
instruction
which is not
model.
at the bottom of the subprogram.
does not end with the SPE instruction.
was detected
An SP instruction
of the SP instruction.
instruction.
* There is no SPE instruction

(Cause)
for the parameter
An attempt was made to use a basic or functional

supported
067
for the SP instruction.
in the subprogram.
was encountered
by COM instruction
An SPE instruction
is beyond SPE instruction.
was encountered
A3-17
before an SPE instruction.
before a COME instruction.
APPENDIX
070
* The destination
(Cause)
071
* CALL instruction
(Cause)
072
074
076
077
- The range controled

(Cause)
078
. The range controled

(Cause)
079
(Cause)
before a JMPE instruction.
is beyond SP instruction.
was encountered
by COM instruction
is beyond CALL instruction.
was encountered
by COM instruction
A CALLU instruction
- The destination
is beyond SP instruction.
was encountered
A CALL instruction
is beyond CALLU instruction.
was encountered
of JMPB instruction
is beyond COM instruction.
An attempt was made to execute
the JMPB instruction
inside, or from the inside to the outside,
080
* JMPC instruction
(Cause)
081
of common
from the outside to the
line control.
cannot be used in the main program.
The use of the JMPC instruction
. An illegal label number is specified

(Cause)
is beyond END instruction.
was encountered
of JMP instruction
An SP instruction
the 2nd level.
is beyond END instruction.
by COM instruction
An SP instruction
was attempted
was encountered
An END instruction
* The destination
(Cause)
by COM instruction
of JMP instruction

(Cause)
was attempted
An END instruction
the 2nd level.
The use of the CALLU instruction
- The destination
(Cause)
075
The use of the CALL instruction
. The range controled

(Cause)
is beyond SPE instruction.
was encountered
* CALLU instruction
(Cause)
073
of JMP instruction
An SPE instruction
3 ERROR MESSAGES
was attempted
for the JMPB instruction.
A non-L address has been specified
as the parameter
of the JMPB
instruction.
082
* An illegal label number is specified

(Cause)
083
- An illegal label number is specified

(Cause)
for the LBL instruction.

as the parameter
of the LBL instruction.
for the JMPC instruction.

instruction.
A3-18
as the parameter
of the JMPC
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
6.6Path 2/warning
001
* Unreferenced
(Cause)
subprogram
A subprogram
Pxxxx.
which is not called by a CALL or CALLU instruction
is
encountered.
6.7 Path 2/error

002
* Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment

(Cause)
The total size of the message,

predetermined
003
the
limit.
The total size of the message,

data exceeds
symbol, comment,
the predetermined

(Cause)
the limit. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA
LEVEL2, or LEVEL3 exceeds
limit.
* The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA

(Cause)
An identical
ladder, and step sequence
limit.
The total number of labels used within LEVELl,

the predetermined
006
data exceeds
- Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment + ladder + step sequence

(Cause)
005
The total size of the ladder and step sequence

predetermined
004
symbol, and comment data exceeds the
limit.
* Data too large. ( ladder + step sequence

(Cause)
L address is specified
for two or more labels in LEVELl,
LEVEL2,
or LEVELB.
007
* Program exists beyond END inctruction.

(Cause)
008
is followed
by another program.
label of JMPC cannot be found in LEVEL2.#LA.
The destination
label of JMPC is found between
COM and COME.
- The label of Lxxxx to refer exists in another level. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA
(Cause)
011
The destination
* The label of Lxxxx exists in the COM mode. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA
(Cause)
010
an END instruction
- There is no label of Lxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA

(Cause)
009
A program including
( Pxxx.#LA
The destination
- There is no subprogram
(Cause)
The subprogram
label of JMPC is found in LEVELl.#LA
Pxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA
or LEVEL3.#LA.
to be called by CALL or CALLU cannot be found or is empty.
A3-19
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
7. INPUT AND OUTPUT

Description
Message
INVALID RECEIVE DATA
Data other than IS0 codes was sent.
TIME OUT ERROR
During reception processing, a command was sent

from the PC, but there was no response within a
certain period of time. Confirm for the receiving
side that the power is on, settings are correct,
cables are properly connected, parameters (baud
rate and stop bits) are correct, and that
CONFIG.SYS is correct.
xxxx.DAT file format error.

4it any key
No xxx.DAT files exist in the directory containing

FAPT LADDER. Install the system again.
VOT EXIST APPOINT

=lLE
Specified ROM format file does not exist on the

disk [write and verification for the ROM writer,
download and comparison for the PMC].
ALREADY EXIST FILE!

3JPERSCRlPTlON
REAL FILE? (Y/N)
Specified file already exists [read operation for the

ROM writer, upload for the PMC]. To overwrite,
enter Y. To change the name of the file, enter
N.
3OW PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT

-ILE
There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified

ROM format file [write operation for the ROM
writer].
3OM PARITY WARNING OF

4PPOINT FILE. CONTINUE TO
TRANSFER? (Y/N)

ROM format file [download for the PMC]. To
download in this state, enter Y. To cancel, enter
N.
3OM PARITY WARNING

APPOINT FILE

ROM format file [read operation for the ROM writer,
upload for the PMC).
NAITING FOR RECEIVE. WHEN TO

STOP. PUSH BREAK KEY
No data was received during transmission [read

operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC].
Press the break key to interrupt processing, then
check cable connections and the power supply, etc.
of the sending side.
NITIALIZE
Work file is being created during upload from PMC

(PMC-N).
Checking ROM data parity [write operation for the
ROM writer, download for the PMCJ. Wait while
processing is performed.
ROM FORM
OF
EXECUTE
4OM ID UNMATCH
ERROR
Inserted cassette or module is incorrect

present machine type (PMC-N, 431.
:ILE OPEN ERROR
Cannot open specified
ROM format file.
:ILE CLOSE ERROR
Cannot close specified
ROM format file.
ILE WRITE ERROR
Cannot write to specified
A3-20
for the
ROM format file.
APPENDIX
Description
Message
IFILE READ
ERROR
I-
I-
ROM FILE > ROM ERROR
IROM
FILE FORMAT
ERROR
WORK FILE INITIALIZE
ERROR
I-
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Cannot read from specified
ROM format file.
During writing, the specified ROM format file could

not be fully written to ROM (cassette or module).
ROM file format is incorrect.
There is not enough space on the disk for the work

file area (512K bytes) [PMC-N].
ROM SET ERROR
EROM is installed with incorrect
EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR
EROM is faulty.
Cannot write to EROM because it has not yet been

erased.
EROM has not yet been erased.
IWIIT.5
orientation.
DATA SEND ERROR
- The number of the sent data items does not match

that of the received data items.
PARITY ERROR
A parity error occurred
The ROM writer is being used.
ROW TYPE ERROR
Incorrect
PORT ERROR (OVER RUN)
Overrun (determined by the status check

information from I/O ports)
PORT ERROR (PARITY)
Parity error (determined by the status check

Framing error (determined by the status check

Break interrupt error (determined by the status

check information from I/O ports)
Time-out error (determined

Data transfer error (determined

information from l/O ports)
The system timer malfunctions.

Update the text file
(FL10 AT.DAT) information.
For details, see the
comments of the file.
RUNNING
WRITER!
ERROR
PORT ERROR (FRAMING)
PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT)
TIMER SET/CANCEL
ERROR
A3-21
during data transfer.
type of ROM
by the status check
by the status check
8.
MNEMONIC
EDITING
(System
Parameters >
Message
Description
Invalid qualifier.
System parameter
character(s).
Unknown
Data number was specified

the system parameters.
that does not exist in
Illegal value.
System parameter
contains
invalid numerical
Out of value.
System parameter
data.
contains
out-of-bound
Expected
a multiple of 5.
System parameter required to be a multiple of 5 is

not a multiple of 5.
Expected
a multiple of 2.
System parameter required to be a multiple of 2 is

not a multiple of 2.
Illegal character(s).
System parameter
Data not found.
There is no system parameter data.
System parameter contains a line of data that

exceeds the maximum allowed number of
characters.
Illegal data number.
System parameter contains invalid data number(s).
Too long strings.
System parameter contains character

exceeds the maximum length.
Illegal address
System parameter
contains
Expected parameter(s)
System parameter
is missing or incomplete.
Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER)

Proceed to discompile using NO.
As OP.PANEL (parameter) of the system

parameters is invalid, it is assumed to be NO
and operation continues.
data number.
Too many characters
in 1 line.
A3-22
is followed
contains
by invalid
data.
numerical
invalid character(s).
data that
an invalid address.
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
<Title Data B
Description
Message
Invalid qualifier.
Title data is followed
Unknown
Specified
Too long strings.
Length of title data exceeded
Include KANA or KANJI character(s).
- Title data contains
m-type characters.
Illegal character(s)
Title data contains
invalid character
Data not found.
There is no title data.
Title data contains a line of data that exceeds the

maximum allowed number of characters.
Data identifier
data number.
Too many characters
in 1 line.
Illegal title number.
(Symbol
data identifier
the maximum
number specified
Description
data not found.
number does not exist.

length.
data.
is incorrect.
and Comment Data >
Message
SYMBOL
by invalid character(s).
Comment
Invalid qualifier.
Symbol and comment

character(s).
Invalid character
comment data.
Illegal address.
Invalid address was specified

comment data.
Redefinition
of address data.
Symbol and comment

address data.
Redefinition
of symbol data.
Mnemonic
data.
Comment data which contains m-type characters

was converted without the m-type character
conversion option (J option).
There is no symbol or comment
Symbol or comment data contains a line of data

that exceeds the maximum allowed number of
characters.
Comment data not found.
Only symbol data was converted
Symbol or comment
Only symbol or comment

the address.
Mnemonic
bounds.
Include KANA or KANJI character(s)

comment data.
Data not found.

Too long characters
Out of address limits.
in 1 line.
data not found.
in
A3-23
data exists, but there is no symbol data.

data is followed by invalid
data was specified
in symbol and
in symbol and
data contain identical
symbol data contains
data contains
identical
symbol
data.
for the address.
data was converted
for
an address that is out of
(LADDER
Data >
Message
Description
Basic command
invalid qualifier.
LADDER data is followed
Expected
Function
instruction
has no parameters.
Not enough parameter(s).
Function
instruction
is missing parameters.
Too many parameters.
Function
instruction
has too many parameters.
Illegal address.
Unspecifiable
Out-of-bound
Undefined
Data contains
an undefined
Unspecifiable
function
Cannot specify byte address on basic

instruction.
Byte address was specified
Cannot specify the input address with

coil.
Address
coil.
Cannot specify the odd address.
Odd address was specified

cannot be odd.
Illegal value of parameter.
Numeric parameter of a function

contains an incorrect value.
Dut of parameter
Numeric parameter of a function instruction

contains a value that exceeds the maximum.
Cannot specify bit address of

oarameter.
Bit address was specified in the byte address

parameter of a function instruction.
Cannot specify the input address.
Address which cannot be output was specified

the output address parameter of a function
instruction.
Cannot specify the address prohibited

Jsing as parameter.
Address which cannot be specified as a parameter

was specified as a function instruction address
parameter.
llegal address of parameter.
Invalid address was specified in a function

instruction address parameter.
llegal value of parameter.
Invalid value was specified

instruction data table.
3ut of value in data table.
Out-of-bound value was specified

instruction data table.
_ogical product remains in register(s).
LADDER data contains

output.
_ogical operated with unused

,egister(s).
Operation was performed with a register which was

not input in LADDER data.
Expected
address.
parameter(s).
instruction.
Invalid functions
name.
value.
A3-24
has no address.
command.
instruction
was specified.
in a basic command.
which cannot be output was specified
in a
for an address that
instruction
for
in the function
in the function
a register which is not
APPENDIX
Description
Message
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Not enough control condition(s).
insufficient.
Too many control conditions.
Too many function
Expected
There are no function
Data not found.
There is no LADDER data.
Unexpected
address.
- Address was specified

require an address.
Unexpected
parameter(s).
Parameter was specified for a function

that does not require parameters.
Unexpected
control condition(s).
Basic command was specified for a function

instruction that does not require control conditions.
Unexpected
coil(s).
Coil was specified for a function

does not require coils.
Mnemonic data contains a line of characters

exceeds that maximum allowed number of
characters.
3ut of address limits of parameter.
bound address.
parameter
llegal address in data table.
address.
data table contains
an invalid
3ut of address limits in data table.
bound address.
data table contains
an out-of-
control condition(s).
Too many characters
in 1 line.
A3-25
control conditions
instruction
are
control conditions.
instruction
control conditions.
in a section that does not
instruction
instruction
contains
that
that
an out-of-
APPENDIX
8.5 Mnemonic
Editing
<Message
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Data>
Description
Message
Too long strings.
Length of message data exceeds

allowed length.
Illegal address.
Invalid address was specified

setting address.
Include KANA or KANJI character(s).
Message data contains
Invalid qualifier.
Message data is followed
Data not found.
There is no message data.
Message data contains a line of characters

characters.
Out of address limits of address.
Message
address.
setting address contains
Message
data contains
Not found data at $ address.
Mnemonic
mnemonic
Cannot convert
PMC series.
Specified machine
not agree.
Too many characters
in 1 line.
in case of specified
A3-26
the maximum
for the message
m-type characters.
that
an out-of-bound
invalid character
data.
message data was not specified.

address data was specified.
type and data machine
Only
type do
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
<I/O Module Data>
Message
Description
Invalid qualifier.
I/O module data is followed
Illegal address.
Invalid address specified

address.
Out-of-bound
address.
Not found group data.
l/O module data has no group data.
Illegal value in group data.
Group data of I/O module data contains

value.
an invalid
Out of value in group data.
Group data of I/O module data contains

bound value.
an out-of-
Not found base data.
l/O module data has no base data.
811egalvalue in base data.
Base data of I/O module data contains

value.
an invalid
Dut of value in base data.
Base data of l/O module data contains

bound value.
an out-of-
Vat found slot data.
I/O module data has no slot data.
llegal value in slot data.
Slot data of l/O module data contains

value.
an invalid
3ut of value in slot data.
Slot data of I/O module data contains

bound value.
an out-of-
\lot found module name.
I/O module data has no module name.
nvalid module name.
I/O module data has an invalid module name.
Cannot specify output module at input

Iddress.
Output module is specified

the l/O module data.
Cannot specify input module at output

address.
Input module is specified

the I/O module data.
2annot specify same group, base and

;lot.
Group, base, and slot data of I/O module data have

the same data.
rot.9 value of base and slot is over.
Sum of base and slot data of I/O module data

exceeds the maximum allowed value.
Data not found.
There is no I/O module data.
I/O module data contains a line of characters

characters.
Specified machine type and conversion

machine type do not agree.
Too many characters
in 1 line.
2annot convert in case of specified

MC series.
A3-27
for l/O module data
address specified
for I/O module data
at the input address of
at the output address of
data
that
APPENDIX
9. STEP SEQUENCE
3 ERROR MESSAGES
EDITING ERRORS
Description
Error message
Illegal source code
The input file data is illegal.
Symbol file read error
The symbol data cannot be read.
Comment
The comment
file read error
Title file read error
The title data cannot be read.
Memory allocation
Insufficient
data cannot be read.
Sufficient
error
memory space cannot be allocated.
disk space
free space on the specified
Buffer size over
The program is too large.
Number of nest branch too big
The program contains
too many branches.
Number of branch too big
too many branches.
Size of table buffer too big
Unconnected
step sequence
diagram
A line is not connected.

too many branches.
Parallel branch error
too many branches.
Syntax error
A syntax error is found.
Step line syntax error
A step line contains
Transition
A transition
Selected
branch error
line syntax error
drive.
an illegal code.
line contains
an illegal code.
Cannot insert
Cannot make diagram
The wrong soft key was pressed to change an

element.
Horizontal
The point at which a branch must be closed is left as

a horizontal line.
fine illegal
Jump forward check error
The jump destination
File open error
The specified
File close error
The file cannot be closed.
Check incomplete
Chart sequence
error
cannot be found.
file cannot be found.
The source program contains
error
The sequence
is incorrect.
Chart start code error
The beginning
of the sequence
Chart end code error
The end of the sequence
Jump close error
An instruction
-horizontal line duplicate

3ranch unconnected
3ranch sequence
error
error
error
The sequence
A branch is not closed.

A branch is invalid.
A3-28
is incorrect.
is incorrect.
is encountered
is incorrect.
an illegal code.
after a label jump.
APPENDIX
Error message
Description
Cannot copy diagrams
Cannot move diagrams
Illegal specified
The corresponding
position
Strings not Found

Step Number Duplicate
Error
The specified
subprogram.
step number is being used by another
label is used in two or more positions.
The specified
Cannot delete temporary
file
The temporary
cannot be found.
character
Error
name exists
coordinates
The specified
Label Number Duplicate
Same sub-program
3 ERROR MESSAGES
string cannot be found.
file cannot be deleted.
A file having the same name, but a different

exists.
Input invarid
The specified address data exceeds

predetermined range.
Expected
No subprogram
address
Sub-program
of nest branch too big
extension,
the
number is specified.
An attempt was made to nest a program to a level of

eight or more, by using the [ZOOM] key.
A3-29
4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING
(PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3
ONLY)
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING

(PMC=RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)
The PMCRA3/RB3RC3
When the sub-program

unbroken
sequence
The sub-program
more modules
The modular
has special sub-program
function
functions
that allow modular programming.
is used, a Ladder program,
which
must have been coded as an
before, can be coded in units of sub-programs.
function
enables
FAPT LADDER
to manage a program
by dividing
it into two or
(modular programming.)
programming
is accomplished
by the ladder diagram
a module
to a program
In the later part of this book, the terms module
and source
module from a program
and connect
editing
function
and the compile
to produce
function
to connect
modules.
: Logical unit of a program.
0 Module
program.
A module
program
mean the following:
does not always
correspond
to a sub-
A single module can be the first or second half of the main program
or a group of sub-programs.
l
Source program
1.
: Physical
unit of a program stored on a floppy disk or hard disk
LADDER DIAGRAM
(1) Dividing
l
EDITING FUNCTION
a source program
The function
copies or moves a part of a source
which a name is specified.

0 The function
produces
a module from a program.
Source program
Module
A4-1
program
and creates
another
program,
to
APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING

(PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3
ONLY)
(2) Combining
source programs
The function
The function
combines
all or part of a source
program
to another
source
program
that is
being edited.
combines
a module (program) to another program.

Module
Source program
Source program
Source program
. . .. .. *..*
_....
*
...
Sections
For the details of (1) and (2), see (8) Copying

5.1.2, Ladder
2.
......
Edit
.
. ...*.
.
...
<.....
of a Sequence
Program
in Section
Diagram Editing.
COMPILE FUNCTION
(1) Combining
l
modules
The function
0 The
files
extension
compiles
a batch of separately
to be combined
edited programs and unites the programs.
can be specified
in a control
statement
(text
file having
the
#LS).
0 The control statement

0 The function
is coded by the [LIST] command
can handle modules
on the compile or print screen.
(files) made up of any units (nets or sub-programs).

Control statement
(MAINFILE.#LS)
File selection
MAINFILE.#LA
1Main program
SUBFILEl.#LA
1Sub-program
1 1
SUBFILE2.#LA
I Sub-program
MAINFILE
SUBFILEI
SUBFILE
.
SUBFlLEn
,
I
I
.
.
ROM data
Main program
Sub-program
Sub-program
.
.
SUBFILEn.#LA
Sub-program
For details, see Section 5.3, Compilation.
A4-2
APPENDIX
(2)
Control statement
4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING
(PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3
ONLY)
(.#LS file)
The .#LS file is a MS-DOS
text file in which the source programs
the order in which they are combined.
Sample control statement
See the following
to be combined
are coded in
example.
(File name = MAIN.#LS)
Parameters,
symbols,
comments,
the title, and other data, except data for the ladder, from the
first program are used for the second and later programs.
(3) Advantages
0 Programs can be edited quickly and easily because small source programs
are handled.
0 A source
purpose
program
changing
its name.
Program
in the control
statement
can
be used
for another
only
Program 2
ESub-program
..................
A4-3
by
APPENDIX
5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING
PROCEDURE
APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING

(FOR THE FS20)
This appendix
describes
how to use the BOOT SYSTEM
varies from one CNC model to another.

the respective
PROCEDURE
for the FS20.
The operating
For other models such as the FSlSB
manuals.
AS-1
(FOR THE FSZO)
procedure
(PMC-NA),
refer to
APPENDIX
5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING
PROCEDURE
(FOR THE FSZO)
Hold down the [NEXT] key and a soft key

at its immediate left simultaneously,
and
switch on the NC.
The IPL screen will
appear (00).
The
(NEXT]
(0
@
@
entry
procedure
is described
below
to 0).
Hold dowrf both simultaneously.

Switch on the power.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

'liB:i';~~f~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~,
2. SYSTEM'DATA
3. SYSTEM DATA
CHECK
DELETE
*** MESSAGE l **
SELECT MODE AND HIT
[SELECT] [ YES
I[
KEY.
[SELECT]
~0
11
1 [ DOWN ]
up
'SYSTEM
Place the cursor on the

desired
filename
using
[UP] or [DOWN],
then
press [SELECT].
DATA
LOADING
FILE DIRECTORY
~~~~~~~~
TEST. DAT
END
*** MESSAGE
SELECT FILE
l **
AND HIT
=-I
[SELECT] [ YES
Press [YES] or [NO].
Place the cursor on 1. SYSTEM

DATA LOADING
using
[UP]
or
[DOWN], then press [SELECT].
1[
[SELECT]
~0
1[
up
KEY.
1 [ DOWN
I
Cy
*** MESSAGE ***

LOADING OK ? HIT
(SELECT][ YES
[YES] OR
][
NO
[NO] KEY.
][
UP
][ DOWN ] I
/
I
*** MESSAGE ***
HIT [SELECT] KEY.
ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE
[SELECT] I YES
I[ NO
]I
I[
UP
A file in a format that cannot be

handled by the BOOT SYSTEM
was selected.
DOWN
I
:\
LOADING
j
COMPLETE.
HIT
[SELECT]
KEY.
End of entry
[SELECT] [ YES
AS-2
I[
NO
I[
up
I[
DOWN
APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY

(FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3,
NB, AND QC)

(FOR THE PMGRAlIRA3,
NB, AND QC)
If a CNC or off-line
programmer
operating
program to a memory card, the sequence

programmer
operating
on an upgraded
edition
is used to output
a sequence
program may not be able to be input to a CNC or off-line
on an earlier edition (see below).
Series 4080, edition 06
A08B-XXXX-J502,
A08B-XXXX-J501,
editions
editions
06.3 and later

06.2 and later

AO8B-XXXX-J502,
editions
06.1 and later
Off-line programmer
CNC
: Operating
: Operating
Cases 0,
0,
0,
on an upgraded edition
f-
-+
: Unconditionally
+___
___+
: Possible under some condition
on an earlier edition
and 0,
where
input/output
is possible
below.
A6-1
under
some condition,
possible
are explained

(FOR THE PMGRAVRA3,
NB, AND QC)
Cases 0
and @
output
No special operation
is required.
Input
Use the BOOT SYSTEM
To output
to enter a sequence
program.
Case 0
Output
a sequence
program,
specify
PMC l/O SETUP screen shown below.

value (put in effect by pressing
format
as 1 (S-format)
on the
Note that for the output format, the default
soft key [INIT])
PMC I/O PROGRAM

CHANNEL
DEVICE
~~~~4~~~1
the output
is 0 (binary).
MONIT STOP
= 1
= M-CARD
_ "RITE
DATA KIND = LADDER

FILE NO. =
( #NAME )
[ EXEC l[CANCEL][WRITE
][ READ ](COMPARJ
[DELETE][ LIST ][FORMAT][
I [SETUP ]
PMC SETUP M-CARD
MONIT STOP
:.,..
:,.......i
OUTPUT FORhfAT(pROGRAM) +$$:_ii;
(O:BINARY,l:S-FORMAT)
[INPUT ] [
Input
To enter
a sequence
program,
II
select
I[
F6 (input/output),
1 [ INIT 1
then
F3 (Handy
File &
memory card) from the main menu screen.
Case @
output
Output a sequence
program
F4 (FLOPPY CASSETTE
Input
Select F6 (input/output),
to a memory
ADAPTER
A6-2
F6 (input/output),
then
& Handy File) from the main menu.
then F5 (memory
program can be read as usual.
card by selecting
card) from the main menu; a sequence
APPENDIX
APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS
7 CAUTIONS
FOR USING THE 0:s
FOR USING THE O/S
(1) MS-DOS version 05.0
DOSKEY.COM
When DOSKEY.COM
is used in insertion
Insert mode specification
Be
careful
especially
mode, pay attention
to the following:
DOSKEY.COM/INSERT
when
the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
contains
a command
line
of
DOSKEY.COM.
When
DOSKEY.COM
is used in insert
mode on the PC-9801,
the symptom
described
below occurs.
When an attempt
is made to move the cursor to 3) Select conversion
on the conversion
to mnemonic
screen,
the cursor
disappears,
data type
but the desired
data type is selected normally.

This symptom
does not occur on the IBM/PC or compatible.
[Measure]
Use DOSKEY.COM
(2) Windows
in replace mode.
3.1
SMARTDRV.EXE
When SMARTDRV.EXE
is used with write caching
Enable write caching
Be
careful
especially
enabled, pay attention
to the following:
SMARTDRV.EXE
when
the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
contains
a command
line
of
SMARTDRV.EXE.
When SMARTDRV.EXE
l
The following
is used with write caching enabled,
the following
symptom
occurs.
alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer, disabling
entry.
Alarm message
Received
data invalid
OVERRUN
(for the PC-9801)

(for the IBM/PC and compatible)
[Measure]
When SMARTDRV.EXE
is used, disable write caching
a.
Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists
b.
Drive where ROM format files are created
A7-1
for the following
disk drives:
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
APPENDIX 8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)
This function
the message
is a tool(CHGMES)
for easy changing
data incorporating
sequence
program of FANUC PMCs .

This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file.
The message
data in CNC(PMC)
can be replaced
with this extracted
data, if both message
data
size are the same.

This tool is usefull when it is necessary
example:
Supporting
multi-lingual
to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For
message.)
c Method of Message size Check >

(1) Memory map information
is output when the source program is compiled.
Please check each symbol top address of the original

changing
changing
ladder and the ladder for
to be the same value.
(2) This tool for changing

execute
the message
data execute
with the compare
file,
then this tool
the same check of the message data size.
c Applied PMCs >

FANUC PMC-MODEL
1.
PROCEDURE
RAlIRA2!RA3iRB/RB2/RB3/RBWRC/RC3/RC4/NB
OF THE MESSAGE
DATA CHANGING
(1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the memory card or
floppy disk on the PMC input!output
(2) Input
the
CHGMES
file(handy
operation
command
with
the message
data for changing
and dummy
ladder
file format).
(3) The message
data on the NC is changed
input/output
([I!01 screen).
2.
([I/O] screen).
operation
OPERATING
It is necessary
by loading
the output
file of this tool on the PMC
ENVIRONMENT
to use following
operating
environment
for this tool.
(1) Memory
235Kbytes
or more main memory
is required
when activating
this function
without
FAPT
LADDER.
(2) Temporary
files
This function
generates
is set by environmental
This
function
environmental
It is necessary
$TMPD.T-,
generate
following
temporary
variable TMP
temporary
variable TMP
(These temporary
which
of PC-DOS.
files
on the
route
directory
of current
is not set.
to free max.65KBytes
$TMPW.T
files for work area on the drive/directory
disk space for these temporary
(= 00-99)
files are deleted by this function
A8-1
automatically.)
files.
drive
when
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
(3) Hard disk

It is necessary
to use following
disk space.
68KBytes
For installation
To generate temporary
65KBytes
files
(In case of environmental
variable TMP
of PC-DOS set on hard disk)

TOTAL
3.
133KBytes
INSTALLATION
Please
copy
EXE-FILE
(_CHGMES.EXE)
to any directory
from
FAPT
LADDER
system
floppy
disk(Vol.3).
Key in I_ CHGMES
on the installed directory,
* CHGMES.EXE
* RB3DUMMY.SFM
Example
files(.SFM)
then following
* ASC2lMG.EXE
* IMG2ASC.EXE
* RB3BASIC.SFM
* RB3MES.SFM
are used
to confirm
the installation
files are generated.

:
Execute files (.EXE)
example files(.SFM)
of this function
by activating
example
command.
4.
ACTIVATION
Key in following
command
at the DOS prompt activated
in the utility.(No.9
of FAPT LADDER
main
menu).
Or,Please
change the directory
(It is not necessary

Then key in following
CHGMES
in which this tool is installed.
to change the directory
when the PATHis
command.
[INPUT FILE]
[OUTPUT
FILE]
[PMC TYPE]
( [COMPARE
: : A handy file format file that consists
INPUT FILE
set.)
FILE] )
of a dummy ladder and message
to replace the message data in the basic message

Create this file by compiling
<return>
data
ladder file.
the source file and converting
to a handy file
format file using FAPT LADDER.

OUTPUT
FILE
: :
A handy file format message file created by this tool.

This file contains
only message
data.
By loading this file to the CNC, message
data in the CNC memory can be
substituted.
PMC TYPE
: :
PMC TYPE (RAl
or RA2 or RA3...etc.)
Please key in PMC TYPE that is defined
<Applied
PMCs>
item.
Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs.

COMPARE
(Optional)
FILE : :
Basic message
ladder file (Handy file format)
Please refer to the Fig.Operation
outline.
This
size
tool
COMPARE
guarantee
crashing
compares
message
FILE
to determine
that
only
the
message
of
the
if there
will
is a match.
be correctry
other data when you load the OUTPUT
A8-2
INPUT
FILE
and
the
Then,
you
can
replaced
FILE to CNC.
without
APPENDIX
<Outline
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
of Operation 7
Message for changing + Dummy ladder
Basic message ladder

+
Generation,
Editing
Check the SYMBOL top

address by memory map
display.
COMPILATION
+,
+,
J
INPUT/OUTPUT
(F4:FLOPPY
CASSETTE
Handy File)
Handy file format
Handy file format

ROM file
MEMORY
FLOPPY
CARD
%2
%l
(Note)
%2
r/
(Note)
%3
FLOPPY
MEMORY
r]ORu
Only message data for changing

Loading at [I/O]screen
(Note)
It is possible
FSl5-B
operation
CARD
of ROM file
of PMC.
to load by memory
card
only for FS16 -B, FS18-B,
FS-20,
FS21-B, and
(PMC-NB).
Please refer to the following
manual about detailed operation
of loading by the memory
card or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen.

FANUC PMC MODEL PAl/PA3/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RBURC/RC3/RCWNB
PROGRAMMING
MANUAL
(LADDER
LANGUAGE)
A8-3
(B-61863EI06)
APPENDIX
5.
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
USING EXAMPLE
Check the installation
of this function
by using the following
example.
There are some sample files in FAPT LADDER system floppy disk for checking
RB3DUMMY.SFM
: :
Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format)

(Message
RB3BASIC.SFM
: :
: :
data (50KB) + Ladder (END1 + END2))
Basic message
(Message
RB3MESSFM
this function.
ladder file (Handy file format)
data (50KB) + Ladder data + Symbol&Comment
Data for checking

(This
the result (Message
file is a normal
sample data.
output
It is possible
data)
data(50KB))
file, when
to check
this tool execute
result
by comparing
for above
OUTPUT
FILE and this file.)

Execute
as the following
(In this case the system
is installed
in main
body.)
(1) Please
A: y
key in the following

CHGMES
command.
RB3DUMMY.SFM
USERTEST.SFM
You can specify any name for OUTPUT
(2)
Following
file is generated
USERTESTSFM
FILE.ln
RB3
RB3BASIC.SFM
< return 7
this example,USERTEST.SFM
is used.
on current drive.
(Message
data (50KB))
COMMAND).
(3) Check the result by using FC/A(PC-DOS
A: Y 7 FC/A
USERTEST.SFM
RB3MES.SFM
If NO DIFFERENCES
6.
ENCOUNTERED
is displayed,
the result is correct.
ERROR MESSAGES
Message
chgmes : PMC type unmatch
Meaning
(pmc type)
and countermeasure
PMC type does not match between
applied
PMCs.
(input file)
PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do

not match.
(compare
file)
PMC type of compare
file and key in PMC
type do not match.

chgmes : Message
sizes of (input file) and
Message
(compare file) are mismatched
size of input file and compare
not agree. Please adjust the message
file do
size by
adding some dummy message to the input

file. Please confirm
compile function
chgmes : Cannot start ASC2lMG
ASC2lMG.EXE
directory
A8-4
the MAP display on the
of FAPT LADDER.
does not exist in the same
of CHGMES.EXE.
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
Message
DATA (CHGMES)
Meaning and countermeasure
chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC
IMG2ASC.EXE
directory
chgmes : Cannot make temporary
MESSAGE
of CHGMESEXE.
It is impossible
file
does not exist in the same
to make temporary
file.
* Disk is insufficient.
$tmpd.t
chgmes : Cannot make temporary
file
- It is impossible
$tmwd.t
to set the file name, because
$tmp*.tOO -$tmp*.t99
chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t*
Temporary
exist.
file can not be closed.
Please check the disk space.
Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB
ssc2img : Cannot allocate memory (bytes)
or more memory, and re-activate.

ssc2img : Conversion
area in input is
Ladder header of the input file is crushed.
zonflicted
Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.
asc2img : Unknown
file type
Illegal format of the input file.
Please change
the format, and re-activate.

asc2img : (input file) : Record No. has
There is an invalid data of input file.

Please correct as error message,
and
reactivate.
3sc2img : Cannot open file
Isc2img
There is no input file.
: Cannot close file
It is impossible
to close the file.

Isc2img : Cannot write
It is impossible
to write the temporary
file.

Memory is insufficient.
mg2asc : Cannot allocate memory (bytes)
Please free up 235KB
or more memory, and re-activate.

mg2asc : Cannot write
It is impossible
to write the output file.
A8-5
APPENDIX
9 SOFTWARE
VERSION TABLE
APPENDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE

To use the software described
As described
disk.
in Section
If software
2.1 in Part I, each system
products
in the same directory

When the software
in this manual, each CNC unit requires a different
of specific
versions
system disk.
must prepare an area of 3 Mbytes
listed below are used, however,
in its hard
they can be stored
and can be operated.

products
of specific
versions
of hard disk is a little more than 3 Mbytes.

moving the cursor on the model selection
1) System floppy disks of different
Software
the required
any PMC model can be selected
capacity
just by
screen.
versions
that can be used together
Combinations
(-Jxxx)
are stored in one directory,
in addition,
of different
versions
be entered into an identical
that can
directory
PMC-FIB/FE
Ol.O-
03.0-
04.0-
(-J502)
02.0
03.6
06.0
04.0-
05.0
06.1
06.2
06.3
05.0
06.1
06.2
06.3
PMC-N
Ol.l-
03.0-
02.3
03.1
Ol.l-
02.0-
03.0
01.12
02.3
(-J501)
PMC-L/M/P
(-J500)
06.1
06.2
06.3
06.4
07.008.4
04.8
-
04.004.8
A9-1
APPENDIX
2)
9 SOFTWARE
System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FS16/18/15B,Powe
VERSION TABLE
Mate-D, F-D Mate Mini
that can be used together
software
Combinations
of versions
(-Jxxx)
MC-RB/RC
01.0
02.0
03.0-03.6
(-J502)
?Al/RA2
MODULE
01.0
02.0
02.1
PMCRAl/RA2/RA3
04.0-
05.0-
04.2
06.0
03.0-
04.0
06.1
04.1
03.4
06.2-
08.0-
08.3-
07.1
08.1
08.4
04.2-
05.0
05.1
06.0
06.1
04.4
PA1 /PA3)
(-J603)
IB/RC MODULE
01.0
02.0
03.0
03.1-
04.0-
04.5
03.2
04.4
04.6
PMCRB/RB2/RB3
04.7
04.805.0
164/RC/RC3/RC4)
(-J604)
(Note)
1C MODULE
01.0
01.1
01.2
02.0
02.1
01.0
Ol.l-
02.0
02.1
(-J605)
JB MODULE
(-J606)
Note)
When using
01.2
PMCRB4iRC4,
install the RBIRC MODULE
floppy disk(-J604)
at last of all
installation.
3)
System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FSO,Power Mate-ABC
I -J*
Software
Note)
Combinations
of versions
PMC-L/M/P
500
01 .l -04.8
05.0
06.1
06.2 -06.3
L MODULE
600
01.1-02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0-06.0
M MODULE
601
01.1-03.0
04.0
05.0
06.0 -07.0
M (MMC) MODULE
602
01 .l -02.0
03.0
04.0
05.0-06.0
The column
entitled
-JXXX
indicates
the last three characters
9200/9201 -JXXX
A9-2
of software
code A08B-
APPENDIX
Software
products
listed in the same column
products
to be stored
in the same
Software
J502/03.0
2)
Software
products
VERSION TABLE
can be stored in the same directory.
directory
have
the different
software product with a smaller number must be installed
1)
9 SOFTWARE
first.
version
The following
When software
numbers,
however,
are examples:
J502iO3.0 and JSOliO4.3 can be stored in the same directory.
must be installed first.

products
J502!03.0
and J501/03.0
A9-3
cannot be stored in the same directory.
However,
APPENDIX
IO MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
APPENDIX IO MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM

1. TYPE OF SOURCE PROGRAM
There are two types of the source program of the following.
The file name and the control method are different though both are preserved
Especially,
1)
the function
of ZOOM and G-SRCH
can not be used at FORMAT-A
as some files.
but FORMAT-B.
FORMAT-A
The source program is managed using the following
names.
A single directory
can contain two
or more source programs.

- xxxxxxxx.#CN :
user programs
- xxxxxxxx.#PA
File storing system parameters
- xxxxxxxx.#TA
File storing the title data
- xxxxxxxx.#sY
File storing symbols
- xxxxxxxx.#c1
File storing comments
- xxxxxxxx.#c2
- xxxxxxxx.#ME
File storing messages
- xxxxxxxx.#l0
File storing the I/O module data
- xxxxxxxx.#LA
File storing ladder
(xxxxxxxx
2)
File managing
is the specified
(reserve)
source program name.)
FORMAT-B
A directory
managed
is created with the specified

under the following
names.
source program name.

A single directory
programs.
- CONTROL
File managing
the source program
- SYSPARAM
File storing system parameters
- TITLE
File storing the title data
- SYMBOL
File storing symbols
- COMMENT1
- COMMENT2
- MESSAGE
File storing messages
- IOMODULE
File storing the l/O module data
- LEVEL1 .#LA
File storing ladder of the first level
- LEVEL2.#LA
File storing ladder of the second level
- LEVEL3.#LA
File storing ladder of the third level
- PYYYYY.#LA
File storing ladder subprograms
- PYYYYY.#SS
File storing step sequence
(yyyyy is a subprogram
(reserve)
subprograms
number.)
A10-1
In the directory,
cannot
contain
the program is
two or more source
APPENDIX
3.
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
The following
functions
The FORMAT-C
10 MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
OF FORMAT-C
have been added to PMCRB4RB4
source program is organized
(STEP SEQRCWRC4
(STEP SEQ.
by below files.
C: y DATA y PRG - C as source program >
<A case of specifying
C:Y
data Y
PRG
CY
-CONTROL
- SYSPARAM
* TITLE
- XSYMBOL.xxx
- MESSAGE
- IOMODULE
* LEVEL1 #LA
* LEVEL2.#LA
* LEVELWLA
* Pyyy.#LA
- Pzzz.#SS
. NETCMT.xxx
* OPTION
- * MCARD
t
t
Source program managing file

System parameter data file
Title data file
Symbol & Comment data file
Message data file
I/O Module data file
First level ladder data file
Second level ladder data file
Third level ladder data file
Sub-program ladder data file
Sub-program step sequence data file
Net comment data file
Setting of option
Memory card syste file
(Notel)
(Note2)
(Note3)
yyy, zzz is number of sub-program.
The format
of newly
2)
3)
3)
1)
Only for use LEVEL3 ladder at PMCRC4IRC4(STEP).
created
source
program
is specified
Data file name : %%%FLSET.CNF

Source program type
7;
kB4
3;
RB4 STEP :3;
RC4=3;
RC4_STEP
= 3;
(Note
(Note
(Note
(Note
xxx is number of multi file managing.
initial settings for RB4!RB4(STEP)/RC4/RC4(STEP)
(Note 1)
Parameters
value
1 = FORMAT-A
3 = FORMAT-C
(initial setting)
A10-3
by %%%FLSET.CNF
are FORMAT-C.
data file.
The
APPENDIX
4.
10 MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE AND PMC MODEL
The source program type is decided by setting the PMC model.

1) FORMAT-A.
2)
3)
PMCRC/RC3RBiRB2/RB3.:RAl/RA2/RA3
PMC-NBQC
PMCPAl!PA3
PMC-NN (10 LINK)/QA
PMC-LMIM (MMC)
PMC-RB4/RC4(A08B-9200/9201 -Jr502 ver.8.0 or earlier)
FORMAT-B
-
PMCRB4 (STEP SEQ)/RC4 (STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver. 8.1, 8.2, 8.3)
PMC-RB4/RC4 (A08B-9200!9201-J502 ver.8.0, 8.2, 8.3)
FORMAT-C
-
PMCRB4.RB4 (STEP SEQ)IRCWRC4(STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver 8.4 or later)
PMC-RBMRBG!NB2
Note)
In case of PMCRBWRC4, FAPT LADDER creates two types of source program as above
mentioned.
Therefore, the source program of ver.8.0 needs conversion for using on
ver.8.1.
For the operation of conversion refer to next chapter 6.4 Conversion from FORMAT-A to
FORMAT-B
A10-4
APPENDIX
5.
CONVERSION
When FAPT LADDER
10 MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
FROM FORMAT-A TO FORMAT-B
for PMC-RB4iRC4(A08B-9200!9201-J502)
is updated
from ver.8.0 or earlier
to ver.8.1 or later, it needs source program conversion.

The operation
1)
is the following.
Convert the source program FORMAT-A

LADDER(A08B-9200!9201-J502)
2)
Convert the mnemonic

The conversion
data with FAPT
ver.8.1 or later.
by above mentioned.
statement
file, which
has extension
.#I.$,
for combining
modules,
the
is the following.
Do the operation
Combine each mnemonic
Do the operation
Note)
mnemonic
data into a source program with the same FAPR LADDER.
is completed
In case of using a control

operation
into an all-format
of 1) by each source program in the control statement.

data into an all-format
data.
of 2).
It is possible
to use FORMAT-A
%%%FLSET.CNF.
For the
mnemonic
without
conversion.
In that case, you need to modify a
But it is not recommended.
%%%FLSET.CNF
refer
to the
APPENDIX
System
configuration
file
%%%FLSET.CNF.
6.
COPYING AND MOVING A SOURCE PROGRAM
FAPT LADDER does not support a function

Because the source program
file manipulation
on a specified
programs for an identical
For example,
following
is managed
to enable the copying
as described
directory
with
above, it can be copied or moved by using
the COPY
or another
MS-DOS
command.
Only
model can be handled in this way.
to make a backup copy on floppy disk of the source program shown above, enter the
command
at the MS-DOS
prompt:
1)
Suppose that the floppy disk drive is B:.
2)
Create a source program storage directory
A > MKDIR B: +r BACKUP
3)
or moving of a source program.
on B:.
[RET]
Copy all files under the directories
specified
with the source program name.
The source program is copied.

To edit the copied source program,
start FAPT LADDER
program name.
A10-5
and specify
B:Y BACKUP
as the source
APPENDIX 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%%FLSET.CNF.
APPENDIX 11
%%%FLSET.CNF
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%% FLSET.

CNF.
is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by which the behavior
of FAPT LADDER is decided, are described there.

The file exits in the directory in which the system of FAPT LADDER is installed.
And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.
1. Sample of %%%FLSET.CNF
;IIIII=tll
trrfllllllllllltlll1111111111111110
IPttLtllLlDlttPOltt=It
FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File
( 'key word =' <= Scharactets )

t
;rPlrllLIIDl====ltll IILDIIIILrt=rlllllPL-======-= Illll'llttllllltlll=
f
=t=tff== System Setup ====t===
lS:
:
editor =;
Text Editor
:
ladkey = 1;
Ladder editing key buffer size
( 1 <= ladkey <- 16 )
;
:
password=O;
0:No password
l:Password(R/W)and(R)
2:Password(R/W)
3:Password(R)
:
f
;
i
===f==== Utility Information ==t====

lU:
:
N = UTILITY;
Utility Guidance
i
Fl
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
= DOS / command.com;
= file List / ISCREENZ;
= flOadat / FLOADAT;
=;
=;
=;
=;
[Fl]
[FZ]
(F3)
[F4]
[FSJ
[F6]
[F7]
Soft Key Guidance

Soft Key Guidance
Soft Key Guidance
Soft Key Guidance
Soft Key Guidance
Soft Key Guidance
Soft Key Guidance
[FE] Soft Key Guidance
[F9] Soft Key Guidance
[FlO] Soft Key Guidance
F8 =;
F9 =;
FlO=;
6 EXE
h EXE
6 EXE
L EXE
C EXE
h EXE
6 EXE
6 EXE
& EXE
6 EXE
i
:
*T;
======== Source program type r=======
LB4
'2;
RB4_STEP=2;
'2;
RC4
RC4_STEP=2;
'1' or '2'.
PMC+B4(STEP
SEQ) only supports
'1' or '2'.
PMC-RCI(STEP SEQ) only supports
IEOFI
All-l
'2'.
'2'.
APPENDIX
All parameters
Hereafter,
1)
11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
in the %%%FLSET.CNF
are described
content of setting parameters
Specification
is explained
FILE %%% FLSET.CNF.
following
the form of key word = .
by each item.
of source program type
a) Function
FAPT LADDER
source,
editing
will newly
create
the source
new source program
program
at conversion
of mnemonic
->
and decompilation.
The type of created source program is decided at this time.
key word
By each PMC model, a setting parameter will be described succeeding
=========
Source program type = = = = = = = = .
Key word shows the model and uses the same character
information
on the status line displayed
This setting is effective
the line of I* T;
string as the display
of model
in each screen of FAPT LADDER.
only in case of Key word RB4
= , RC4
= .
As for the value, either "1" or 2 is effective.

_ .I w
1 = FORMAT-A
- 2
= FORMAT-B
It is FORMAT-B
of ZOOM
in initialization.
and G-SRCH
When the source program type is FORMAT-B,
can be used.
All
-2
the function
APPENDIX
12
INQUIRY FORM
APPENDIX 12 INQUIRY FORM

Comoanv
name
Section
Person in charqe
Phone No.
Address
Fax No.
FANUC
sales person
No.
Product name
Ordering code
2
3
4
5
[Usage environment]
Machine
DOS
(Manufacturer:
tvpe used (PC)
MS-DOS
EMS board:
Other equipment
Version
(Manufacturer:
Yes
(Manufacturer:
(Manufacturer:
I No
(printer, etc.)
Please print out the CONFIG.SYS
and AUTOEXECBAT
files on a sheet and attach it to this form.
[Details of inquiry]
Please use this form when you have any questions
AlZ-1
about this product.
INDEX
(PMC-RA~/RA~/RB~/RB~/RB~!RB~!RC~/RC~/NB!NB~)
A Program Configuration
ACTIVATION
Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - 99
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-15
<B>
BASICOPERATION
Basic Operation
BOOT SYSTEM
BUSY control
l-17
...............................................
3- 6
...................................................
OPERATING
PROCEDURE
(FOR THE FS20)
................
A5 - 1
2- 4
....................................................
<c>
CAUTIONS
FOR USING THE O/S
.....................................
Changing
Changing
Changing
the paper selection

input during startup
COMMON
OPERATIONS
Common
Communications
l-
..................................
....................................
2- 1
..................
........................................
2- 2
1 - 94
.....................................................
of a mnemonic
Conversion
of a source program to a mnemonic
file to a source program
Convert the PMC Type of Sequence
Program
Converting
a step sequence
Converting
by system parameter
Creating a step sequence

Creating a Step Sequence
Creating a subprogram
Data conversion
program according
editing
program
file
.......................
1 - 152
.......................
l-150
.............................
...................................
Convert with signal address converter
to the model
....................................
...........................................
(return codes)
..............................
........................................
.......................................................
Data start and end codes

DATATRANSFERCABLES
Decompilation
DOScommand
2- 8
2- 9
.................
..................................
2- 1
1 - 19
............................................
settings
103
2 - 14
Conversion
DataFlow
2 - 12
........................................
System Operations
Compilation
......................................
name
Command
A7 - 1
............................................
.........................................
..................................................
.................................................
1 - 113
2- 8
3 - 10
3- 9
3- 9
2- 5
3-3
2-5
Al-l
l-110
l-109
<E>
Editing
EDITING
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-22
3-6
Error detection
and handling
Error detection
and messages
ERROR MESSAGES
2- 7
..........................................
.........................................
2- 6
A3 - 1
..............................................
<F>
FLOPPY CASSETTE
FUNCTION
ADAPTER
FOR OPERATING
Function for Transferring
+ 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)

THE PMC-UM
Data between
WITH RAM
the P-G and PC
...............
1 - 149
....................
A2 - 1
......................
2- 1
<H>
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS
l/O module editing
Input/Output
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
................................................
IBM PC/AT operating
environment
for PMC-QA
Input/Output
format)
l-70
.....................................
(FANUC SYSTEM
F-MODEL
l-10
D Mate)
...............
l-134
...................................................
INQUIRYFORM
Installation
1-119
................................................
Procedure
INSTALLATION
l-147
A12-
..............................................
l-11
...................................................
1-5
It is possible to choose output data (SymbolComment,
Net comment)
to ROM format file1 - 103
<I_>
Link
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANAGING
MEMORY
A SOURCE
PROGRAM
CARD COMPATIBILITY
Memory card interface

Menu Configuration
Merge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..................................
(FOR THE PMCRAl/RA3,
in the personal computer
NB, AND QC)
and memory card
.............
...............................................
1-142
1-17
1-113
...............................................
l-150
Editing
file format
.............................................
l-153
...................................................
PROGRAMMING
(PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3
A6-1
l-68
Mnemonic
MODULAR
......
.................................................
Mnemonic
Model Setting
1-116
AlO-
........................................................
Message editing
l-26
l-21
ONLY)
....................
A4-1
co>
Operating
Environment
OPERATION
Operation
Outputting
OVERVIEW
..............................................
....................................................
..............................................
to split files
............................................
...................................................
1- 6
l-22
1 - 95, l-110,3-4
1-112
1 - 1,3-l
<P>
Password
set function
PC9801 operating
Printout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming
Protocol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
environment
with the Step Sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Method
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 7
l-85
3- 1
2-4
l-122
<s>
Sample mnemonic
files (all-format)
Sample mnemonic
files (single-format)
1-166
...................................
l-157
.................................
3-4
...............................................
SETTINGAMODEL
Setting form feed
.................................................
2-23
Setting line feed
.................................................
2-23
list output format guidance
list output information
list read/write
Setting the output format guidance
coil guidance
2-16
2-16
2-22
....................................
Setting the printer model and print paper
2-22
2-22
coil guidance
2-15
................................
2-23
....................................
Setting the spacing between the LADDER net
2- 14
............................
2- 19
...........................................
Setting the title of printout
2-14
.............................................
Setting the top margin

VERSION
A9-1
.......................................
TABLE
2-21
...............................
Specifying
the cross-reference
list linefeed
Specifying
the cross-reference
list output format
Specifying
the cross-reference
list page break
2-20
...........................
2-21
............................
2-11
.............................................
Standard Symbol Data
l-60
........................................
editing
CONFIGURATION
System parameter
2-21
.............
........................................
Setting the output information
SYSTEM
information
...........................................
Setting the output format
Symbol and comment
2-20
..........................
............................................
Setting the line spacing
SOFTWARE
2-19
..............
.............................................
Setting the left margin
Setting the read/write
information
FILE %%% FLSET.CNF.
All-l
.....................
l-73
..........................................
editing
<T>
The Configration
of a Sequence
3- 2
.................................
l-105
.........................................
The note if the step sequence

Title data editing
Program
function
is selected when setting a model
........
l-25
.................................................
TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
Transfer
to and from PMC-UM
Transfer
to and from PMC-N/NA
DATA (CHGMES)
l-170
A8 - 1
......................
l-124
(FANUC Series 0) .........................

(FANUC Series 15-MODEL
A, -MODEL
B)
......
l-131
Revision
FAPT LADDER
05
Dec., 95
(For Personal Computer)
Record
OPERATORS MANUAL (B-66131 E)
- Corresponding descriptions for PMC-RBSIRBGiNB2
* Addition of PMC-MODEL RA3/RB3/FKX/PAl/PA3/QC/NB

. Addition of symbol and comment edit function on Ladder Edit
screen
04
Jun., 93
03
Dec., 92
Correction of errors
02
Sep., 92
Total revision
01
Jun., 90
Edition
Date
* Addition
* Addition
. Addition
. Change
of
of
of
of
external ROM format file conversion function

cross reference print format setting function
mnemonic edit label/subprogram Item
symbol and comment edit function
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
EUROPEAN
HEADQUARTERS
- GRAND-DUCHt
DE LUXEMBOURG
GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.

Zone Industrielle
L6469 Echternach
4 (+352) 727979- 1
I (+352) 727979-214
BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS
- Netherlands Branch Postbus 7230 - NI.4800 GE Breda
Minervum 1603A - NI.4817 ZL Breda
%I (+31) 765783 201 (CNC)
%I (+31) 765783 212 (PLC)
I (+31) 765870 181
CZECH REPUBLIC
c/o GETSCO Inc.
Husova 5
CZ-110 00 Praha 1
FRANCE
GE Fanuc Automation France S.A.
45, rue du Bois Chaland
Lisses
F-91 029 Evry Cedex
%I (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC)
%I (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC)
I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49
GERMANY
GE Fanuc Automation GmbH
Bernhauser StraBe 45
GERMANY
Elberfelder Str. 45
D-40724 Hilden
%I (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC)
%I (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC)
I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC)
I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC)
GERMANY
Otto-Schmerbach-Str.
20
D-091 17 Chemnitz
GERMANY
GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland
Bensheimer Str. 61
D-65428 Russelsheim
4 (+49) 6142 357600
I (+49) 6142 357611
GmbH
4 (+420) 22440 1284

I (+420) 22440 1284
D-73765 Neuhausen
%I (+49) 7158 187
I (+49) 7158 187 455
I (+49) 7158 187 466
a.d.F
400
(CNC)
(PLC)
4 (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC)

%I (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC)
I (+49) 371 8448 115
GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB
Hammarbacken 4
S-l 9149 Sollentuna
4 (+46) 8 444 5520
I (+46) 8 444 5521
ITALY
GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1.
Piazza Tirana 24/4B
I-201 44 Milan0
%I (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC)
I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC)
ITALY
GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a
Via Tortona 27
I-201 44 Milan0
4 (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC)
I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC)
SPAIN
GE Fanuc Automation Espaiia S.A.
Poligono Industrial Olaso
Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11
E-20870 Elgoibar
%I (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC)
I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC)
SPAIN
GE Power Controls Iberica S.A.
Calle Miiio, S/N
E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona)
%I (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC)
I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC)
SWITZERLAND
GE Fanuc Automation
Filiale Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz
MullerstraBe 3
CH-2562 Port
%I (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC)
%I (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC)
I (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC)
I (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC)
UNITED KINGDOM
GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd.
Unit 1 - Mill Square
Featherstone Road
Wolverton Mill South
Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ
%I (+44) 1908 84 4000
I (+44) 1908 84 4001
01/98

FAPT Ladder For PC-Operator Manual

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

FAPT Ladder For PC-Operator Manual

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT Ladder for PC

Warnings and notices for

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation

Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd.

Title data editing

Ladder diagram editing

System parameter editing

It is possible to choose output data

to ROM format file

the Order of Subprograms

IBM PC/AT operating

to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL

to and from PMC-N!NA

Memory card interface

Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS

to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB!QC

+ 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)

of a source program to a mnemonic

The note if the step sequence

User batch file execution

file to a source program

and memory card

when setting a model

FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCAT

Function for Transferring

Data start and end codes

the P-G and PC

input during startup

and receive data

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence

Convert with signal address converter

Standard Symbol Data

(FANUC Series 15MODEL

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

to and from PMC-L/M

program for another program

Printer Output Format

Setting the top margin

Setting the spacing between

the paper selection

Setting the line spacing

Settingthe left margin

1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper

Setting the title of printout

Setting the cross-reference

list output format guidance

Setting the cross-reference

list output information

list output format

list page break

Setting the output format guidance

Setting the output information

Setting the output format

Setting the read/write coil guidance

Setting line feed

with the Step Sequence Method

Creating a Step Sequence

Setting form feed

Setting the cross-reference

8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

(FOR THE FS20)